Traductor de Presiune - PMD75

abcd
S.C. Complexul Energetic Rovinari S.A. Rovinari Air Pollution Reduction Equipment
ROVINARI – Turn-Key WFGD Units 3-6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MANUAL DE OPERARE SI MENTENANTA
2. OPERATION
2. INSTRUCTIUNI DE OPERARE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Instructiuni de operare
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75
Traductor de presiune diferentiala
BA270P/00/ro/05.04
52022793
valabil de la
Versiunea software 02.00
Versiunea hardware 02.00
Prezentare documentatie Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
Prezentare documentatie
Aparat Documentatie Continut Prezentare
Deltabar S 4...20 mA HART Informatia tehnica TI382P Date tehnice Documentatia este disponibila pe CD
ToF Tool. CD-ul este furnizat cu orice
aparat comandat cu optiunea
"HistoROM module".
Vezi: www.endress.com → Download
Instructiuni de operare BA270P – Identificare Documentatia este furnizata cu
– Instalare aparatul.
– Cablare Vezi: www.endress.com → Download
– Operare
– Punerea in functiune. Descrierea
meniului setare rapida (Quick
Setup)
– Mentenanta
– Detectare defecte si piese de
schimb
– Anexa: Ilustrare meniu
Instructiuni de operare BA274P – Exemple de configurare pentru → Vezi: www.endress.com →

masurarea presiunii, nivelului si Download
debitului
– Descrierea parametrilor
– Detectare defecte
– Anexa: Ilustrare meniu
Rezumat instructiuni operare KA218P – Cablare Documentatia este furnizata cu

– Operare fara display local aparatul. Vezi capacul
– Descrierea meniului setare rapida- compartimentului terminal.
Quick Setup
– Operarea HistoROM®/M-DAT
Manual functionare in siguranta – Functionare in siguranta cu Documentatia este furnizata cu

SD189P Deltabar S aparatul asa cum se arata in versiunea
– Comportarea in exploatare si "E" caracteristica 100 "Optiuni
defectarea suplimentare 1" sau in caracteristica
– Pornirea si testele in pasi 110 "Optiuni suplimentare 2".
– Setari → Vezi si informatia tehnica TI382P,
– Specificatii cantitative pentru capitolul "Informatii despre
siguranta comanda".
– Sumar management
2 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Cuprins
Cuprins
1 Precizari privind siguranta . . . . . . . . . . . .4 8 Detectare defecte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.1 Utilizare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.1 Mesaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.2 Instalare, punere in functiune si operare . . . . . . . . . 4 8.2 Raspunsul iesirilor la erori . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.3 Siguranta in functionare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.3 Confirmare mesaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.4 Precizari privind conventii si simboluri de siguranta 5 8.4 Reparare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.5 Repararea aparatelor certificate Ex . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2 Identificare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 8.6 Piese de schimb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.7 Returnare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.1 Destinatie aparat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8.8 Disponibilizare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.2 Scopul livrarii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8.9 Istoric software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.3 Marca CE, declaratia de conformitate . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4 Marci inregistrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
9 Date tehnice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3 Instalare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
10 Anexa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.1 Receptia si depozitarea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 Conditii de instalare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10.1 Meniul de operare pentru display-ul local, ToF Tool si
3.3 Instructiuni de instalare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 comunicatorul manual HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.4 Verificari dupa instalare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 10.2 Matricea de operare HART Commuwin II . . . . . . 79
10.3 Brevete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4 Cablare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.1 Conectarea aparatului . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2 Conectarea unitatii de masurare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3 Egalizare potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.4 Verificari dupa conectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5 Operare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
5.1 Display local (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.2 Elemente de operare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.3 Operarea locala–
Display-ul local neconectat 30
Display-ul local conectat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.5 HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.6 Programul de operare ToF Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.7 Operarea cu comunicatorul manual HART . . . . . . 39
5.8 Programul de operare Commuwin II . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.9 Blocarea/deblocarea operarii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.10 Setari fabrica (resetari) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6 Punerea in functiune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

6.1 Functia de verificare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.2 Selectare limba si mod masurare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.3 Ajustare pozitie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.4 Masurarea debitului . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.5 Masurarea nivelului . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.6 Masurarea presiunii diferentiale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7 Mentenanta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
7.1 Curatarea exterioara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Endress+Hauser 3
Precizari privind siguranta Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
1 Precizari privind siguranta
1.1 Utilizare
Deltabar S este un traductor de presiune diferentiala pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale, a
debitului si nivelului.
Fabricantul nu este raspunzator pentru pagubele rezultate din utilizarea incorecta a aparatului sau
in alte scopuri decat cele pentru care a fost destinat.
1.2 Instalare, punere in functiune si operare

Aparatul a fost proiectat pentru o functionare sigura, in conformitate cu standardele tehnice
actuale de siguranta si normele EU. Totusi, daca este utilizat incorect sau in alte scopuri decit cele
pentru care este destinat, el poate duce la aplicatii specifice periculoase, de ex. producerea unui
supradebit ca urmare a instalarii sau calibrarii incorecte. In consecinta, instalarea, conectarea,
operarea si intretinerea aparatului trebuie efectuate in conformitate cu instructiunile din acest
manual numai de catre un specialist autorizat si calificat corespunzator. Personalul tehnic trebuie
sa citeasca, sa inteleaga si sa respecte aceste instructiuni de operare. Modificarile si reparatiile
sunt permise numai daca acestea sunt indicate in mod expres in manual. Se va acorda o atentie
particulara datelor tehnice inscrise pe eticheta
1.3 Siguranta in functionare
1.3.1 Zone cu pericol de explozie

Daca aparatul va fi instalat intr-o zona cu pericol de explozie, atunci trebuie respectate
specificatiile din certificat precum si toate reglementarile nationale si locale. O documentatie
separata Ex este anexata aparatului si este parte integranta a acestei documentatii. Regulile de
instalare, valorile de conectare si instructiunile de siguranta listate in acest document trebuie
respectate.
• Asigurati-va ca tot personalul este calificat corespunzator.
4 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Precizari privind siguranta
1.4 Precizari privind conventii si simboluri de siguranta

In scopul evidentierii procedurilor de operare relevante pentru siguranta sau procedurilor
alternative, au fost utilizate in manual urmatoarele conventii, fiecare indicata de un simbol
caracteristic, pe marginea laterala.
Simbol Semnificatie
Pericol!
"Pericol" indica activitati sau proceduri care, daca nu sunt executate corect pot conduce la
ranirea grava a personalului, la aparitia unor situatii periculoase sau la distrugerea
aparatului.
Atentie!
"Atentie" indica activitati sau proceduri care, daca nu sunt executate corect pot conduce la
ranirea personalului sau la o functionare incorecta a aparatului.
Nota!
"Nota" indica activitati care, daca nu sunt executate corect ar putea influenta indirect
functionarea aparatului sau ar putea genera un raspuns neprevazut .
Aparat certificat pentru utilizare in zone cu pericol de explozie

Daca aparatul are acest simbol aplicat pe eticheta, el poate fi utilizat in zone cu pericol de
explozie sau in zone fara pericol de explozie, conform aprobarii.
Zona cu pericol de explozie

Simbol utilizat in planuri pentru a indica o zona cu pericol de explozie.
– Aparatele amplasate in zone clasificate cu “pericol de explozie” trebuie sa aiba tipul de
protectie corespunzator.
Zona sigura (fara pericol de explozie)

Simbol utilizat in planuri pentru a indica, daca este necesar, o zona fara pericol de
explozie.
– Aparatele amplasate in zone sigure au nevoie de certificare daca iesirile lor intra in
zone cu pericol de explozie.
Tensiune continua
Un terminal la care se aplica o tensiune de CC sau prin care trece CC.
Tensiune alternativa
Un terminal la care se aplica o tensiune alternativa (sinusoidala) sau prin care trece CA.
Terminal de impamantare
Un terminal de impamantare, care, din punctul de vedere al utilizatorului, este deja
impamantat prin sistemul de impamantare.
Terminal de impamantare de protectie

Un terminal care trebuie conectat la centura de impamantare inaintea efectuarii altor
conexiuni.
Terminal de echipotential
O conexiune care trebuie facuta la sistemul de impamantare al echipamentului: acesta
poate fi, de exemplu, o linie de egalizare potential a unui sistem de impamantare in forma
radiala (stea), functie de practica nationala sau de firma.
Endress+Hauser 5
Identificare Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
2 Identificare
2.1 Destinatie aparat
2.1.1 Eticheta
Made in Germany
79689 Maulburg
ENDRESS+HAUSER 4
DELTABAR-S
Order Code: 1 3
2
Ser.-No.: 5 7
MWP 6 p 8
Mat. 9
Span 10 11
U= 12 13
P01-xMD7xxxx-18-xx-xx-xx-001
Fig. 1: Eticheta pentru Deltabar S

1 Cod comanda
Vezi specificatiile din confirmarea comenzii pentru a intelege semnificatia literelor si cifrelor.
2 GL-simbol pentru certificat marin (optional)
3 Numar ID de notificare a organizatiei care priveste directiva echipamentelor de presiune (optional)
4 Numar ID de notificare a organizatiei care priveste ATEX (optional)
5 Numar serial
6 MWP (Presiunea maxima de lucru)
7 Simbol: Nota: Se va acorda o atentie deosebita datelor tehnice din "Informatia tehnica"!
8 Domeniul de masurare
9 Materiale umede
10 Intervalul minim/maxim
11 Versiunea electronica (semnal iesire)
12 Tensiunea de alimentare
13 Gradul de protectie
Aparatele utilizate in mediu Ex sunt prevazute cu o eticheta suplimentara.
1
2
4 5 Dat.: 6
Fig. 2: Eticheta suplimentara pentru aparatele utilizate in mediu Ex

1 Numar certificat examinare tip EC
2 Tip protectie ex. II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4/T6
3 Date electrice
4 Numar instructiune siguranta ex. XA 235-P
5 Index instructiune siguranta ex. A
6 Data de fabricatie aparat (luna si anul))
6 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Identificare
Nota !Note!
• MWP (presiunea maxima de lucru) este specificata pe eticheta. Aceasta valoare se refera la
temperatura de referinta de 20°C (68°F) sau 100°F pentru flanse ANSI.
• Testul de presiune PT/(Limita de suprapresiune OPL) = MWP (eticheta) x 1.5.
• Valorile de presiune permise la temperaturi mai mari pot fi gasite in urmatoarele standarde:
– EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab. 18 1
– ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2-2.2 F316
– ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2.3.8 N10276
– JIS B2210/B2238
1) Referitor la stabilitatea cu temperatura, materialul 1.4435 este identic cu 1.4404 care este grupat sub 13EO in EN
1092-1 Tab. 18. Compozitia chimica a celor doua materiale poate fi identica.
2.2 Scopul livrarii

Scopul livrarii cuprinde:
• Traductor de presiune diferentiala Deltabar S (pentru PMD70 si PMD75 cu flanse laterale din
AISI 316L: suruburi strangere, AISI 316L)
• Pentru aparatele cu optiunea"HistoROM module" :
CD-ROM cu programul de operare ToF Tool si documentatie
• Accesorii optionale
Documentatia livrata:
• Instructiuni de operare BA270P (acest document)
• Rezumat instructiuni de operare KA218P
• Raport final de inspectie
• Optional: formular de calibrare fabrica
• Pentru aparatele care se utilizeaza in medii cu pericol de explozie:
documentatie suplimentara, ca de exemplu ª Instructiuni de siguranta (XA...), Planuri de
control sau instalare (ZD...)
Documentatie suplimentara disponibila la aparatele cu optiunea "HistoROM module":
• Informatia tehnica TI382P
2.3 Marca CE, declaratia de conformitate

Aparatele au fost proiectate pentru a respecta cele mai noi cerinte de protectie, au fost testate si
au iesit din fabrica pentru a functiona in conditii perfecte de siguranta. Aparatele corespund cu
standardele si reglementarile aplicabile, in conformitate cu DIN EN 61010 "Safety requirements
for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use". Sistemul de masurare
descris in aceste instructiuni de operare respecta cerintele din directivele EC. Endress+Hauser
confirma testarea cu succes a aparatelor prin afisarea marcii CE.
2.4 Marci inregistrate
KALREZ, VITON, TEFLON

Marci inregistrate de E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA
TRI-CLAMP
Marca inregistrata de Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA
HART
Marca inregistrata de HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA.
Endress+Hauser 7
Instalare Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
3 Instalare
3.1 Receptia si depozitarea
3.1.1 Receptia
• Se verifica ambalajul si continutul pentru orice semn de deteriorare.
• Se verifica livrarea, faptul ca nu lipseste nimic si ca livrarea corespunde cu comanda.
3.1.2 Depozitarea
Aparatul trebuie pastrat intr-un spatiu uscat, curat si protejat impotriva deteriorarilor prin impact
(EN 837-2).
Temperatura de depozitare:
• –40...+100°C (–40...+212°F)
• Display local : –40...+85°C (–40...+185°F)
3.2 Conditii de instalare
3.2.1 Dimensiuni
→ Pentru dimensiuni, vezi informatia tehnica pentru Deltabar S TI382P, sectiunea "Constructia
mecanica" .Vezi si pag. 2, "Prezentare documentatie"
3.3 Instructiuni de instalare

Nota !Note!
• Datorita orientarii aparatului Deltabar S, poate apare o deplasare a valorii masurate, de exemplu
cand containerul este gol, valoarea masurata afisata nu este zero. Aceasta deplasare de zero
poate fi corectata → vezi pag 44, sectiunea 6.3 "Ajustare pozitie".
• Pentru FMD77 si FMD78, va rugam sa vedeti 3.3.4. "Instructiuni de instalare pentru aparate cu
diafragme etanse", pag. 15.
• Recomandari generale pentru traseul tevilor de impuls pot fi gasite in DIN 19210 "Metode
pentru masurarea debitului fluidelor; tevile de impuls pentru aparatele de masurare a debitului"
sau standardele nationale sau internationale corespunzatoare.
• Utilizand o baterie cu trei cai sau cinci cai se usureaza punerea in functiune, instalarea si
intretinerea fara intreruperea procesului.
• Cand se ruteaza tevile de impuls in exterior, se va asigura o protectie anti-inghet, de exemplu
prin incalzirea electrica a traseului tevilor de impuls.
• Tevile de impuls se instaleaza cu o panta de scurgere de cel putin 10%.
• Pentru a asigura o citire optima pe display-ul local, este posibila rotirea carcasei pana la 380°.
→ vezi pag.18, sectiunea 3.3.7 "Rotirea carcasei".
• Endress+Hauser ofera o brida de montaj pentru instalarea pe teava sau perete. → Vezi pag.17,
sectiunea 3.3.6 "Montarea pe perete si teava".
8 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Instalare
3.3.1 Instalarea pentru masurarea debitului

Nota !Note!
Pentru mai multe informatii despre masurarea debitului cu traductorul de presiune diferentiala
Deltabar S si diafragma de masura sau tub Pitot, vezi informatia tehnica TI297P Deltatop/
Deltaset.
Masurarea debitului de gaze cu PMD70/PMD75
➁
➂
+ – ➃
P01-PMD75xxx-11-xx-xx-xx-000
Fig. 3: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului de gaze cu PMD75

1 Deltabar S, aici PMD75
2 Baterie cu trei robineti
3 Robinete de izolare
4 Diafragma sau tub Pitot
• Se monteaza Deltabar S deasupra prizei de masura astfel incat condesatul sa se scurga in proces.
Masurarea debitului de abur cu PMD70/PMD75
➁
➂ ➂
➃
+ –
➄ ➄
➅ ➅
➆
Fig. 4: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului de abur cu PMD75

1 Vase separare condens
5 Separator
6 Robinete de drenaj
• Se monteaza Deltabar S sub punctul de masurare.

• Se monteaza vasele de separare condens la acelasi nivel cu priza de masurare si la aceiasi
distanta de Deltabar S.
• Inainte de punerea in functiune, se umplu tevile de impuls pana la inaltimea vaselor de separare
condens.
Endress+Hauser 9
Masurarea debitului unui lichid cu PMD70/PMD75
➁ ➁
+ ➂ –
➃ ➃
➄ ➄
➅
Fig. 5: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului unui lichid cu PMD75

4 Separator
5 Robinete drenaj
• Se monteaza Deltabar S sub priza de masura astfel ca teava de impuls este totdeauna plina cu
lichid si bulele de gaz se pot intoarce in conducta din proces.
• Cand se masoara in medii cu particule solide, cum ar fi lichide cu impuritati, se instaleaza
separatoare si robinete de drenaj pentru retinerea si eliminarea sedimentelor.
3.3.2 Instalarea pentru masurarea nivelului
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container deschis cu PMD70/PMD75
patm
min. + patm ➀
➃ ➁
➄
➂
Fig. 6: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container deschis cu PMD75
1 Partea negativa este deschisa la presiunea atmosferica
3 Robinet de izolare
4 Separator
5 Robinet de drenaj
• Se monteaza Deltabar S sub cea mai joasa priza de masura astfel ca teava de impuls este
totdeauna plina cu lichid.
• Partea negativa este deschisa la presiunea atmosferica.
10 Endress+Hauser
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container deschis cu FMD76/FMD77
patm
min.
+ ➀
–
patm
➁
P01-FMD76xxx-11-xx-xx-xx-003
Fig. 7: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container deschis cu FMD76
1 Deltabar S, aici FMD76
2 Partea negativa este deschisa la presiunea atmosferica
• Se monteaza Deltabar S direct pe container. → vezi si pag.17, sectiunea 3.3.5 "Etansarea pentru
montaj cu flanse".
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu PMD70/PMD75
–➀
max.
min. ➀
+
➁
➂ ➂
➃ ➃
➄
Fig. 8: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu PMD75
2 Deltabar S, PMD75
3 Separator
Endress+Hauser 11
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu FMD76/FMD77
➀
–
max.
min.
➁
+ ➂
➃
Fig. 9: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu FMD76
1 Robinet de izolare
2 Separator
3 Robinet drenaj
montaj cu flanse".
separatoare si robinete de drenaj pentru retinerea si eliminarea sedimentelor
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu FMD78
–
max.
➀
+
min.
Fig. 10: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu FMD78
• Se monteaza Deltabar S sub cea mai de jos diafragma etansa. → vezi si pag.15, sectiunea 3.3.4
"Instructiuni de instalare pentru aparatele cu diafragme etanse".
• Temperatura mediului ambiant trebuie sa fie aceiasi pentru ambele tevi de impuls.
Nota !Note!
Masurarea nivelului este asigurata numai intre marginea superioara a diafragmei etanse de jos si
marginea inferioara a diafragmei etanse de sus.
12 Endress+Hauser
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis sub presiune de abur cu PMD 70/PMD75
– ➀
max.
➁
min. ➁
+
➂
➃ ➃
➄ ➄
➅
Fig. 11: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container sub presiune de abur cu PMD75
1 Vas separare condens
4 Separator
• Se conecteaza partea negativa deasupra nivelului maxim.
• Vasul de separare asigura o presiune constanta pe partea negativa.
Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis sub presiune de abur cu FMD 76/FMD77
– ➀
max.
➁
min.
➂
+ ➃
➄
Fig. 12: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea nivelului intr-un container sub presiune de abur cu FMD76
1 Vas separare condens
3 Separator
4 Robinet de drenaj
Endress+Hauser 13
montaj cu flanse".
• Se conecteaza partea negativa deasupra nivelului maxim.
• Vasul de separare asigura o presiune constanta pe partea negativa.
3.3.3 Instalarea pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale
Masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru gaze si abur cu PMD70/PMD75
➁
+
➂ ➂
➃
Fig. 13: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru gaze si abur cu PMD75
4 ex. filtru
• Se monteaza Deltabar S deasupra prizei de masura astfel incat condensatul sa se scurga in

conducta din proces.
Masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru lichide cu PMD70/PMD75
➀
➁ ➁
+ –
➂
➃ ➃
➄ ➄
➅
Fig. 14: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru lichide cu PMD75
1 ex. filtru
4 Separator
• Deltabar S se monteaza sub priza de masura, astfel ca teava de impuls sa fie totdeauna plina cu
lichid si bulele de gaz sa se poata intoarce in conducta din proces.
14 Endress+Hauser

Masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru gaze, abur si lichide cu FMD78
➀
➁ ➁
+ –
➂
➃
Fig. 15: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru gaze, abur si lichide cu FMD78
1 Diafragma etansa
2 Capilare
3 ex. filtru
• Se monteaza diafragma etansa cu capilarele pe partea de sus sau laterala a conductei.

• Pentru aplicatiile cu vacuum: se monteaza Deltabar S sub priza de masura. → vezi pag.15,
sectiunea 3.3.4 "Instructiuni de instalare pentru aparate cu diafragme etanse", partea "Aplicatii
cu vacuum".
• Temperatura mediului ambiant trebuie sa fie aceiasi pentru ambele capilare.
3.3.4 Instructiuni de instalare pentru aparatele cu diaframe etanse

Nota !Note!
• Diafragma etansa impreuna cu senzorul de presiune formeaza un sistem inchis si calibrat care
este umplut cu un fluid de umplere printr-un orificiu din partea de sus a aparatului. Acest
orificiu este etansat si nu poate fi deschis.
• Nu se curata sau atinge diafragma etansa cu obiecte tari sau ascutite.
• Nu se scoate membrana de protectie dacat cu putin timp inaintea instalarii.
• Cand se utilizeaza o brida de montaj, trebuie asigurata o intindere suficienta a capilarelor pentru
a preveni curbarea in jos a acestora (raza de curbura≥ 100 mm).
• Trebuie retinut ca presiunea hidrostatica a coloanelor de lichid din capilare poate cauza
deplasarea punctului de zero. Deplasarea punctului de zero poate fi corectata. → Vezi pag.44,
sectiune 6.3 "Ajustarea pozitiei".
• Trebuie retinute limitele de aplicare a diafragmelor etanse umplute cu ulei, care sunt detaliate
in informatia tehnica pentru Deltabar S TI382P, Sectiunea "Instructiuni de aplicare pentru
sistemele cu diafragma etansa". → vezi si pag.2 "Prezentare documentatie".
Pentru a obtine o precizie de masurare mai buna si pentru a evita un defect la aparat, capilarele se
monteaza astfel:
• fara vibratii (pentru a evita fluctuatii suplimentare de presiune )
• departe de linii de incalzire sau racire
• izolat, in situatia unor conditii ambientale mai calde sau mai reci
• cu o raza de curbura ≥100 mm.
• Cand se utilizeaza sisteme cu diafragme etanse cu doua parti, temperatura mediului ambiant si
lungimea ambelor capilare trebuie sa fie aceiasi.
• Sunt utilizate doua diafragme etanse identice (cu privire la diametru, material, etc.) pentru
partea negativa si partea pozitiva (livrare standard).
Endress+Hauser 15
–
≥ 100 mm
+ –
Fig. 16: Montarea Deltabar S, FMD78 cu diafragme etanse si capilare, montaj recomandat pentru aplicatii cu vid: se
monteaza traductorul de presiune sub cea mai de jos diafragma etansa!
Aplicatii in vacuum
Pentru aplicatiile sub vacuum, Endress+Hauser recomanda montarea traductorului de presiune
sub diafragma etansa. Este astfel prevenita incarcarea de vacuum a diafragmei etanse cauzata de
prezenta uleiului de umplere in capilare.
Cand traductorul de presiune este montat deasupra diafragmei etanse, nu trebuie depasita
diferenta de inaltime H1 in conformitate cu desenul de mai jos, partea stanga. Diferenta maxima
de inaltime este functie de densitatea uleiului de umplere si de cea mai mica presiune care poate
sa apara pe diafragma etansa pe partea pozitiva (container gol), vezi desenul de mai jos, partea
dreapta.
14.0
12.0
Diferenta inaltime H1 [m]
– + –
+ 10.0
– Ulei pentru temperatura ridicata
8.0
Ulei vegetal
6.0
H1 Ulei siliconic
4.0
Ulei inert
+ 2.0
0.0
10 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Presiune, partea pozitiva a diafragmei etanse [mbarabs]
P01-FMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-001 P01-FMD7xxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-000
Fig. 17: Instalare deasupra diafragmei Fig. 18: Diagrama inaltimii maxime de instalare deasupra
etanse diafragmei etanse pentru aplicatiile cu vid, functie de
presiunea pe diafragma etansa pe partea pozitiva
16 Endress+Hauser
3.3.5 Garnitura pentru montarea flansei
➀ ➁
P01-FMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-002
Fig. 19: Montarea versiunilor cu flansa sau diafragma etansa

1 Diafragma
2 Garnitura
Pericol !Warning!
Nu este permis ca garnitura sa apese pe diafragma, pentru ca aceasta ar putea influenta rezultatul
masuratorii.
3.3.6 Montare pe perete sau teava (optional)

Endress+Hauser ofera o brida de montaj pentru instalare pe tevi sau pereti.
Nota !Note!
Daca este utilizat un bloc de ventile, dimensiunile lor trebuie luate in consideratie.
~ 310
86.5
66.5
123
143
45
~ 220
10
~ 290
max. ø63
100
108
74
Fig. 20: Stanga: montarea pe perete cu brida de montaj, dreapta: montarea pe teava cu brida de montaj
Trebuie respectate urmatoarele reguli la montaj:

• Cablul de intrare trebuie totdeauna orientat in jos pentru ca picaturile de pe cablu sa fie drenate
afara si sa nu intre in carcasa.
• Aparatele cu capilare: se monteaza capilarele cu o raza de curbura ≥ 100 mm.
Endress+Hauser 17
3.3.7 Rotirea carcasei

Carcasa poate fi rotita pana la 380° prin slabirea suruburilor Allen .
max. 380°
Fig. 21: Aliniera carcasei

– Se slabesc suruburile cu o cheie Allen de 2 mm.
– Se roteste carcasa (max. pana la 380°).
– Se restrang suruburile
3.4 Verificari dupa instalare

Dupa instalarea aparatului, se realizeaza urmatoarele verificari:
• Sunt toate suruburile strinse bine?
• Sunt capacele carcasei insurubate strans?
• Sunt toate suruburile de blocare si robinetele stranse bine?
18 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Cablare
4 Cablare
4.1 Conectarea electrica a aparatului

Nota !Note!
• Cand se utilizeaza aparatul in zone cu pericol de explozie, instalarea trebuie sa respecte
standardele si regementarile nationale corespunzatoare si instructiunile de siguranta (XA) sau
planurile de instalare sau control (ZD).
• Au fost instalate circuitele de protectie contra polarizarii inverse, influentelor HF si varfurilor
de supratensiune.
• Tensiunea de alimentare trebuie sa corespunda cu tensiunea de alimentare de pe eticheta

aparatului. (→ vezi pag. 6, sectiunea 2.1.1 Eticheta.)
• Se deconecteaza tensiunea de alimentare inainte de conectarea aparatului.
• Se scoate capacul carcasei de la compartimentul terminalelor.
• Cablul se trece prin presetupa. Se utilizeaza de preferinta un cablu cu 2 fire rasucite, ecranat.
• Se conecteaza aparatul conform cu diagrama de mai jos.
• Se strange capacul carcasei.
• Se conecteaza tensiunea de alimentare.
À Å 10.5 V CC
Æ 11.5 V CC
4…20 mA
Test
Test
Á 4... 20mA Test
Â Ä
4... 20mA Test
Ã
P01-xMx7xxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-001
Fig. 22: Conectarea electrica 4...20 mA HART

→ Se va respecta si sectiunea 4.2.1 "Tensiunea de alimentare", pag. 21.
1 Carcasa
2 Calareti pentru semnal test 4...20 mA .
→ Vezi pag.21, sectiunea 4.2.1, "Preluarea semnalului de test 4...20 mA " .
3 Terminal intern de impamantare
4 Terminal extern de impamantare
5 4...20 mA semnal test intre plus si terminalul test
6 Tensiunea minima de alimentare = 10.5 V CC, calaretul este introdus conform cu desen.
7 Tensiunea minima de alimentare = 11.5 V CC, calaretul este introdus in pozitia "Test" .
Endress+Hauser 19
Cablare Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
4.1.1 Conectarea aparatelor cu conectorul de Hart Han7D
Deltabar S
+
+ –
7
6 8
Han7D 1 –
5 2
4 3
+ –
Fig. 23: Stanga: conectarea electrica pentru aparate prin conectorul Hart Han7D
Dreapta: vederea conectorului pe aparat
4.1.2 Conectarea aparatelor cu conectorul M12
Deltabar S
+ –
– +
M12
+ –
Fig. 24: Stanga: conectarea electrica pentru aparatele cu conectorul M12

4.1.3 Conectarea aparatelor cu conectorul 7/8"
Deltabar S
–
+ –
7/8" +
+ –
Fig. 25: Stanga: conectarea electrica pentru aparatele cu conectorul 7/8"

20 Endress+Hauser
4.2 Conectarea unitatii de masurare
4.2.1 Tensiunea de alimentare

Nota !Note!
• Toate datele care privesc protectia la explozie sunt cuprinse in documente separate care sunt
disponibile la cerere. Documentatia Ex este furnizata standard cu toate aparatele care au
aprobare pentru utilizare in medii cu pericol de explozie.
• Cand se utilizeaza aparatul in zone cu pericol de explozie, instalarea trebuie sa respecte
standardele si reglementarile nationale corespunzatoare si instructiunile de siguranta (XA) sau
planurile de instalare sau control (ZD)
Versiunea electronica Calaret pentru semnal test 4...20 Calaret pentru semnal test 4...20
mA in pozitia "Standard" mA in pozitia "Test"
4...20 mA HART, pentru zone fara 10.5...45 V CC 11.5...45 V CC
pericol de explozie
Preluarea semnalului de test 4...20 mAl

Semnalul 4...20 mA poate fi masurat fara intreruperea masuratorii intre terminalul pozitiv si
terminalul test. Tensiunea minima de alimentare a aparatului poate fi redusa prin simpla
schimbare a pozitiei calaretilor. Drept urmare, operarea este posibila cu o sursa cu o tensiune mai
mica. Pentru a pastra eroarea de masurare sub 0.1%, curentul aparatului de masura ar trebui sa
afiseze o rezistenta interna < 0.7 Ω. Retineti pozitia calaretilor in conformitate cu tabelul urmator.
Pozitie calaret pentru semnal test Descriere

– Luarea semnalului de test 4...20 mA intre terminalele plus si test:
Test nu este posibila.
– Tensiunea minima de alimentare: 10.5 V CC
– Luarea semnalului de test 4...20 mA intre terminalele plus si test:

Test posibila. (Astfel, curentul de iesire poate fi masurat fara inrerupere
prin dioda.)
– Stare livrata
– Tensiunea minima de alimentare: 11.5 V CC
4.2.2 Specificare cablu

• Endress+Hauser recomanda utilizarea cablurilor cu doua fire, rasucite si ecranate
• Sectiune terminale 0.5...2.5 mm2
• Diametru exterior cablu : 5...10 mm
Endress+Hauser 21
4.2.3 Sarcina
➀ RLmax ➁ RLmax
[Ω] [Ω]
Test 1500 Test
1456
1282 1239
847 804
➃ ➃
413
➂ 369
➂
10.5 20 30 40 45 U 11.5 20 30 40 45 U
[V] [V]
U – 10.5 V U – 11.5 V
RLmax ≤ RLmax ≤
23 mA 23 mA
Fig. 26: Diagrama de sarcina (incarcare), retineti pozitia calaretului si protectia la explozie. (→ Vezi pag. 21,
"Preluarea semnalului de test 4...20 mA ".)
1 Calaret pentru semnal de test 4...20 mA introdus in pozitia "Standard"
2 Calaret pentru semnal de test 4...20 mA introdus in pozitia "Test"
3 Tensiune alimentare 10,5 (11,5)...30 V CC pentru EEx ia, 1 D, 1/2 GD, FM IS si CSA IS
4 Tensiune alimentare 10,5 (11,5)...45 V CC pentru aparate din zone fara pericol de explozie, 1/3 D, EEx d, EEx nA,
FM XP, FM DIP, FM NI, CSA XP si CSA Dust-Ex
5 Tensiune alimentare 11 (12)...45 V CC pentru PMC71, EEx d[ia], FM XP, CSA XP
RLmax Rezistenta maxima de sarcina
U Tensiune alimentare
Nota !Note!
Cand se opereaza cu comunicatorul manual sau prin PC cu un program de operare, trebuie sa
existe in bucla o rezistenta minima de comunicare de 250 Ω .
4.2.4 Ecranare/egalizare potential

• Se realizeaza o ecranare optima impotriva perturbatiilor daca ecranul este conectat la ambele
capete (in dulap si la aparat). Daca trebuie sa calculati curentii din instalatie cu egalizare
potential, se conecteaza ecranul numai intr-o parte, de preferinta la traductor.
• Cand se utilizeaza in zone cu pericol de explozie, trebuie sa tineti cont de regulamente.
O documentatie separata Ex cu date tehnice suplimentare si instructiuni este inclusa in mod
standard in toate sistemele cu Ex.
• Aplicatii Ex : Se seteaza potentialul de egalizare in interiorul si in exteriorul zonei Ex. Toate
aparatele se conecteaza la potentialul de egalizare.
22 Endress+Hauser
4.2.5 Conectarea comunicatorului manual HARTl

Cu comunicatorul manual HART se poate seta si verifica traductorul, oferind si functii
suplimentare, in orice punct de-a lungul liniei de 4...20 mA
➀ min. 250 Ω
Test
4…20 mA
4... 20mA Test
➂ DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
352 mbar
➁ DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
352 mbar
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
352 mbar
4 SV 0 °C 4 SV 0 °C 4 SV 0 °C
HELP SAVE HELP SAVE HELP SAVE
6 6 6
9 Page
Up 9 Page
Up 9 Page
Up
EX EX
Bksp Delete Bksp Delete Bksp Delete
Page Page Page

On On On
#%& ABC DEF #%& ABC DEF #%& ABC DEF

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Copy Paste Hot Key Copy Paste Hot Key Copy Paste Hot Key
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
Insert + Hot Key Insert + Hot Key Insert + Hot Key
PQRS TUV W XY Z PQRS TUV W XY Z PQRS TUV W XY Z

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
,()‘ _<> +*/ ,()‘ _<> +*/ ,()‘ _<> +*/
. 0 - . 0 - . 0 -
375 375 375

FIELD COMMUNICATOR FIELD COMMUNICATOR FIELD COMMUNICATOR
Fig. 27: Conectarea comunicatorului manual HART, de ex. comunicatorul local DXR 375
1 Rezistenta necesara comunicarii ≥ 250 Ω
2 Comunicator manual HART
3 Comunicator manual HART, conectat direct la aparat chiar in zone Ex i
Pericol !Warning!
• In situatia unei protectii de tip Ex, nu se conecteaza comunicatorul manual in zona cu pericol
de explozie.
• Nu se inlocuieste bateria comunicatorul manual in zona cu pericol de explozie.
• Pentru aparatele cu calificare FM sau CSA, conexiunile electrice se realizeaza conform
planurilor de instalare si control livrate (ZD...).
Endress+Hauser 23
4.2.6 Conectarea Commubox FXA 191 pentru operarea prin

TOF Tool sau Commuwin II
Commubox FXA 191 conecteaza traductoarele inteligente cu protocol HART la interfata seriala
(RS 232) a calculatorului. Aceasta permite operarea la distanta a traductoarelor cu ajutorul
programelor de operare Endress+Hauser ToF Tool sau Commuwin II. Commubox este indicata
pentru utilizare in circuitele cu protectie intrinseca.
min. 250 Ω
➂
Test
4…20 mA
4... 20mA Test
EX EX
Fig. 28: Conectarea PC-ului cu programul de operare ToF Tool sau Commuwin II prin Commubox FXA 191
1 Calculator cu program de operare ToF Tool sau Commuwin II
2 Commubox FXA 191
3 Rezistenta necesara comunicarii ≥ 250 Ω
4.3 Egalizare potentia

Egalizarea de potential nu trebuie sa fie setata.
4.4 Verificari dupa conectare

Se realizeaza urmatoarele verificari dupa instalarea completa a aparatului:
• Corespunde tensiunea de alimentare specificatiilor de pe eticheta?
• Este aparatul conectat conform cu sectiunea 4.1?
• Sunt toate suruburile stranse bine?
• Sunt capacele carcasei insurubate strans?
De indata ce tensiunea de alimentare este conectata la aparat, LED-ul verde de pe insertul
elecronic se aprinde pentru cateva secunde sau display-ul local conectat la aparat se lumineaza.
24 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Operare
5 Operare
Caracteristica 20 "Electronica, comunicatiie, display, operare" din codul de comanda va
furnizeaza informatii despre optiunile de operare disponibile.
Versiuni in codul de comanda. Operare
A 4...20 mA, HART, LCD, operare exterioaral prin display-ul local si 3 taste pe exterior aparat
B 4...20 mA, HART, LCD prin display-ul local si 3 taste in interior aparat
C 4...20 mA HART fara display local si 3 taste in interior aparat
5.1 Display local (optional)

Pentru afisare si operare este utilizat un display (LCD) cu cristale lichide cu 4 linii. Pe display-ul
local se afiseaza valorile masurate, texte dialog, mesaje de defect si de informare.
Functii:
• Afisare valoare masurata pe 8-digiti incluzand semnul si punctul zecimal, bargraf marime
afisata
• Ghid meniu simplu si complet datorita separarii parametrilor pe mai multe niveluri si grupe
• Pentru fiecare parametru este alocat un numar ID de 3-digiti pentru o navigare usoara
• Optiuni pentru configurarea display-ului conform cerintelor si dorintelor individuale, cum ar fi
limba, afisare alternanta, setare contrast, afisarea altor valori masurate cum ar fi senzorul de
temperatura
• Functii de diagnosticare extinse (mesaje de defect si atentionare, indicari varfuri, etc.)
• Punere in functiune rapida si sigura cu meniurile de setare rapida (Quick Setup)
Valoare masurata afisata

Numar
Nume functie Valoare identificare
Prima linie
Linia principala
Unitate
Linie
de informare
Simbol
Bargraf
Moduri de editare
Selectare
optiuni
Valoare care
poate fi editata
Valoare masurata curenta

Endress+Hauser 25
Operare Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
Tabelul de mai jos descrie simbolurile care apar pe display-ul local. Pot apare patru simboluri in
acelasi timp.
Simbol Semnificatie
Simbol alarma
– Simbolul palpaie: atentionare, aparatul continua masurarea.
– Simbol permanent aprins: eroare, aparatul nu continua masurarea.
Nota: Simbolul de alarma poate sta deasupra simbolului de tendinta.
Simbol de blocaj
Functionarea aparatului este blocata. Deblocare aparat, → vezi sectiunea 5.9.
Simbol comunicatie
Transfer date prin comunicatie
Nota: Simbolul de alarma poate sta deasupra simbolului comunicatie.
Simbol radacina patrata

Mod activ de masurare "Masurare debit"
Semnalul de debit liniar este utilizat la iesire curent.
Simbol tendinta (crestere)

Valoarea masurata creste.
Simbol tendinta (scadere)

Valoarea masurata scade
Simbol tendinta (constant)

Valoarea masurata ramane constanta de cateva minute.
5.2 Elemente de operare
5.2.1 Pozitia elementelor de operare

Tastele de operare sunt amplasate fie pe capacul de protectie de pe exteriorul aparatului sau in
interior, pe insertul electronic
➃➄
τ ➅
on
➀
➀
off
➁
Damping [τ]
Display
on Sensor
➂
1 2
off
PC
HistoROM
P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-056 P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-074
Fig. 29: Taste de operare, exterioare Fig. 30: Taste de operare, interioare
1 Taste de operare pe exteriorul aparatului sub capacul 1 Taste de operare
de protectie 2 Slot pentru display optional
3 Slot pentru HistoROM®/M-DAT optional
4 LED verde care indica acceptarea valorii
5 Comutator DIP pentru blocare/deblocare valoare
masurata - parametri relevanti
6 Comutator DIP pentru damping on/off
26 Endress+Hauser
5.2.2 Functiile elementelor de operare –

display-ul local neconectat
Tasta(e) operare Semnificatie

Nota !Note!
• Aparatul este configurat pentru modul standard de masurare presiune. Se pot comuta
modurile de masurare cu ajutorul parametrului MOD MASURARE (MEASURING
MODE ), vezi pag.43, sectiunea 6.2 "Selectare limba si mod masurare".
• Se apasa tasta cel putin 3 secunde pentru a accepta valoarea de presiune aplicata.
MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Presiune":

• Presiunea aplicata este alocata celei mai mici valori curente (SET LRV – presiune1).
Nota !Note!
• MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Nivel":
Setarile din fabrica pentru parametri LEVEL MODE, CALIBRATION MODE, LIN.
MEASURAND, EMPTY CALIB. si FULL CALIB. sunt dupa cum urmeaza:
– MOD NIVEL (LEVEL MODE) = liniar
– MOD CALIBRARE (CALIBRATION MODE) = umed
– MASURA LINIARA (LIN. MEASURAND) = %
– CALIBRARE GOL (EMPTY CALIB.) = 0 %
– CALIBRARE PLIN (FULL CALIB.)= 100 %.
Acesti parametri pot fi modificati numai prin intermediul display-ului local sau prin
operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Nivel", MOD CALIBRARE
(CALIBRATION MODE) "umed":
• MOD NIVEL (LEVEL MODE)"Liniar":
– Presiunea aplicata este salvata ca cea mai mica valoare de presiunee (PRESIUNE
GOL-EMPTY PRESSURE1) si alocata celei mai mici valori de nivel (CALIBRARE
GOL-EMPTY CALIB.1). Cel mai mic nivel si valorile curente (SET LRV - nivel1)
raman neschimbate. Acesti parametri pot fi modificati numai prin intermediul
display-ului local sau prin operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
→ Vezi si pag. 51, sectiunea 6.5.3 "Meniu setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul
de masurare nivel" si instructiunile de operare BA274P, descriere parametri LEVEL
MODE, CALIBRATION MODE, EMPTY CALIB., EMPTY PRESSURE si SET
LRV – Nivel.
• MOD NIVEL (
(
LEVEL MODE) "Liniarizare presiune" sau "Liniarizare inaltime":
– Tastele nu au nici o functie.
• Tastele nu au nici o functie.
MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Debit (Flow)":

Endress+Hauser 27
Tasta(e) operare Semnificatie
Nota !Note!
• Aparatul este configurat pentru modul standard de masurare presiune. Se pot comuta
modurile de masurare cu ajutorul parametrului MOD MASURARE (MEASURING
MODE ), vezi pag.43, sectiunea 6.2 "Selectare limba si mod masurare"
• Se apasa tasta cel putin 3 secunde pentru a accepta valoarea de presiune aplicata.
MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Presiune":

• Presiunea aplicata este alocata celei mai mici valori curente (SET LRV – presiune2).
Nota !Note!
• MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Nivel":
Acesti parametri pot fi modificati numai prin intermediul display-ului local sau prin
operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
• MOD NIVEL (LEVEL MODE)"Liniar":
– Presiunea aplicata este salvata ca cea mai mare valoare de presiunee (PRESIUNE
PLIN-FULL PRESSURE1) si alocata celei mai mari valori de nivel (CALIBRARE
PLIN-FULL CALIB.1). Cel mai mare nivel si valorile curente (SET UVR - nivel1)
raman neschimbate. Acesti parametri pot fi modificati numai prin intermediul
display-ului local sau prin operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
→ Vezi si pag. 51, sectiunea 6.5.2 "Meniu setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul
de masurare nivel" si instructiunile de operare BA274P, descriere parametri LEVEL
MODE, CALIBRATION MODE, FULL CALIB., FULL PRESSURE si SET URV
– Nivel.
• MOD NIVEL (
(
LEVEL MODE )"Liniarizare presiune" sau "Liniarizare inaltime":
– Tastele nu au nici o functie.
MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) "Debit (Flow)":

• Presiunea aplicata este salvata ca cea mai mare valoare de presiunee (PRES MAX
DEBIT-MAX. PRESS. FLOW1) si alocata celei mai mari valori de debit(DEBIT
MAX-MAX. FLOW1).Valoarea maxima debit si cea mai mare valoare curenta (SET
URV - debit1)raman neschimbate. Aceste valori pot fi modificate numai prin
intermediul display-ului local sau prin operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
→ Vezi si pag. 47, sectiunea 6.5.3 "Meniu setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul de
masurare debit" si instructiunile de operare BA274P, descriere parametri MAX.
PRESS. FLOW, MAX. FLOW, SET LRV –debit si LINEAR/SQROOT.
Ajustare pozitie (Se apasa tasta cel putin 3 secunde)
Reset toti parametri. Resetarea prin tastele de operare corespunde cu resetarea software
and and cod 7864. (Se apasa tasta cel putin 6 secunde
and Copiere date configurare de la modulul optional HistoROM®/M-DAT la aparat.
Copiere date configurare de la aparat la modulul optional HistoROM®/M-DAT.

and
– Comutator 1 DIP: pentru blocare/deblocare valoare masurata-parametri relevanti

τ on Setare fabrica: off (deblocat)
– Comutator 2 DIP: damping on/off,
Setare fabrica: on (damping on)
1 2 off
P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-057
1) Nume parametru folosit pentru display-ul local sau operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
2) Nume parametru folosit pentru display-ul local sau operare la distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
28 Endress+Hauser
5.2.3 Functiile elementelor de operare–

display-ul local conectat
Tasta(e) operare) Semnificatie

– Navigare in sus pe lista
– Editare valori numerice si caractere din functii
– Navigare in jos pe lista

– Editare valori numerice si caractere din functi
– Confirmare intrare
– Trecere la urmatoarea pozitie
Setare contrast display local: mai inchis

si
Setare contrast display local: mai deschis

si
Functii ESC :
– Iesire din mod editare fara salvarea valorilor modificate.
– Sunteti intr-un meniu intr-o grupa functionala. Prima data se apasa simultan tastele, se
merge inapoi la un parametru din grupa functionala. De fiecare data se apasa tastele
si simultan dupa care, se merge la un nivel superior din meniu.
– Sunteti in meniu la nivelul selectat. De fiecare data se apasa tastele simultan, se merge
la un nivel superior din meniu.
Nota: Termenii grupa functionala, nivel si selectie nivel sunt explicati in sectiune 5.4.1,
pag. 27.
– Comutator 1 DIP: pentru blocare/deblocare valoare masurata-parametri relevanti

τ on Setare fabrica: off (deblocat)
– Comutator 2 DIP: damping on/off,
Setare fabrica: on (damping on)
1 2 off
Endress+Hauser 29

display-ul local neconectat
Nota !Note!
Pentru a opera aparatul cu modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT vezi pag.36, sectiunea 5.5 "modulul
HistoROM®/M-DAT"
5.3.1 Modul de masurare presiune

Daca display-ul local nu este conectat, sunt posibile urmatoarele functii prin intermediul a trei
taste de pe insertul electronic sau din exteriorul aparatului:
• Ajustare pozitie (corectare punct zero)
• Setare valoare domeniu minim si maxim
• Resetare aparat, → vezi pag.27, sectiunea 5.2.2 "Functia elementelor de operare", tabel.
Nota !Note!
• Functionarea poate fi blocata. → Vezi pag. 40, sectiunea 5.9 "Blocare deblocare operare".
• Aparatul este configurat pentru modul standard de masurare presiune. Se pot comuta modurile
de masurare cu ajutorul parametrului MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE ), vezi
pag.43, sectiunea 6.2 "Selectare limba si mod masurare"
• Presiunea aplicata trebuie sa fie in limitele presiunii nominale a senzorului. Vezi informatia de
pe eticheta.
Realizarea ajustarii pozitiei. Setare valoare domeniu minim. Setare valoare domeniu maxim.
Presiunea este prezenta la aparat. Presiunea dorita pentru valoarea Presiunea dorita pentru valoarea
domeniului minim este prezenta la domeniului maxim este prezenta la
aparat. aparat.
↓ ↓ ↓
Se apasa tasta "E"pentru 3 s. Se apasa tasta "-"pentru 3 s. Se apasa tasta "+"pentru 3 s
↓ ↓ ↓
LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se

aprinde pentru scurt timp? aprinde pentru scurt timp? aprinde pentru scurt timp?
Da Nu Da Nu Da Nu
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea

aplicata pentru aplicata pentru aplicata pentru aplicata pentru aplicata pentru aplicata pentru
ajustarea pozitiei ajustarea pozitiei valoarea valoarea valoarea valoarea
a fost acceptata. nu a fost domeniului domeniului domeniului domeniului
acceptata. minim a fost minim nu a fost maxim a fost maxim nu a fost
Observati acceptata. acceptata. acceptata acceptata.
limitele intrarii. Observati Observati
limitele intrarii. limitele intrarii.
30 Endress+Hauser
5.3.2 Modul de masurare nive

Nota ! Note!
• Setare valoare domeniu minim si maxim si alocarea valorii minime si maxime de nivel
• Functionarea poate fi blocata. → Vezi pag.40, sectiunea 5.9 "Blocare deblocare operare"
• Tastele si nu au nici o functie daca a fost selectat LEVEL MODE "Pressure linearized"
sau "Height linearized" sau CALIBRATION MODE "dry" .
• Setarile din fabrica pentru parametri LEVEL MODE, CALIBRATION MODE, LIN.
Acesti parametri pot fi modificati numai prin intermediul display-ului local sau prin operare la
distanta cum ar fi ToF Tool.
• Presiunea aplicata trebuie sa fie in limitele de presiune ale senzorului. Vezi informatiile de pe
eticheta.
• → Vezi si pag. 51, sectiunea 6.5.2 "Meniu setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul de
masurare nivel" si instructiunile de operare BA274P, descriere parametri LEVEL MODE,
CALIBRATION MODE, EMPTY CALIB., FULL CALIB., EMPTY PRESSURE, FULL
PRESSURE si SET LRV– Level si SET URV – Level.
Realizarea ajustarii pozitiei Setare valoare domeniu minim. Setare valoare domeniu maxim.
Presiunea este prezenta la aparat.. Presiunea dorita pentru valoarea Presiunea dorita pentru valoarea
domeniului minim (EMPTY domeniului maxim (FULL
PRESSURE1) este prezenta la aparat PRESSURE1) este prezenta la
aparat.
↓ ↓ ↓
Se apasa tasta "E"pentru 3 s. Se apasa tasta "–"pentru 3 s. Se apasa tasta "+"pentru 3 s.
↓ ↓ ↓
LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se

aprinde pentru scurt timp? aprinde pentru scurt timp? aprinde pentru scurt timp?
Da Nu Da Nu Da Nu
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea
aplicata pentru aplicata pentru aplicata aplicata aplicata aplicata
ajustarea pozitiei ajustarea pozitiei a fost salvata ca nu a fost salvata a fost salvata ca nu a fost salvata
a fost acceptata. nu a fost valoare a ca valoare valoare maxima ca valoare
acceptata. domeniului minima a a domeniului maxima a
Observati minim (EMPTY domeniului. (FULL domeniului.
limitele intrarii. PRESSURE1) si Observati PRESSURE1) si Observati
alocata ca limitele intrarii. alocata ca limitele intrarii.
valoare minima valoare maxima
de nivel de nivel (FULL
(EMPTY CALIB.1).
CALIB.1).
Endress+Hauser 31
5.3.3 Modul de masurare debit

• Setare valoare domeniu minim si maxim si alocarea valorii minime si maxime debit
Nota !Note!
• Functionarea poate fi blocata. → Vezi pag.40, sectiunea 5.9 "Blocare deblocare operare"
• Tasta - nu are nici o functie.
• Presiunea aplicata trebuie sa fie in limitele presiunii nominale a senzorului. Vezi informatiile
de pe eticheta.
• → Vezi si pag. 47, sectiunea 6.4.3 "Meniu setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul de
masurare nivel" si instructiunile de operare BA274P, descriere parametri MAX. PRESS.
FLOW, MAX. FLOW, SET LRV – Flow si LINEAR/SQROOT.
Realizarea ajustarii pozitiei. Setare valoare maxima presiune
Presiunea este prezenta la aparat. Presiunea dorita pentru valoarea

domeniului maxim (MAX. FLOW1)
este prezenta la aparat.
↓ ↓
Se apasa tasta "E"pentru 3 s Se apasa tasta "E"pentru 3 s
↓ ↓
LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se LED-ul de pe insertul electronic se

aprinde pentru scurt timp? aprinde pentru scurt timp?
Da Nu Da Nu
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea Presiunea
aplicata pentru aplicata pentru aplicata aplicata
ajustarea pozitiei ajustarea pozitiei a fost salvata ca nu a fost salvata
a fost acceptata. nu a fost valoare maxima ca valoare
acceptata. a domeniului maxima a
Observati (MAX. PRESS domeniului.
limitele intrarii. FLOW1)si Observati
alocata ca limitele intrarii.
valoare maxima
de nivel (MAX.
FLOW.1).
1) Nume parametru folosit pentru display-ul local sau pentru operarea la

distanta prin ToF Tool.
32 Endress+Hauser
5.4 Operare locala–

display-ul local conectat
Daca display-ul local este conectat, sunt utilizate trei taste de operare pentru a naviga prin meniul
de operare, → vezi pag.29, sectiunea 5.2.3 "Functia elementelor de operare".
5.4.1 Structura generala a meniului de operare

Meniul este impartit pe patru niveluri. Cele trei niveluri superioare sunt utilizate pentru a naviga
in timpul utilizari nivelului inferior pentru a introduce valori numerice, a selecta optiuni si a salva
setari. Intregul meniu este ilustrat in sectiunea 10.1 "Meniu pentru display-ul local, ToF Tool si
comunicatorul manual HART ".
Structura meniului de operare (OPERATING MENU) depinde de modul de masurare selectat, de
ex.daca a fost selectat modul de masurare "Presiune (Pressure)", sunt afisate numai functiunile
necesare pentru acest mod.
Measured value
GROUP SELECTION
LANGUAGE MEASURING MODE QUICK SETUP OPERATING MENU
➁
➀ SETTINGS DISPLAY
POSITION ADJUSTMENT BASIC SETUP EXTENDED SETUP
POS. ZERO ADJUST
➂
➃ POS. INPUT VALUE
CALIB. OFFSET
Fig. 31: Structura meniului de operare

1 1. Selectare nivel
2 2. Selectare nivel
3 Grupe functionale
4 Parametru
Nota !Note!
Parametri LIMBA (LANGUAGE) si MOD MASURARE (MEASURING MODE) sunt afisati
numai pe display-ul local cand se selecteaza nivelul 1. In ToF Tool sau in comunicatorul HART,
parametrul LANGUAGE este afisat in grupa DISPLAY iar parametrul MEASURING MODE
este afisat in meniul QUICK SETUP sau in grupa functionala BASIC SETUP . → Vezi sectiunea
10.1 "Meniu de operare pentru display-ul local, ToF Tool si comunicatorul manual HART".
Endress+Hauser 33
5.4.2 Selectarea unei optiuni

Exemplu: selectare "English" ca limba a meniului.
Display local Operare
A fost selectata limba germana. Un v in fata textului

meniu indica faptul ca optiunea este activa.
Se selecteaza English cu "+" "–".
1. Se confirma alegerea cu "E". Un v in fata textului

meniu indica faptul ca optiunea este activa. (English
este acum limba meniului.)
2. Se trece la alta pozitie cu "E".
5.4.3 Editarea unei valori

Exemplu: ajustarea functiei DAMPING VALUE de la 2.0 s la 30.0 s. → vezi si pag.29, sectiunea
5.2.3 "Functia elementelor de operare"..

Display-ul local arata parametrul care va fi schimbat.
Valoarea afisata luminat din spate poate fi schimbata
Unitatea "s" este fixa si nu poate fi schimbata.
1. Se apasa "+"sau "–" pentru a trece in modul editare.

2. Primul digit este luminat din spate.
1. Se utilizeaza "+" pentru a schimba "2"in "3".

2. Se confirma"3" cu "E". Cursorul trece la urmatoarea
pozitie (luminata din spate).
Punctul zecimal este luminat in spate, de ex. se poate edita

acum.
1. Se tine apasat "+" "–"pana cand este afisat

"0" .
2. Se confirma "0" cu "E".
Cursorul trece la urmatoarea pozitie (afisata si
luminata din spate). → Vezi urmatorul grafic.
34 Endress+Hauser
Se utilizeaza"E"pentru a salva noua valoare si se iese din

modul editare. →Vezi urmatorul grafic.
Noua valoare pentru damping este acum 30.0 s.

– Se trece la alt parametru cu "E".
– Se poate reveni in modul editare cu "+" sau
"–".
5.4.4 Preluarea ca valoare a presiunii aplicate pe aparat

Exemplu: configurarea valorii maxime a domeniului – alocare 20 mA la valoarea presiunii de
400 mbar.
On-site display Operation
Linia de jos a display-ului local afiseaza presiunea

prezenta , aici 400 mbar.
Se utilizeaza "+" "–" pentru a comuta la

optiunea "Confirm". Sectiunea activa este luminata din
spate.
Se utilizeaza "E" pentru a aloca valoarea (400 mbar) la

parametrul GET URV. Aparatul confirma calibrarea si
revine la parametru, aici GET URV (vezi urmatorul
grafic).
Se comuta la parametrul urmator cu "E".
5.5 HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional)

HistoROM®/M-DAT este un modul de memorie, care se ataseaza la insertul electronic si
indeplineste urmatoarele functii:
• Copierea datelor de configurare de la traductor la un alt traductor
• Inregistrarea ciclica a valorilor masurate ale presiunii si ale senzorului de temperatura
• Inregistrarea diferitelor evenimente, cum ar fi alarmele, schimbari in configurare, numararea
iesirilor din domeniul de masura pentru presiune si temperatura, depasirea limitelor
utilizatorului pentru presiune si temperatura, etc.
Pericol !Warning!
Detasarea HistoROM®/M-DAT din insertul electronic sau atasarea la insert se face numai dupa
scoaterea tensiunii de alimentare a aparatului.
Endress+Hauser 35
Nota !Note!
• Modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT poate fi adaugat in orice moment (comanda nr.: 52020797).
• Datele HistoROM si datele din aparat sunt analizate de indata ce HistoROM®/M-DAT este
atasat la insertul electronic si alimentarea aparatului este restabilita. In timpul analizelor, pot
apare mesajele "W702, date HistoROM neconsistente" si "W706, Configurare in curs
HistoROM si aparat nu sunt identice". Pentru masuri , vezi pag.55, sectiunea 8.1 "Mesaje."
5.5.1 Copierea datelor de configurare
➁
on
τ
off 1 2
Damping [τ]
Display
on Sensor
1 2
off
➀
PC
HistoROM
Abb. 32: Insert electronic cu modul memorie optional HistoROM®/M-DAT

1 Optional HistoROM®/M-DAT
2 Pentru a copia datele de configurare de la modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT la aparat, operarea trebuie sa fie deblocata
comutatorul DIP- 1, pe pozitia "off" , parametrul INSERT PIN NO. = 100). Pentru a copia datele de configurare
de la aparat la modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT, operarea poate fi blocata sau deblocata. Vezi pag. 40, sectiunea 5.9
"Operare blocata/deblocata".
Operare locala–display-ul local neconectat

Copierea datelor de configurare de la aparat la modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT:
1. Se deconecteaza aparatul de la alimentarea electrica.
2. Se ataseaza modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT la insertul electronic.
3. Se restabileste alimentarea electrica a aparatului.
4. Se apasa tastele si (pentru cel putin 3 secunde) pana se aprinde LED-ul de pe insertul
electronic.
5. Se asteapta aprox. 20 secunde. Datele de configurare sunt incarcate de la aparat la
HistoROM®/M-DAT.
6. Se deconecteaza din nou aparatul de la alimentarea electrica.
7. Se detaseaza modulul de memorie.
36 Endress+Hauser
Copierea datelor de configurare de la HistoROM®/M-DAT la aparat:

Nota !Note!
Operarea poate fi blocata sau deblocata. Vezi pag.40, sectiunea 5.9 "Operare blocata/deblocata"
2. Se ataseaza modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT la insertul electronic. Datele de configurare de la
alt aparat sunt memorate in HistoROM®/M-DAT.
4. Se apasa tastele si (pentru cel putin 3 secunde) pana se aprinde LED-ul de pe insertul
electronic.
HistoROM®/M-DAT.
6. Inainte de scoaterea din nou a modulului HistoROM®/M-DAT din insertul electronic se
deconecteaza alimentarea electrica a aparatului.
Operarea locala prin display-ul local (optional) sau operarea de la distanta

Copierea datelor de configurare de la aparat la HistoROM ®/M-DAT:
2. Se ataseaza modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT la insertul electronic.
4. Se utilizeaza HistoROM CONTROL parametrul selectat prin optiunea "Device →
HistoROM" pentru directia de transfer a datelor.
(Cale meniu: GROUP SELECTION → OPERATING MENU → OPERATION)
HistoROM®/M-DAT.
6. Se deconecteaza din nou aparatul de la alimentarea electrica.
7. Se detaseaza modulul de memorie.
Copierea datelor de configurare de la HistoROM®/M-DAT la aparat:

Nota !Note!
Operarea poate fi blocata sau deblocata. Vezi pag. 40, sectiunea 5.9 "Operare blocata/deblocata".
2. Se ataseaza modulul HistoROM®/M-DAT la insertul electronic. Datele de configurare de la
alt aparat sunt memorate in HistoROM®/M-DAT.
4. Se utilizeaza HistoROM CONTROL parametrul selectat prin optiunea "Device →
HistoROM" pentru directia de transfer a datelor.
(Cale meniu: GROUP SELECTION → OPERATING MENU → OPERATION)
HistoROM®/M-DAT.
Se restabileste alimentarea electrica a aparatului.
6. Inainte de scoaterea din nou a modulului HistoROM®/M-DAT din insertul electronic se
deconecteaza alimentarea electrica a aparatului..
Endress+Hauser 37
5.6 Programul de operare ToF Tool

ToF Tool este un program de operare grafic si un ghid-meniu pentru aparatele de masura de la
Endress+Hauser. El este utilizat pentru a realiza punerea in functiune, stocarea datelor, analiza
semnalelor si documentatia aparatului. Urmatoarele sisteme de operare pot fi utilizate:
WinNT4.0, Win2000 si Windows XP. Toti parametri pot fi setati prin ToF Tool.
ToF Tool realizeaza urmatoarele functii:
• Configurarea traductorului in timpul functionarii
• Incarcarea si salvarea datelor aparatului (incarcare /descarcare)
• Analize HistoROM®/M-DAT
• Documentatia punctului de masura
• Calculul caracteristicilor rezervoarelor pentru modul de masurare nivel.
P01-xMD7xxxxx-19-xx-xx-en-000
Fig. 33: Programul de operare ToF Tool, configurarea este realizata prin meniu
Optiuni de conectare:
• HART prin Commubox FXA 191 si interfata seriala RS 232 C la calculator
• Interfata service cu adaptor FXA 193
Nota !Note!
• → Vezi pag.24, sectiunea 4.2.6 "Conectarea Commubox FXA 191 pentru operarea prin TOF
Tool sau Commuwin II".
• Mai multe informatii despre ToF Tool pot fi gasite pe CD-ROM-ul furnizat cu aparatul sau de
pe internet (http://www.endress.com, Download → Search for: ToF Tool) CD-ul este furnizat
cu orice aparat comandat cu optiunea "HistoROM module" .
38 Endress+Hauser
5.7 Operarea prin comunicatorul manual HART

Se utilizeaza comunicatorul manual HART pentru a seta prin meniul de operare toti parametri in
orice punct pe linia cablului de 4...20 mA
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * * ONLINE
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP 1 QUICK SETUP
Delete
➀
2 OPERATING MENU 2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV 352 mbar
4 SV 0 °C 3 PV 352 mbar
4 SV 0 °C
HELP SAVE
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
6
9
HELP SAVE DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
Page OPERATING MENU
Up
➁
1 SETTINGS
Bksp Delete 2 DISPLAY Delete
3 OUTPUT
Page 4 TRANSMITTER INFO
On Bksp 5 PROCESS INFO
➂
#%& ABC DEF
1 2 3
Copy
GHI
Paste
JKL
Hot Key
MNO
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
4 5 6 SAVE HOME DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *

Insert + Hot Key
SETTINGS
PQRS TUV W XY Z
1 POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Page
7 8 9
2 BASIC SETUP Up
,()‘ _<> +*/ 3 EXTENDED SETUP
. 0 - 4 LINEARISATION
Bksp 5 TOTALIZER SETUP Page
On
375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR
SAVE HOME
Fig. 34: Comunicatorul manual HART, aici ex. comunicatorul local DXR 375 si meniul de ghidare
1 Afisaj LC cu text meniu
2 Taste pentru selectare meniu
3 Taste pentru introducere parametri
Nota !Note!
• → vezi pag.23, sectiunea 4.2.5 "Conectarea comunicatorului manual HART ".
• Pentru mai multe informatii, va rugam sa consultati instructiunile de operare pentru
comunicatorul manual. Instructiunile de operare sunt livrate cu comunicatorul manual.
5.8 Programul de operare Commuwin II

Commuwin II este un program de operare cu suport grafic pentru aparate de masura inteligente
cu protocol de comunicare HART si PROFIBUS PA. Urmatoarele sisteme de operare pot fi
utilizate: Win3.1/3.11, Win95, Win98, WinNT4.0 si Win2000. Commuwin II arata parametri cei
mai importanti (→ vezi sectiunea 10.2 "Matricea de operare HART Commuwin II).
Commuwin II realizeaza urmatoarele functii:
• Configurarea aparatelor de masurare in timpul functionarii (on-line) prin matricea de operare
• Incarcarea si salvarea datelor aparatului (incarcare/descarcare)
• Vizualizarea valorilor masurate si a valorilor limita
• Prezentarea si inregistrarea valorilor masurate cu un inregistrator continuu.
Nota !Note!
• Pentru mai multe informatii, va rugam sa consultati instructiunile de operare BA 124F
"Commuwin II FXS 113".
• Puteti obtine descrierea aparatului (DD) fie de la reprezentanta locala Endress+Hauser fie de pe
internet (http://www.endress.com).
Endress+Hauser 39
5.9 Blocarea/deblocarea operarii

Dupa ce ati introdus toti parametri, puteti bloca intrarile impotriva accesului neautorizat si
nedorit.
Aveti urmatoarele posibilitati pentru blocarea/deblocarea operarii:
• Printr-un comutator DIP de pe insertul electronic, local de pe display.
• De pe display-ul local (optional)
• Prin comunicare ex. ToF Tool, Commuwin II si comunicatorul manual HART.
Simbolulksp -de pe display-ul local indica faptul ca operarea este blocata. Parametri care se refera
la cum apare afisajul ex.. LANGUAGE si DISPLAY CONTRAST pot fi modificati.
Nota !Note!
• Daca operarea este blocata prin comutatorul DIP, se poate debloca operarea numai de la
comutatorul DIP. Daca operarea este blocata de la display-ul local sau de la distanta ex.. ToF
Tool, se poate debloca de la display-ul local sau de la distanta.
• Daca operarea este blocata, orice schimbare de la comutatorul DIP "Damping on/off" nu are
nici un impact asupra timpului de damping . Orice schimbare nu va avea nici un efect pana cand
operarea nu va fi deblocata.
Tabelul prezinta o vedere generala a functiilor blocate:
Blocare prin Parametru Modificat/scris prin1 Deblocat prin

Vazut/citit
Display Operare la Comutator Display local Operare la
local distanta DIP distanta
Comutator DIP Da Nu Nu Da Nu Nu
Display local Da Nu Nu Nu Da Da
Operare la distanta Da Nu Nu Nu Da Da
1) Parametri care se refera la cum apare afisajul ex.. LANGUAGE si DISPLAY CONTRAST
pot fi modificati.
5.9.1 Blocarea/deblocarea operarii prin comutatorul local DIP

Damping [τ]
Damping [τ]
➀
➁ ➂
Damping [τ]
on on Display
on Sensor
1 2
off
PC
1 2 1 2
off off
HistoROM
Fig. 35: Pozitia comutatorului DIP "Blocare Hardware " pe insertul electronic
1 Daca eate necesar, se inlocuieste display-ul local (optional)
2 Comutatorul DIP este pe "on": operarea este blocata.
3 Comutatorul DIP este pe "off": operarea este deblocata (operare posibila)
40 Endress+Hauser
5.9.2 Blocarea /deblocarea operarii prin display-ul local sau prin

operare de la distanta
Descriere
Operare blocata 1. Se selecteaza parametrul INSERT PIN NO. ,
Cale meniu: OPERATING MENU → OPERATION → INSERT PIN NO.
2. Pentru a bloca operarea , se introduce un numar pentru acest parametru intre 0...9999
care este ≠100.
Operare deblocata 1. Se selecteaza parametrul INSERT PIN NO.

2. Pentru a debloca operarea, se introduce pentru parametru "100" .
5.10 Setare fabrica (resetare)

Prin introducerea unui cod de siguranta, se pot reseta complet sau partial, intrarile parametrilor la
setarile din fabrica. (→ Pentru setari fabrica se va vedea Instructiunile de operare BA 274P
"Cerabar S/Deltabar S, Descrierea functiilor aparatului". vezi pag.2, "Prezentare documentatie".)
Sunt diferite coduri de resetare pentru aparat. Tabelul de mai jos arata care parametri sunt resetati
de anumite coduri de resetare. Operarea trebuie sa fie deblocata pentru a reseta parametri (→ vezi
pag. 40, sectiunea 5.9).
Nota !Note!
Configurarile specifice ale clientului realizate din fabrica nu sunt afectate de reset (configurarile
specifice client raman). Daca, dupa o resetare, doriti ca parametri sa fie resetati la setarile din
fabrica, va rugam contactati service-ul Endress+Hauser.
Cod reset Descriere si efect
1846 Reset Display

– Acest reset reseteaza toti parametri care fac cum sa arate afisajul (grupa DISPLAY).
– Este terminata orice simulare care poate fi in curs.
– Aparatul este repornit.
62 Resetare pornire (PowerUp) (pornire calda)

– Acest reset reseteaza toti parametri din RAM. Datele sunt recitite din EEPROM
(procesorul este initializat din nou).
– Este terminata orice simulare care poate fi in curs
2710 Resetare mod masurare nivel

– Functie de setarea parametrilor pentru LEVEL MODE, LIN MEASURAND,
LINdMEASURAND sau COMB. MEASURAND, parametri de care este nevoie
pentru indeplinirea acestei masuratori vor fi resetati.
Exemplu LEVEL MODE = liniar si LIN. MEASURAND = Inalt
• HEIGHT UNIT = m
• CALIBRATION MODE = umed
• EMPTY CALIB. = 0
• FULL CALIB. = Senzor si valoare convertita in H2O, ex. 50.99 mH2O pentru un
senzor de 500 mbar
333 Resetare uilizator

– Afecteaza urmatorii parametri:
– Grupa functionala POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Grupa functionala BASIC SETUP, cu exceptia unitatilor specifice utilizator
– Grupa functionala EXTENDED SETUP
– Grupa functionala TOTALIZER SETUP
– Grupa OUTPUT
– Grupa functionala HART DATA: BUS ADDRESS si PREAMBLE NUMBER
– Este terminata orice simulare care poate fi in curs
– Aparatul este repornit
Endress+Hauser 41
Cod reset Descriere si efect
7864 Reset total

– Afecteaza urmatorii parametri:
– Grupa functionala POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Grupa functionala BASIC SETUP
– Grupa functionala EXTENDED SETUP
– Grupa functionala LINEARISATION (este stearsa orice tabela de liniarizare
existenta)
– Grupa functionala TOTALIZER SETUP
– Grupa OUTPUT
– Grupa functionala PEAK HOLD INDICATOR
– Grupa functionala HART DATA
– Toate mesajele de configurare (tip "eroare" ) sunt setate la "Atentionare".
→ Vezi pag, 55, sectiunea 8.1 "Mesaje" si pag. 62, 8.2 "Raspunsul iesirilor la erori".
– Grupa functionala USER LIMITS
8888 Resetare HistoROM

Memoria valorilor masurate si memoria evenimentelor sunt sterse. In timpul resetarii,
HistoROM-ul trebuie sa fie atasat la insertul electronic .
42 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Punerea in functiune
6 Punerea in functiune
Nota !Note!
Aparatul este configurat standard pentru modul de masurare presiune. Domeniul de masura si
unitatea in care valoarea masurata este transmisa corespund cu caracteristicile inscrise pe eticheta.
6.1 Functia de verificare

Inainte de punerea in functiune a aparatului se realizeaza o verificare dupa instalare si o verificare
dupa conectare respectand lista de verificare.
• Lista de verificare "Verificare dupa instalare" → vezi sectiunea 3.4
• Lista de verificare "Verificare dupa conectare" → vezi sectiunea 4.4
6.2 Selectare limba si mod masurare
6.2.1 Operare locala

Parametri LANGUAGE si MEASURING MODE sunt localizati in topul meniului nivel. → vezi
pag., sectiunea 5.4.1 "Structura generala a meniului de operare".
Sunt disponibile urmatoarele limbi:
• Deutsch
• English
• Français
• Italiano
• Español
• Nederlands
Sunt disponibile urmatoarele moduri de masurare:
• Presiune
• Nivel
• Debit
6.2.2 ToF Tool sau comunicatorul manual HART

Parametrul MEASURING MODE este afisat in ToF Tool si in comunicatorul manual HART in
meniul QUICK SETUP si in grupa functionala BASIC SETUP (OPERATING MENU →
SETTINGS → BASIC SETUP).
Sunt disponibile urmatoarele moduri de masurare:
• Presiune
• Nivel
• Debit
Parametrul LANGUAGE este cuprins in ToF Tool si in comunicatorul manual HART in grupa
DISPLAY (OPERATING MENU → DISPLAY).
Se utilizeaza parametrul LANGUAGE pentru a selecta limba meniului pe display-ul local. Se
selecteaza limba meniului pentru ToF Tool prin meniul "Optiuni" → "Setari" → "Limba" tabel
→ camp limba "ToF Tool ".
Sunt disponibile urmatoarele limbi:
• Deutsch
• English
• Français
• Italiano
• Español
• Nederlands
Endress+Hauser 43
Punerea in functiune Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
6.3 Ajustare pozitie

Datorita orientarii aparatului, poate sa apara o deviere a valorii masurate, de exemplu, cand
containerul este gol, parametrul valorii masurate nu afiseaza zero. Exista trei optiuni pe care le
putem alege cand realizam ajustarea pozitiei.
(Cale meniu: (GROUP SELECTION →) OPERATING MENU → SETTINGS → POSITION
ADJUSTMENT)
Nume parametru Descriere

POS. ZERO ADJUST (685) Ajustare pozitie –diferenta de presiune dintre zero (referinta) si presiunea masurata nu
Se introduce trebuie sa fie cunoscuta. (O presiune de referinta este prezenta la aparat.)
Exemplu:
– MEASURED VALUE = 2.2 mbar
– Se corecteaza MEASURED VALUE prin parametrul POS. ZERO ADJUST cu
optiunea"Confirm". Aceasta inseamna ca se aloca valoarea 0.0 la presiunea prezenta.
– MEASURED VALUE (dupa ajustare poz.zero) = 0.0 mbar
– Valoarea curenta este astfel corectata.
Parametrul CALIB. OFFSET afiseaza diferenta de presiune rezultata (offset) la care
MEASURED VALUE a fost corectata.
Setare fabrica:
0
POS. INPUT VALUE (563) Ajustare pozitie –diferenta de presiune dintre zero (referinta) si presiunea masurata nu
Se introduce trebuie sa fie cunoscuta. (O presiune de referinta este prezenta la aparat.)
Exemplu:
– Pentru parametrul POS. INPUT VALUE, se specifica referinta dorita pentru
MEASURED VALUE, ex. 2 mbar.
(MEASURED VALUEnew = POS. INPUT VALUE)
– MEASURED VALUE (dupa introducerea POS. INPUT VALUE) = 2.0 mbar
– Parametrul CALIB. OFFSET afiseaza diferenta de presiune rezultata (offset) la care
MEASURED VALUE a fost corectata.
CALIB. OFFSET = MEASURED VALUEold – POS. INPUT VALUE,
aici: CALIB. OFFSET = 0.5 mbar – 2.0 mbar = – 1.5 mbar)
Setare fabrica:
0
CALIB. OFFSET (319) Ajustare pozitie –diferenta de presiune dintre zero (referinta) si presiunea masurata este
Se introduce cunoscuta. (O presiune de referinta nu este prezenta la aparat.)
Exemplu:
– Prin parametrul CALIB. OFFSET, se introduce valoarea la care MEASURED
VALUE ar trebui corectata. Pentru a corecta MEASURED VALUE la 0.0 mbar,
trebuie introdusa valoarea, aici de 2.2 .
(MEASURED VALUE new = MEASURED VALUEold – CALIB. OFFSET)
– MEASURED VALUE (dupa intrarea pentru calib. offset) = 0.0 mbar
Setare fabrica:
0
44 Endress+Hauser
6.4 Masurarea debitului
6.4.1 Etape de pregatire

Nota !Note!
• Deltabar S PMD70 sau PMD75 este utilizat frecvent pentru masurarea debitului.
• Inainte de calibrarea Deltabar S, tevile de impuls trebuie curatate si aparatul umplut cu fluid. →
Vezi tabelul urmator:
Robinete Semnificatie Instalare preferata
1 Se inchide 3.
2 Se umple sistemul de masurare cu fluid. 6 7
Se deschid A, B, 2, 4. Fluidul umple sistemul. I
3 Se curata, daca este necesar, tevile de impuls1: + –
– prin suflare cu aer comprimat in cazul gazelor
II 3
– prin spalare in cazul lichidelor
2 4
Se inchid 2 si 4. Aparatul se izoleaza.
Se deschid 1 si 5.1 Suflare/spalare tevi impuls. +

A B
Se inchid 1si 5.1 Se inchid robinetele dupa
curatare.
4 Se aeriseste.
Se deschid 2 si 4. Se introduce fluid.
Se inchide 4. Se inchide partea negativa.

Se deschide 3. Se echilibreaza partea
pozitiva cu cea negativa.
A B
Se deschid scurt 6 si 7, apoi Se umple aparatul complet
6 7
se inchid. cu fluid si se scoate aerul. +
5 Se realizeaza ajustarea pozitiei de zero daca sunt indeplinite I
urmatoarele conditii. Daca conditiile nu sunt indeplinite, nu III + – III
se face ajustarea pozitiei de zero decat dupa pasul 6. → Vezi II
3
pag. 47, sectiunea 6.4.3 si pag. 44, sectiunea 6.3.
Conditii: 2 4
1 5
– Procesul nu poate fi izolat.
– Prizele de masura (A si B) sunt la aceiasi inaltime.
6 Se seteaza punctul de masurare in functionare.
Fig. 36: Sus: instalarea preferata pentru gaze
Se inchide 3. Se izoleaza partea pozitiva Jos: instalarea preferata pentru lichide
de partea negativa.
I Deltabar S, PMD70 sau PMD75
Se deschide 4. Se conecteaza partea II Baterie cu trei robineti
negativa. Separator
1, 5 Robinete de drenaj
Acum
2, 4 Robinete de intrare
– 11, 3, 51, 6 si 7 sunt inchise.
3 Robinet de egalizare
– 2 si 4 sunt deschise.
6, 7 Ventile de aerisire pe Deltabar S
– Se deschid A si B (daca exista).
A, B Robinete de izolare
7 Se realizeaza ajustarea pozitiei de zero daca debitul poate fi
izolat. In acest caz, pasul 5 nu este aplicabil.
→ Vezi pag. 47, sectiunea 6.4.3 si pag. 44, sectiunea 6.3
8 Se face calibrarea. → vezi pag 46, sectiunea 6.4.2.
1) Pentru schema cu 5 robineti
Endress+Hauser 45
6.4.2 Informatii despre masurarea debitului

In modul de masurare "Debit (Flow)", aparatul determina valoarea debitului volumetric sau masic
din presiunea diferentiala masurata. Diferenta de presiune este generata cu ajutorul unor elemente
primare cum ar fi tuburile Pitot sau diafragmele de masura si este functie de debitul volumetric
sau masic. Sunt disponibile patru moduri de masurare a debitului: debit volumetric, debit volum
normal (conditii normare europene), debit volum standard (conditii normare americane) si debit
masic.
Suplimentar, software-ul Deltabar S este echipat standard cu doua totalizatoare. Totalizatoarele
insumeaza debitul masic si volumetric. Functia de contorizare si unitatea pot fi setate separat
pentru cele doua totalizatoare. Primul totalizator (totalizatorul 1) poate fi resetat la zero oricand
in timp ce al doilea (totalizator 2) totalizeaza debitul de la punerea in functiune si nu poate fi
resetat.
Nota !Note!
• Exista un meniu de setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru fiecare mod masurare presiune, nivel si
debit care va indruma prin cele mai importante functii. Cu setarea parametrului in
MEASURING MODE, se specifica care meniu de setare rapida va fi afisat. → vezi si pag. 43,
sectiunea 6.2 "Selectare limba si mod masurare".
• Pentru o descriere detaliata a parametrilor vezi instructiunile de operare BA274P "Cerabar S/
Deltabar S, Descrierea functiilor aparatului"
– Tabelul 6, POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Tabelul 12, BASIC SETUP
– Tabelul 15, EXTENDED SETUP
– Tabelul 18, TOTALIZER SETUP.
→ vezi si pag.2, sectiunea "Prezentare documentatie".
• Pentru masurarea debitului, se selecteaza optiunea "Flow" cu ajutorul parametrului
MEASURING MODE. Meniul de operare este structurat corespunzator. → vezi si sectiunea
10.1.
46 Endress+Hauser
6.4.3 Meniul setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul de masurare

debit
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
2)
MEASURING MODE
Presiune Nivel Debit
POS. ZERO ADJUST
MAX FLOW
MAX. PRESS. FLOW

1) Afisaj numai pe display-ul local
2) Afisaj numai prin ToF Tool si
comunicatorul manual HART DAMPING VALUE
Fig. 37: Meniul setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul de masurare debit
Operare locala ToF Tool si comunicatorul manual HART
Valoare masurata afisata Valoare masurata afisata

Display local: Se comuta de la valoarea masurata Se selecteaza meniul QUICK SETUP.
afisata la GROUP SELECTION cu .
GROUP SELECTION MEASURING MODE

Se selecteaza MEASURING MODE. Se selecteaya optiunea"Flow".
MEASURING MODE
Se selecteaza optiunea "Flow".
GROUP SELECTION
Se selecteaza meniul QUICK SETUP.
POS. ZERO ADJUST POS. ZERO ADJUST

Datorita pozitiei aparatului, poate apare o deviatie a Datorita pozitiei aparatului, poate apare o deviatie a
valorii masurate. Se conecteaza MEASURED VALUE valorii masurate. Se conecteaza MEASURED VALUE
prin parametrul POS. ZERO ADJUST cu optiunea prin parametrul POS. ZERO ADJUST cu optiunea
"Confirm", de exemplu se aloca valoarea 0.0 la "Confirm", de exemplu se aloca valoarea 0.0 la
presiunea prezenta. presiunea prezenta.
MAX. FLOW MAX. FLOW

Se introduce debitul maxim al elementului primar. (→ Se introduce debitul maxim al elementului primar. (→
vezi fisa de calcul a elementului primar). vezi fisa de calcul a elementului primar).
MAX. PRESS FLOW MAX. PRESS FLOW

Se introduce presiunea maxima a elementului primar. Se introduce presiunea maxima a elementului primar.
(→ vezi fisa de calcul a elementului primar). (→ vezi fisa de calcul a elementului primar).
DAMPING TIME DAMPING TIME

Se introduce timpul de damping (constanta de timp τ). Se introduce timpul de damping (constanta de timp τ).
Dampingul afecteaza viteza cu care toate elementele Dampingul afecteaza viteza cu care toate elementele
subsecvente, cum ar fi afisajul local, valoarea masurata subsecvente, cum ar fi afisajul local, valoarea masurata
si curentul de iesire reactioneaza la o schimbare a si curentul de iesire reactioneaza la o schimbare a
presiunii. presiunii.
Nota !Note!
Pentru operarea locala, vezi si pag.29, sectiunea 5.2.3 "Functiile elementelor de operare" si
pag.33, sectiunea 5.4 "Operarea locala".
Endress+Hauser 47
6.5 Masurarea nivelului
Containere deschise
Nota !Note!
• Deltabar S PMD70, PMD75, FMD76 si FMD77 sunt utilizate de obicei pentru masurarea
nivelului in containere deschise.
• FMD76 si FMD77: aparatele sunt gata pentru calibrare imediat dupa deschiderea robinetelor de
izolare (care pot sau nu pot exista).
• PMD70 si PMD75: inainte de calibrarea aparatului, tevile de impuls trebuie sa fie curatate si
aparatul umplut cu fluid. → vezi tabelul urmator.
Robinete Semnificatie Instalare

1 Se umple containerul la un nivel deasupra prizei inferioare
de nivel.
2 Sistemul de masurare se umple cu fluid.
Se deschide A. Se deschid robinetele de

izolare.
3 Se aerisese aparatul.
Se deschide scurt 6, apoi se Aparatul se umple complet

inchide. cu fluid si se scoate aerul.

Acum
– A si 6 sunt inchise. P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-003
– B este deschis. Fig. 38: Container deschis

5 Se face calibrarea. → vezi pag. 50, sectiunea 6.5.2. I Deltabar S, PMD70 sau PMD75
II Separator
1 Robinet de drenaj
A Robinet de izolare
48 Endress+Hauser
Container inchis
Nota !Note!
• Toate versiunile Deltabar S sunt indicate pentru masurarea nivelului in containere inchise.
• FMD76 si FMD77: aparatele sunt gata pentru calibrare imediat dupa deschiderea robinetelor de
izolare (care pot sau nu pot exista).
• FMD78: aparatul este gata imediat pentru calibrare.
aparatul umplut cu fluid. → vezi tabelul urmator

de nivel.
2 Sistemul de masurare se umple cu fluid B
Se inchide 3. Se izoleaza partea pozitiva

de partea negativa.
+ A
Se deschid A si B. Se deschid robinetele de
izolare.
3 Se aeriseste partea pozitiva (se goleste partea negativa daca 6 7

este necesar). I
Se deschide 2 si 4. Se introduce fluid pe partea
+ –
pozitiva. II
III 3 III
Se deschid scurt 6 si 7, apoi Se umple partea pozitiva
se inchid. complet cu fluid si se scoate 2 4
aerul.
1 5
. P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-004
Acum Fig. 39: Container inchis

– 3, 6 si 7 sunt inchise.
I Deltabar S, PMD70 si PMD75
– 2, 4, A si B sunt deschise.
II Baterie cu trei robineti
5 Se face calibrarea. → vezi pag. 50, sectiunea 6.5.2. III Separator
3 Robinet de egalizare
6, 7 Ventil aerisire pe Deltabar S
Endress+Hauser 49
P u n e re a in fu n c tiu n e Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
Containere cu presiune de abur

Nota !Note!
• Toate versiunile Deltabar S sunt indicate pentru masurarea nivelului in containere cu presiune
de abur.
• FMD76 si FMD77: aparatul este pregatit pentru calibrare imediat dupa deschiderea robinetelor
de izolarere (care pot sau nu pot exista).
• FMD78: aparatul este pregatit pentru calibrare imediat.

de nivel.
2 Sistemul de masurare se umple cu fluid.

Se deschid A si B. Se deschid robinetele de
izolare. B
Se umple teava de impuls la nivelul vasului de separare + A

condensat.
3 Se aeriseste aparatul.
6 7
Se deschid 2 si 4. Se introduce fluidul.
I
pozitiva si negativa. + –
II
III 3 III
Se deschid scurt 6 si 7, apoi Aparatul se umple complet
se inchid. cu fluid si se scoate aerul. 2 4
1 5
Se inchide 3. Se izoleaza partea pozitiva
de partea negativa. P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-005
Se deschide 4. Se conecteaza partea Fig. 40: Container inchis cu presiune de abur

negativa. I Deltabar S, PMD70 si PMD75
Acum II Baterie cu trei robineti
– 3, 6 si 7 sunt inchise. III Separator
– 2, 4, A si B sunt deschise. 1, 5 Robinete de drenaj
5 Se face calibrarea. → vezi pag. 50, sectiunea 6.5.2. 3 Robinet de egalizare
6, 7 Ventil aerisire pe Deltabar S
6.5.2 Informatii despre masurarea nivelului

Sunt disponibile trei tipuri de nivel pentru masurarea nivelului : "Liniar (Linear)", "Presiune
liniarizata (Pressure Linearized)" si "Inaltime liniarizata (Height Linearized)".
– Linear: se selecteaza acest tip de nivel daca variabila masurata este direct proportionala cu
presiunea masurata. Se poate alege ca variabila masurata intre inaltime, volum, masa sau % .
– Pressure Linearized: se selecteaza acest tip de nivel daca variabila masurata nu este direct
proportionala cu presiunea masurata, cum ar fi in cazul containerelor cu iesire conica. Se poate
alege ca variabila masurata intre inaltime, volum, masa sau % .
– Height Linearized: Se alege acest tip de nivel daca este nevoie de doua variabile masurate sau
forma containerului este data intr-o pereche de valori cum ar fi inaltimea si volumul. Sunt
posibile urmatoarele combinatii: "inaltime + volum", "inaltime + masa", "inaltime + %", "%-
inaltime + volum, "%-inaltime + masa" sau "%-inaltime + %". Pentru acest tip de nivel se fac
doua calibrari. Prima pentru variabila masurata inaltime sau %-inaltime ca pentru nivel de tip
"Linear" si apoi pentru variabila masurata volum, masa sau % ca pentru nivel tip "Pressure
Linearized".
50 Endress+Hauser
Pentru tipurile de nivel "Linear" si "Height Linearized", sunt disponibile modurile de calibrare
"umed (wet) " si "uscat (dry)" .
– Wet: calibrarea umeda are loc prin umplerea si golirea containerului. Pentru acest mod de
calibrare trebuie introduse doua perechi de valori presiune-nivel. In cazul a doua nivele diferite,
valoarea nivelului este introdusa si presiunea masurata la acest moment este alocata valorii de
nivel.
– Dry: calibrarea uscata este o calibrare teoretica care se poate face chiar daca aparatul nu este
montat sau containerul este gol. Functie de variabila selectata masurata, valorile parametrilor
necesari pentru calcul sunt indoielnici. De exemplu, densitatea fluidului poate fi introdusa
pentru variabila masurata nivel.
Pentru tipurile de nivel "Pressure Linearized" si "Height Linearized", se introduce un tabel de
liniarizare. Sunt posibile modurile de introducere "Manual" si "Semiautomatic" .
– Manual: containerul nu trebuie umplut sau golit niciodata pentru acest mod de intrare. Se
introduc punctele corespunzatoare din tabelul de liniarizare.
– Semiautomatic: in acest mod containerul este umplut sau golit in etape. Aparatul inregistreaza
automat presiunea hidrostatica. Se introduce valoarea asociata: volum, masa sau %.
Nota !Note!
• Exista un meniu de setare rapida pentru fiecare mod de masurare, presiune si nivel care va
ghideaza prin cele mai importante functii. Cu setarea in parametrul MEASURING MODE , se
specifica care meniu setare rapida (Quick Setup) ar trebui afisat. → vezi si pag. 43, sectiunea
6.2 "Selectare limba si mod de masurare".
• Pentru o descriere detaliata a parametrilor vezi instructiunile de operare BA274P "Cerabar S/
– Tabel 6, POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Tabel 8 la 11, BASIC SETUP
– Tabel 14, EXTENDED SETUP
– Tabel 16, LINEARISATION – Operare locala
– Tabel 17, LINEARISATION – ToF Tool si comunicatorul manual HART .
→ vezi si pag. 2, sectiunea "Prezentare documentatie".
• Pentru masurarea nivelului, se selecteaza optiunea "Level" cu ajutorul parametrului
MEASURING MODE . Meniul de operare este structurat corespunzator. → vezi si sectiunea
10.1.
MEASURAND, EMPTY CALIB. si FULL CALIB. sunt urmatoarele:
– LEVEL MODE = Linear
– CALIBRATION MODE = wet
– LIN. MEASURAND = %
– EMPTY CALIB. = 0 %
– FULL CALIB. = 100 %.
6.5.3 Meniul setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru masurarea nivelului

Nota !Note!
Unii parametri din modul de masurare nivel ("Level") sunt numai afisati daca alti parametri sunt
configurati corespunzator. De exemplu, parametrul EMPTY PRESSURE nu este afisat decat daca
a fost selectata optiunea "Linear" pentru parametrul LEVEL MODE si optiunea "wet" a fost
selectata pentru parametrul CALIBRATION MODE (vezi figura urmatoare). Se poate gasi
parametrul LEVEL MODE in grupa functionala BASIC SETTINGS (cale meniu: (GROUP
SELECTION →) OPERATING MENU → SETTINGS → BASIC SETTINGS)
Endress+Hauser 51
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
2)
MEASURING MODE
POS. ZERO ADJUST
3) 4)
1) Afisaj numai pe display-ul local
2) Afisaj numai prin ToF Tool si EMPTY CALIB.
comunicatorul manual HART
3) LEVEL MODE = "Pressure Linearized" FULL CALIB.
sau "Height Linearized" si/sau
CALIBRATION MODE = "uscat (dry)”
4) LEVEL MODE = "Linear" si
CALIBRATION MODE = "umed (wet)” DAMPING VALUE
Fig. 41: Meniul setare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru modul de masurare nivel
Valoare masurata afisata Valoare masurata afisata

Display local: Se comuta de la valoare masurata afisata Se selecteaza meniul QUICK SETUP .
la GROUP SELECTION cu .

Se selecteaza MEASURING MODE. Se selecteaza optiunea "Level".
MEASURING MODE
Se selecteaza optiunea "Level".
GROUP SELECTION

EMPTY CALIB. (Level mode "linear", Calibration EMPTY CALIB. (Level mode "linear", Calibration
mode "wet") mode "wet")
Se introduce nivelul pentru punctul de calibrare Se introduce nivelul pentru punctul de calibrare
inferior. inferior.
Pentru acest parametru , se introduce valoarea nivelului Pentru acest parametru , se introduce valoarea nivelului
care este alocata presiunii prezente la aparat. care este alocata presiunii prezente la aparat.
FULL CALIB. (Level mode "linear", Calibration FULL CALIB. (Level mode "linear", Calibration
mode "wet") mode "wet")
Se introduce nivelul pentru punctul de calibrare Se introduce nivelul pentru punctul de calibrare
superior. superior.
Pentru acest parametru , se introduce valoarea nivelului Pentru acest parametru , se introduce valoarea nivelului
care este alocata presiunii prezente la aparat. care este alocata presiunii prezente la aparat.

Nota !Note!
Pentru operarea locala, vezi si pag. 29, sectiunea 5.2.3 "Functionare si elemente de operare" si
pag. 33, sectiunea 5.4 "Operarea locala"
52 Endress+Hauser
6.6 Masurarea presiunii diferentiale

Nota !Note!
• Deltabar S PMD70, PMD75 si FMD78 sunt utilizati pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale
• FMD78: aparatul este pregatit pentru calibrare imediat.
Robinete Semnificatie Instalare preferata
1 Se inchide 3.
2 Sistemul de masurare se umple cu fluid. 6 7
Se deschide A, B, 2, 4. Fluidul umple sistemul. I
3 Se curata tevile de impuls, daca este necesar:1 + –
– prin suflarea cu aer comprimat, in cazul gazelor
II 3
– prin spalare, in cazul lichidelor.
2 4
Se inchid 2 si 4. Se izoleaza aparatul.
Se deschid 1 si 5.1 Suflare/spalare tevi de +

impuls. A B
1
Se inchid 1 si 5. Se inchid robinetele dupa
curatare.
4 Se aeriseste aparatul.
Se deschid 2 si 4. Se introduce fluid.
Se inchide 4. Se inchide partea negativa.

pozitiva si negativa. A B
6 7
Se deschid scurt 6 si 7, apoi Aparatul se umple complet +
se inchid. cu fluid si se scoate aerul. I
5 Se seteaza punctul de masurare in functionare III + – III
II
Se inchide 3. Se izoleaza partea pozitiva 3
de partea negativa.
2 4
Se deschide 4. Se conecteaza partea 1 5
negativa.
Acum P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-002
– 11, 3, 51, 6 si 7 sunt inchise. Fig. 42: Sus: schema preferata pentru gaze
– 2 si 4 sunt deschise. Jos: schema preferata pentru lichide
– A si B deschise (daca exista).
I Deltabar S, PMD70 sau PMD75
6 Se realizeaza calibrarea, daca este necesar. → vezi pag. 54, II Baterie ce trei robineti
sectiunea 6.6.2. III Separator
3 Robinet egalizare
1) pentru schema cu 5 robineti
Endress+Hauser 53
6.6.2 Informatii despre masurarea presiunii diferentiale

Nota !Note!
• Exista un meniu de stare rapida (Quick Setup) pentru fiecare mod de masurare presiune, nivel
si debit care va ghideaza prin cele mai importante functii de baza. Cu setarea parametrului
MEASURING MODE , se specifica care meniu Quick Setup trebuie sa fie afisat. → vezi
pag.43, sectiunea 6.2 "Selectare limba si mod masurare".
• Pentru o descriere detaliata a parametrilor vezi instructiunile de operare BA 274P "Cerabar S/
– Tabel 6, POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Tabel 7, BASIC SETUP
– Tabel 13, EXTENDED SETUP
• Pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale, se selecteaza optiunea "Pressure" cu ajutorul param.
MEASURING MODE. Meniul de operare este structurat corespunzator. → vezi sectiunea 10.1.
6.6.3 Meniul Quick Setup pentru modul de masurare presiune
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
2)
MEASURING MODE

POS. ZERO ADJUST
SET LRV
1) Afisaj numai pe display-ul local SET URV

comunicatorul manual HART DAMPING VALUE
Fig. 43: Meniul Quick Setup pentru modul de masurare presiune
Afisare valoare masurata Afisare valoare masurata

Display-ul local: Comutare de la afisare valoare Se selecteaza meniul QUICK SETUP.
masurata la GROUP SELECTION cu .

Se selecteaza MEASURING MODE. Se selecteaza optiunea "Pressure".
MEASURING MODE
Se selecteaza optiunea "Pressure".
GROUP SELECTION

SET LRV SET LRV

Se seteaza domeniul de masurare (se introduce 4 mA ). Se seteaza domeniul de masurare (se introduce 4 mA ).
Se specifica o valoare de presiune pentru curentul Se specifica o valoare de presiune pentru curentul
minim (valoare 4 mA ). O presiune de referinta nu minim (valoare 4 mA ). O presiune de referinta nu
trebuie sa fie prezenta la aparat. trebuie sa fie prezenta la aparat.
54 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Mentenanta
GET LRV GET LRV

Se seteaza domeniul de masurare (se introduce 4 mA ). Se seteaza domeniul de masurare (se introduce 4 mA ).
Presiunea pentru valoarea minima a curentului (valoare Presiunea pentru valoarea minima a curentului (valoare
4 mA) este prezenta la aparat. Cu optiunea "Confirm", 4 mA) este prezenta la aparat. Cu optiunea "Confirm",
se aloca valoarea minima a curentului la valoarea se aloca valoarea minima a curentului la valoarea
prezenta a presiunii. prezenta a presiunii.

Nota !Note!
Pentru operarea locala, vezi si pag.29, sectiunea 5.2.3 "Functiile elementelor de operare" si
pag.33, sectiunea 5.4 "Operarea locala"..
7 Mentenanta
Deltabar S nu necesita mentenanta.
7.1 Curatarea exterioara

Va rugam sa retineti urmatoarele atunci cand curatati aparatul:
• Agentul de curatare utilizat nu trebuie sa atace suprafata si etansarile.
• Trebuie evitate deteriorarea mecanica a membranei, de exemplu datorita unor obiecte ascutite
8 Detectare defecte
8.1 Mesaje de eroare

Tabelul urmator listeaza toate mesajele care pot apare.
Aparatul face diferenta intre tipurile de erori "Alarma (Alarm)", "Atentionare (Warning)" si
"Eroare (Error)". Din fabrica, toate mesajele de tip "Error" sunt setate ca "Warning".
→vezi "Tip eroare coloana /NA 64" si sectiunea 8.2 "Raspunsul iesirilor la erori".
Suplimentar, "Tip eroare/NA 64" coloana clasifica mesajele in conformitate cu NAMUR
recomandarea NA 64:
• Nu mai functioneaza: indicata cu "B"
• Necesita mentenanta: indicata cu "C" (necesita verificare)
• Verificare functie: indicata cu "I" (in service)
Mesajul eroare afisat pe display-ul local:
• Valoarea masurata afisata arata mesajul cu cea mai mare prioritate. → vezi coloana prioritate.
• Parametrul stare alarma (ALARM STATUS) arata toate mesajele prezente in ordinea
descrescatoare a prioritatii. Se poate defila prin toate mesajele prezente cu tasta -sau tasta -.
Mesajul afisat prin ToF Tool, comunicatorul manual HART si Commuwin II:
• Param. ALARM STATUS arata mesajul cu cea mai mare prioritate. → vezi coloana prioritate.
Nota !Note!
• Pentru ajutor si mai multe informatii, va rugam contactati reprezentanta Endress+Hauser .
• → vezi si sectiunea 8.4, 8.5 si 8.6.
Endress+Hauser 55
Detectare defecte Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
Cod Tip eroare/ Mesaj/descriere Cauza Masuri Prioritate

NA 64
101 (A101) Alarma B>Eroare senzor electronic – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se asteapta cateva minute. 17
B EEPROM mari decat cele specificate in datele – Se reporneste aparatul. Se face reset
tehnice. (Code 62).
(→ vezi sectiunea 9.) – Se blocheaza efectele
electromagnetice sau se elimina
Acest mesaj apare in mod normal
sursa perturbatiei.
cateva secunde.
– Senzor defect. – Se inlocuieste senzorul.
102 (W102) Atentionare C>Eroare la verificare in – Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica 53
C EEPROM: segment retinere varf Masurarea corecta poate functiona principala. .
atat timp cat nu aveti nevoie de
functia de indicare a varfurilor
retinute.
106 (W106) Atentionare C>Descarcare - va rog asteptati – Descarcare. – Se asteapta pana ce descarcarea este 52
C completa.
110 (A110) Alarma B>Eroare la verificare in – Deconectarea tensiunii de – Se restabileste tensiunea de 6

B EEPROM: segment configurare alimentare in timpul scrierii. alimentare. Se face reset (Cod
7864) daca este necesar. Se
realizeaza o noua calibrare.
– Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se blocheaza efectele
mari decat cele specificate in datele electromagnetice sau se elimina
tehnice. (→ vezi sectiunea 9.) sursa perturbatiei.
– Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica pr.
113 (A113) Alarma B>Cadere ROM in electronica – Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica 1
B traductorului principala. .
115 (E115) Eroare C>Suprapresiune senzor – Presiune prea mica. – Se creste presiunea pana cand 29
C mesajul dispare.
116 (W116) Atentionare C>Eroare transfer, se repeta – Fisierul este defect. – Se utilizeaza alt fisier. 36
C transferul
– In timpul transferului, datele nu – Se verifica conectarea cablului PC
sunt transmise corect la procesor, – traductor.
ex. datorita desfacerii unei – Se blocheaza efectele
conexiuni in cablu, varfuri (unde) electromagnetice sau se elimina
ale tensiunii de alimentare sau sursa perturbatiei.
efectelor electromagnetice. – Se face reset (Cod 7864) . Se
realizeaza o noua calibrare.
– Se repeta transferul.
120 (E120) Eroare C>Presiune scazuta senzor – Presiune prea mica. – Se creste presiunea pana cand 30
C mesajul dispare.
121 (A121) Alarma B>Eroare la verificare in fabrica – Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica 5
B segmentul EEPROM principala.
122 (A122) Alarma B>Senzorul nu este conectat – Deconectarea cablului senzor – – Se verifica conectarea cablului si se 13
B electronica principala. repara daca este necesar.
– Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se blocheaza efectele
mari decat cele specificate in datele electromagnetice sau se elimina
130 (A130) Alarma B>EEPROM este defect. – Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica pr. 10
B
131 (A131) Alarma B>Eroare la verificare in – Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica 9
B EEPROM: segment min/max principala.
132 (A132) Alarma B>Eroare la verificare in – Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica 7
B totalizator EEPROM principala.
56 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Detectare defecte

NA 64
133 (A133) Alarma B>Eroare la verificare in History – A aparut o eroare la scriere. – Se face reset (Cod 7864) . Se 8
B EEPROM realizeaza o noua calibrare.
– Electronica principala defecta. – Se inlocuieste electronica.
602 (W602) Atentionare C>Curba de liniarizare nu este – Tabelul de liniarizara nu are o – Se completeaza tab.de liniarizare 57
C monotona crestere monotona. sau se realizeaza o noua liniarizare.
604 (W604) Atentionare C>Tabelul de liniarizare nu este – Tabelul de liniarizare are cel putin 2 – Se completeaza tabelul de 58
C valid. Cel putin 2 puncte puncte. liniarizare sau se realizeaza o noua
liniarizare, daca este necesar.
613 (W613) Atentionare I>Simularea este activa – Simularea este comutata on, – Se comuta simularea pe off. 60
I ex.aparatul nu masoara in prezent.
620 (E620) Eroare C>Iesire curent in afara Curentul este in afara domeniului – Se verifica presiunea aplicata, daca 49
C domeniului permis 3.8...20.5 mA. este necesar, se reconfigureaza
– Presiunea aplicata este in afara domeniul de masurare (→ vezi si
instructiunile de operare BA274P,
domeniului de masurare setat (dar
cap. 4 la 6 sau aceste instructiuni de
in interiorul domeniului
senzorului). operare, pag. 2.)
– Se face reset (Cod 7864). Se
realizeaza o noua calibrare
700 (W700) Atentionare C>Nu s-a memorat ultima – A aparut o eroare cand se scriu sau – Se face reset (Cod 7864). Se 54
C configurare se citesc datele de configurare sau realizeaza o noua calibrare.
alimentarea a fost deconectata.

701 (W701) Atentionare C>Lantul de masurare configurat – Calibrarea realizata ar avea ca – Se face din nou calibrarea. 51
C depaseste domeniul senzorului rezultat domeniul de operare al
senzorului sa fie prea jos sau prea
sus.
702 (W702) Atentionare C>Datele HistoROM nu sunt – Datele nu au fost scrise corect la – Se repeta incarcarea. 55
C consistente. HistoROM, ex. daca HistoROM a – Se face reset (Cod 7864). Se
fost detasat in timpul procesului de realizeaza o noua calibrare.
scriere.
– HistoROM nu are nici o data. – Se copiaza datele corespunzatoare

la HistoROM. (→ vezi si pag.36,
sect. 5.5.1 "Copierea datelor de
config.".)
703 (A703) Alarma B>Eroare de masurare – Defect in partea electronica. – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 22
B la alimentarea electrica.

.

.
B la alimentarea electrica..
706 (W706) Atentionare C>Configurarea in HistoROM si – Configurarea (parametrilor) in – Se copiaza datele aparatului la 59
C aparat nu este identica HistoROM si in aparat nu este HistoROM. (→ vezi si pag.36,
identica. sectiunea 5.5.1 "Copierea datelor de
configurare".)
– Se copiaza datele de pe HistoROM
pe aparat. (→ vezi si pag.36,
sectiunea 5.5.1 "Copierea datelor de
configurare".) Mesajul ramane daca
HistoROM si aparatul au versiuni
software diferite. Mesajul dispare
daca se copiaza datele de la aparat
la HistoROM.
Endress+Hauser 57

NA 64
707 (A707) Alarma B>X-VAL. din tabel lin. dincolo – Cel putin o X-VALUE din tab. de – Se reface calibrarea.(→ vezi si 38
B de limite. liniarizare este fie sub val. pt. instructiunile de operare BA274P,
HYDR. PRESS MIN. sau MIN. cap. 4 la 6 sau aceste instructiuni de
LEVEL sau peste val. pt. HYDR. operare, pag. 2.)
PRESS. MAX. sau LEVEL MAX.
710 (W710) Atentionare B>Intervalul setat prea mic. Nu – Valorile pt.calibrare (ex.valoare – Se ajusteaza calibrarea la senzorul 51
C este permis. minima domeniu si valoare maxima potrivit. (→ vezi si instr. de operare
domeniu) sunt prea apropiate. BA274P, descrierea paramerului
MINIMUM SPAN sau aceste
instructiuni de operare, pag. 2.)
– Senzorul a fost inlocuit si – Se ajusteaza calibrarea la senzorul
configurarea specifica clientului nu potrivit.
se potriveste cu senzorul. – Se inlocuieste senzorul cu unul
potrivit.
– S-a facut un transfer nepotrivit. – Se verifica configurarea si se face

un nou transfer.
711 (A711) Alarma B>LRV sau URV dincolo de – Val. minima domeniu si/sau val. – Se reconfigureaza val. minima 37
B limite. maxima domeniu sunt sub sau peste domeniu si/sau val. maxima
limitele dom. senzorului. domeniu coresp.senzorului Atentie
la factorul de pozitie.
– Senzorul a fost inlocuit si – Se reconfigureaza val. minima

configurarea specifica clientului nu domeniu si/sau val. maxima
se potriveste cu senzorul.. domeniu coresp.senzorului. Atentie
la factorul de pozitie.
– Se inlocuieste senzorul cu unul
potrivit

un nou transfer.
713 (A713) Alarma B>100% punct nivelul dincolo de – Senzorul a fost inlocuit. – Se reface calibrarea. 39
B limite
715 (E715) Eroare C>Temperatura depasita senzor – Temperatura masurata in senzor – Se reduce temperatura de proces/ 32
C este mai mare decat temperatura temperatura mediului ambient.
nominala maxima a senzorului. (→
vezi si instr. de operare BA274P,
descrierea parametrului Tmax
SENSOR sau aceste instr. de
operare, pag. 2.)
– S-a facut un transfer nepotrivit – Se verifica configurarea si se face

un nou transfer.
716 (A716) Alarma B>Senzor diafragma rupt – Senzor defect. – Se inlocuieste senzorul. 24
B
717 (E717) Eroare C>Temperatura depasita – Temperatura masurata in – Se reduce temperatura mediului 34
C traductor electronica este mai mare decat ambiant.
temp.nominala maxima a
electronicii (+88 °C).
– S-a facut un transfer nepotrivit – Se verifica configurarea si se face

un nou transfer.
.
718 (E718) Eroare C>Temperatura scazuta traductor – Temperatura masurata in – Se creste temperatura mediului 35
C electronica este mai mare decat ambiant.
temp.nominala minima a
electronicii (–43 °C).
un nou transfer.
719 (A719) Alarma B>Y-VAL din tabel lin. dincolo – Cel putin o Y-VALUE din tabelul – Se reface calibrarea.(→ vezi si 40
B de limite. de liniarizare este sub MIN. TANK instructiunile de operare BA274P,
CONTANT sau peste MAX. TANK cap. 4 la 6 sau aceste instructiuni de
CONTENT. operare, pag. 2.)
58 Endress+Hauser

NA 64
720 (E720) Eroare C>Temperatura scazuta senzor – Temperatura masurata in senzor – Se creste temperatura de proces/ 33
C este mai mica decat temperatura temperatura mediului ambient
nominala minima a senzorului. (→
vezi si instructiunile de operare
BA274P, descrierea parametrului
Tmax SENSOR sau aceste
instructiuni de operare, pag. 2.))
un nou transfer
721 (A721) Alarma B>ZERO POSITION nivel – Au fost schimbati LEVEL MIN sau – Se face reset (Cod 7864) . Se 41
B dincolo de limite LEVEL MAX . realizeaza o noua calibrare.
722 (A722) Alarma B>EMPTY CALIB. sau FULL – Au fost schimbati LEVEL MIN sau – Se face reset (Cod 7864) . Se 42
B CALIB. dincolo de limite LEVEL MAX . realizeaza o noua calibrare.
723 (A723) Alarma B>MAX. FLOW dincolo de – A fost schimbat FLOW-MEAS. – Se reface calibrarea. 43
B limite TYPE .
725 (A725) Alarma B>Eroare conectare senzor, – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se blocheaza efectele 25
B perturbare ciclu mari decat cele specificate in datele electromagnetice sau se elimina
– Senzorul sau electronica principala – Se inlocuieste senzorul si

defecte. electronica pr.
.
726 (E726) Eroare C>Eroare temperatura senzor - – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se blocheaza efectele 31
C domeniu depasit mari decat cele specificate in datele electromagnetice sau se elimina
tehnice. (→ vezi sectiunea 9.) sursa perturbatiei
– Temperatura de proces este in afara – Se verifica temperatura prezenta, se

domeniului permis. reduce sau se creste daca este
necesar.
– Sensor defect. – Daca temperatura este in domeniul

permis, se inlocuieste senzorul.
727 (E727) Eroare C>Eroare presiune senzor - – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se blocheaza efectele 28
C domeniu depasit mari decat cele specificate in datele electromagnetice sau se elimina
– Presiunea este in afara limitelor – Se verifica presiunea prezenta, se

permise. reduce sau se creste daca este
necesar.
– Senzor defect. – Daca presiunea este in domeniul

permis, se inlocuieste senzorul
728 (A728) Alarma B>eroare RAM – Defect in partea electronica – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 2
729 (A729) Alarma B>eroare RAM – Electronica principala defecta.. – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 3

.
730 (E730) Eroare C>LRV limite de utilizare – Valoarea presiunii masurate – Se verifica sistemul/valoarea 46
C depasite depaseste valoarea specificata presiunii masurate.
pentru parametrul Pmin ALARM – Se schimba valoarea pentru Pmin
WINDOW . ALARM WINDOW daca este
necesar. (→ vezi si instructiuni de
operare BA274P, descrierea
parametrului Pmin ALARM
WINDOW sau acest manual de
operare, pag. 2.)
Endress+Hauser 59

NA 64
731 (E731) Eroare C>URV limite de utilizare – Valoarea presiunii masurate – Se verifica sistemul/valoarea 731 (E731)
C depasite depaseste valoarea specificata presiunii masurate.
pentru parametrul Pmax ALARM – Se schimba valoarea pentru Pmax
operare, pag. 2.
732 (E732) Eroare C>LRV . limite de utilizare – Valoarea temperaturii masurate – Se verifica sistemul/valoarea 732 (E732)
C temperatura depasite depaseste valoarea specificata temperaturii masurate
pentru parametrul Tmin ALARM – Se schimba valoarea pentru Tmin
operare, pag. 2.
733 (E733) Eroare C>URV limite de utilizare – Valoarea temperaturii masurate – Se verifica sistemul/valoarea 733 (E733)
C temperatura depasite depaseste valoarea specificata temperaturii masurate.
pentru parametrul Tmax ALARM – Se schimba valoarea pentru Tmax
operare, pag. 2.
736 (A736) Alarma B>eroare RAM – Defect in partea electronica. – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 736 (A736)
737 (A737) Alarma B>Eroare de masurare – Defect in partea electronica – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 737 (A737)
738 (A738) Alarma B>Eroare de masurare – Defect in partea electronica. – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 738 (A738)
739 (A739) Alarma B>Eroare de masurare – Electronica principala defecta. – Deconectare scurta a aparatului de 739 (A739)
740 (E740) Eroare C>Calculul debit depasit, – Mod masurare nivel: presiunea – Se verifica configurarea si se reface 740 (E740)
C configurare gresita masurata este sub valoarea pentru daca este necesar.
HYDR. PRESS. MIN. sau peste – Se alege un aparat cu domeniu de
valoarea HYDR. PRESS MAX. masurare potrivit.
– Mod masurare debit: presiunea – Se verifica configurarea si se reface

masurata a depasit valoarea pentru daca este necesar.
MAX. PRESS FLOW. – Se alege un aparat cu domeniu de
masurare potrivit.
741 (A741) Alarma B>TANK HEIGHT dincolo de – A fost schimbat LEVEL MIN sau – Se face reset (Cod 7864). Se 741 (A741)
B limite LEVEL MAX . realizeaza o noua calibrare.
742 (A742) Alarma B>Eroare conectare senzor – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se asteapta cateva minute. 742 (A742)
B (incarcare) mari decat cele specificate in datele – Se face reset (Cod 7864) . Se
tehnice. (→ vezi sectiunea 9.) Acest realizeaza o noua calibrare.
mesaj apare pentru scurt timp.
– Cablu de conectare senzor – – Se verifica conectarea cablului si se
electronica principala deconectat . repara daca este necesar.
60 Endress+Hauser

NA 64
743 (E743) Alarma B>Eroare electronica PCB in – Acest mesaj apare pentru scurt – Se asteapta cateva minute. 14
B timpul instalarii timp. – Se reporneste aparatul. Se face reset
(Code 62).
744 (A744) Alarma B>Eroare electronica principala – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se reporneste aparatul. Se face reset 11
B PCB mari decat cele specificate in datele (Code 62).
tehnice. (→ vezi sectiunea 9.) – Se blocheaza efectele
sursa perturbatiei.

745 (W745) Atentionare C>Date senzor data necunoscute – Senzorul nu este corespunzator – Se inlocuieste senzorul cu unul 56
C pentru aparat (eticheta senzor potrivit.
electronic). Aparatul continua
masurarea.
746 (W746) Atentionare C>Eroare conectare senzor - – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se asteapta cateva minute. 26
C initializare mari decat cele specificate in datele – Se reporneste aparatul. Se face reset
tehnice. (→ vezi sectiunea 9.) Acest (Code 62).
mesaj apare pentru scurt timp. – Se blocheaza efectele
sursa perturbatiei.
– Suprapresiune sau presiune scazuta. – Se reduce sau se creste presiunea
747 (A747) Alarma B>Software-ul senzorului nu este – Senzorul nu este corespunzator – Se inlocuieste senzorul cu unul 16
B compatibil cu electronica pentru aparat (eticheta senzor potrivit.
electronic).
748 (A748) Alarma B>Cadere memorie in procesor – Efectele electromagnetice sunt mai – Se blocheaza efectele 15
B semnal mari decat cele specificate in datele electromagnetice sau se elimina
Endress+Hauser 61
8.2 Raspunsul iesirilor la erori

Aparatul face diferenta intre trei tipuri de eroare alarma, atentionare si eroare.
→ vezi tabelul urmator si pag. 55, sectiunea 8.1 "Mesaje".
Iesire A (alarma) W (atentionare) E (eroare: alarma/atentionare)
Iesire curent Se intelege valoarea specificata prin Aparatul continua masurare. Pentru aceasta eroare, trebuie sa alegeti
parametri OUTPUT FAIL MODE1, ALT. daca aparatul ar trebui sa reactioneze ca la
CURR. OUTPUT1 si SET MAX. un eveniment de alarma sau ca la unul de
ALARM1 . → vezi si sectiunea atentionare. Vezi coloana corespunzatoare
"Configurare iesire curent pentru alarma". "alarma" sau "atentionare" . (→ vezi si
instructiunile de operare BA274P,
descrierea parametrului SELECT ALARM
TYPE sau aceste intructiuni de operare ,
pag. 2.)
Bargraf → Vezi acest tabel, iesire curent. → Vezi acest tabel, iesire curent. → Vezi acest tabel, iesire curent.
( display local)
Display local – Valoarea masurata si mesajul sunt – Valoarea masurata si mesajul sunt – Valoarea masurata si mesajul sunt
afisate alternativ afisate alternativ afisate alternativ
Pres Pres
– Valoarea masurata afisata: -simbolul – Valoarea masurata afisata: -simbolul – Valoarea masurata afisata: vezi coloana
este permanent afisat palpaie. corespunzatoare "alarma" sau
"atentionare"
Mesaj display Mesaj display: Mesaj display:
– numar de 3-digiti ex. A122 si – numar de 3-digiti ex. W613 si – numar de 3-digiti ex. E731 si
– descriere – descriere – descriere
Operarea la distanta In cazul unei alarme, parametrul In cazul unei atentionari, parametrul In cazul unei erori, parametrul
(ToF Tool, comunicator ALARM STATUS2 afiseaza un numar de ALARM STATUS2 afiseaza un numar de ALARM STATUS2 afiseaza un numar de
manual HART sau 3-digiti ex.122 pentru "Senzorul nu este 3-digiti ex. 613 pentru "Simularea este 3-digiti ex. 731 pentru "URV limite
Commuwin II) conectat". activa". utilizator depasite".
1) Cale meniu: (GROUP SELECTION →) OPERATING MENU → OUTPUT

2) Cale meniu: (GROUP SELECTION →) OPERATING MENU → MESSAGES
8.2.1 Configurare iesire curent pentru o alarma

Se poate configura iesirea curent pentru un eveniment de alarma cu ajutorul parametrilor
OUTPUT FAIL MODE, ALT. CURR. OUTPUT si SET MAX. ALARM. Parametri suni afisati
in grupa OUTPUT. ((GROUP SELECTION →) OPERATING MENU → OUTPUT).
La aparitia unei alarme, curentul si bargraful recunosc valoarea introdusa cu parametrul OUTPUT
FAIL MODE.
I
max.
➀ 21...23 mA
min.
➂ 3.6 mA
t
P01-xxxxxxxx-05
Fig. 44: Iesire curent la aparitia unei alarme

Optiuni:
1 Alarma max. (110%): poate fi setata intre 21...23 mA prin parametrul SET MAX. ALARM
2 Retine valoarea masurata: este pastrata ultima valoare masurata
3 Alarma min.(–10%): 3.6 mA
Setare fabrica: OUTPUT FAIL MODE = max., SET MAX. ALARM = 22 mA
62 Endress+Hauser
Se utilizeaza parametrul ALT. CURR. OUTPUT pentru a seta valoarea iesire curent pentru
mesajele de eroare E 120 "Presiune scazuta senzor" si E 115 "Suprapresiune senzor". Aveti
urmatoarele optiuni:
– Normal: iesirea curent recunoaste valoarea setata prin parametri OUTPUT FAIL MODE si SET
MAX. ALARM.
– NAMUR
– Sub limita minima a senzorului (E 120 "Presiune scazuta senzor"): 3.6 mA
– Peste limita mazima a senzorului (E 115 "Suprapresiune senzor") : iesirea curent recunoaste
valoarea setata prin parametrul SET MAX ALARM .
setare fabrica: ALT. CURR. OUTPUT = normal
8.3 Confirmare mesaje

Functie de setarile pentru parametri ALARM DISPL. TIME si ACK. ALARM MODE , vor fi
luate urmatoarele masuri pentru a sterge un mesaj:
Setari 1 Masuri
– ALARM DISPL. TIME = 0 s – Se solutioneaza cauza mesajului (vezi si sectiunea 8.1).

– ACK. ALARM MODE = off
– ALARM DISPL. TIME > 0 s – Se solutioneaza cauza mesajului (vezi si sectiunea 8.1)
– ACK. ALARM MODE = off – Se asteapta sa treaca timpul de afisare alarma.
– ALARM DISPL. TIME = 0 s – Se solutioneaza cauza mesajului (vezi si sectiunea 8.1).

– ACK. ALARM MODE = on – Se confirma mesajul utilizand parametrul ACK. ALARM .
– ALARM DISPL. TIME > 0 s – Se solutioneaza cauza mesajului (vezi si sectiunea 8.1).
– ACK. ALARM MODE = on – Se confirma mesajul utilizand parametrul ACK. ALARM .
– Se asteapta sa treaca timpul de afisare alarma Daca mesajul apare si timpul
de afisare alarma trece inainte ca mesajul sa fie confirmat, mesajul va fi
sters o data cu confirmarea.
1) Cale meniu pentru ALARM DISPL. TIME si ACK. ALARM MODE: (GROUP SELECTION →) OPERATING
MENU → DIAGNOSTICS → MESSAGES
Daca display-ul local afiseaza un mesaj, acesta poate fi anulat cu tasta .
daca sunt mai multe mesaje, display-ul local arata mesajul cu cea mai mare prioritate (vezi si
sectiunea 8.1). Dupa ce ati anulat acest mesaj cu tasta , este afisat mesajul urmator cu cea mai
mare prioritate. Puteti utiliza tasta pentru a anula fiecare mesaj, unul dupa altul.
Parametrul ALARM STATUS continua sa afiseze toate mesajele prezente.
Endress+Hauser 63
8.4 Reparare
Conceptul de reparare Endress+Hauser prevede pentru aparatele de masura o constructie
modulara si astfel clientul poate sa faca usor reparatii.
Sectiunea "Piese de schimb" contine toate piesele de schimb listate cu numerele lor de comanda.
Le puteti comanda de la Endress+Hauser pentru a repara aparateleDeltabar S. Mai mult decat este
necesar, in sectiunea cu piesele de schimb sunt cuprinse si instructiunile de inlocuire.
Nota !Note!
• Pentru aparate certificate, va rugam sa consultati capitolul "Repararea aparatelor certificate
Ex".
• Pentru mai multe informatii despre service si piese de schimb contactati reprezentanta
Endress+Hauser Service. ( → vezi www.endress.com/worldwide)
8.5 Repararea aparatelor certificate Ex

Pericol !Warning!
Cand se repara un aparat cu certificare Ex, va rugam sa retineti urmatoarele:
• Numai o persoana specializata sau Endress+Hauser pot face reparatii aparatelor certificate.
• Trebuie respectate standardele relevante, reglementarile nationale privind zonele cu pericol de
explozie si instructiunile de siguranta (XA...) si certificatele.
• Pot fi utilizate numai piese de schimb originale Endress+Hauser.
• Cand se comanda piesele de schimb, va rugam sa verificati caracteristicile piesei dupa eticheta.
Pentru inlocuire vor fi utilizate piese identice.
• Inserturile electronice sau senzorii care echipeaza aparatele standard nu pot fi folosite ca piese
de schimb pentru aparate certificate.
• Reparatiile se vor realiza conform instructiunilor. Dupa reparare, aparatul trebuie sa
indeplineasca cerintele din testele individuale specifice.
• Un aparat certificat poate fi convertit intr-o alta varianta de certificare numai de catre
Endress+Hauser.
• Toate reparatiile si modificarile trebuie sa fie inregistrate in documente.
64 Endress+Hauser
8.6 Piese de schimb

Urmatoarele pagini listeaza toate piesele de schimb cu numar de comanda care se pot comana de
la Endress+Hauser pentru a repara Deltabar S.
Cand se comanda piese de schimb, cititi totdeauna numarul serial indicat pe eticheta. Numarul
piesei de schimb este imprimat pe fiecare piesa de schimb. Mai mult, piesele de schimb includ si
instructiuni de inlocuire.
8.6.1 Piese de schimb pentru PMD70, PMD75, FMD76, FMD77,

FMD78
Vezi paginile urmatoare pentru flanse si senzori.
20
21
20
21
40
31
30
15
13
10
12
35
21
25
P01-xMD7xxxxx-09-xx-xx-xx-000
Endress+Hauser 65
10 Carcasa (cu inel de retinere si carcasa etansa, fara capac)

52020430 Carcasa aluminiu T14 , M20x1.5, nu pentru EEx d/XP
52020488 Carcasa aluminiu T14, M20x1.5, HART, cu 3 butoane exterioare, nu pentru EEx d/XP
52020489 Carcasa aluminiu T14, M20x1.5, PROFIBUS PA/Foundation Fieldbus, cu butoane exterioare,
nu pentru EEx d/XP
52020431 Carcasa aluminiu T14, 1/2 NPT, nu pentru EEx d/XP
52020490 Carcasa aluminiu T14, 1/2 NPT, HART, cu 3 butoane exterioare, nu pentru EEx d/XP
52020491 Carcasa aluminiu T14, 1/2 NPT, PROFIBUS PA/Foundation Fieldbus, cu butoane exterioare,
nu pentru EEx d/XP
12 Set de montaj carcasa/senzor

52020440 Setul de montaj carcasa /senzor consta din : 2 O-ring-uri 45.69x2.62 EPDM + inel retinere
13 Butoane carcasa, HART

52024110 Butoanele, constau din : butoane, capac si suruburi (versiunea 2.0)
15 Intrare cablu/presetupa
52020760 Presetupa M20x1.5, garnitura
52020761 Intrare cablu G 1/2, garnitura, adaptor
52020762 Fisa 2/ poli, Han7D, garnitura
52020763 Fisa 3 poli, M12, garnitura
20 Capac
52020432 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 incl. garnitura, nu pentru Ex d/XP
52020433 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 incl. garniturat, pentru Ex d/XP
52020494 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 cu vizor de sticla incl. garnitura, pentru zone fara Ex
52020492 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 cu vizor de sticla incl. garnitura, nu pentru Ex d/XP
52020493 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 cu vizor de sticla incl. garnitura, pentru Ex d/XP
21 Etansare capac
52020429 Set etansare EPDM pentru capac aluminiu T14 (5 piese)
25 Capac pentru compartiment terminale

52020432 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 incl. garnitura, nu pentru Ex d/X
52020433 Capac pentru carcasa din aluminiu T14 incl. garnitura, pentru Ex d/X
30 Electronica
52024400 Electronica 4...20 mA, HART, Ex, versiunea 2.0, buton pe electronica
52024111 Electronica 4...20 mA, HART, Ex, versiunea 2.0, buton pe carcasa
31 Modul HistoROM
52020797 Modul HistoROM , ToF Tool-CD inclus
35 Bloc terminal
52020434 Terminal 3 poli, filtru RFI 4...20 mA HART Ex ia
52020436 Terminal 3 poli, filtru RFI 4...20 mA HART Ex d
40 Modul display
52024112 Modul display VU 333 cu suport (versiune 2.0)
66 Endress+Hauser
8.6.2 Piese de schimb pentru PMD70
12
55
65
57
50
57
55
55 Flanse pentru PMD70

52020495 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8 (2 buc.)
52020496 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.)
52020497 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: M10, C22.8 (2 buc.)
52020498 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: M10, AISI 316L (2 buc.)
57 Garnitura proces
52020444 O-ring 48.9x2.62 EPDM 70 (4 buc.)
52020445 O-ring 48.9x2.62 FFKM Kalrez 70 (1 buc.)
52020446 O-ring 48.9x2.62 FKM-Viton 70 (4 buc.)
52020447 O-ring 48.9x2.62 FKM-Viton 70, fara ulei si unsoare (4 buc.)
52020448 O-ring 48.9x2.62 FFKM 75 Chemraz (1 buc.)
65 Kit de etansare
52020779 O-ring 78.0x1.5 NBR 70 (4 buc.)
Endress+Hauser 67
Modul senzor pentru Deltabar S PMD70 (pozitia 50)
Certificari
A Pentru zone fara perico de explozie
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6
6 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6, protectie preaplin WHG
2 ATEX II 1/2 D
3 ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
7 ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6
S FM IS, clasa I, II, III divizia 1, grupele A – G; NI clasa I divizia 2, grupele A – D; AEx ia
Q FM DIP, clasa II, III divizia 1, grupele E – G
R FM NI, clasa I, divizia 2, grupele A – D
U CSA IS, clasa I, II, III divizia 1, grupele A – G; clasa I divizia 2, grupele A – D, Ex ia
W CSA clasa II, III divizia 1, grupele E – G (EX-praf)
Celula de masurare, domeniu nominal de operare, PN

7B Celula de masurare 25 mbar, PN 10 (2.5 kPa/250 mmH2O/10 inH 2O/0.375 psi)
7D Celula de masurare 100 mbar, PN 16 (10 kPa/1 mH2O/40 inH2O/1.5 psi)
7F Celula de masurare 500 mbar, PN 100 (50 kPa/5 mH2O/200 inH2O/7.5 psi)
7H Celula de masurare 3 bar, PN 100 (300 kPa/30 mH 2O/1200 inH2O/45 psi)
Conexiune proces, material

B 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8
D 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L
F 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Alloy C
G 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, PVDF
U RC 1/4 montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L
1 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: PN 160: M10, C22.8
2 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: PN 160: M10, AISI 316L
3 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: PN 160: M10, Alloy C
0 fara conexiune proces
Material garnitura
A Etansare celula FKM Viton
B Etansare celula EPDM
D Etansare celula Kalrez
E Etansare celula Chemraz
1 Etansare celula FKM Viton , degresat
Optiuni suplimentare 1
A Fara
B Certificat test material pentru componente umede, certificat de inspectie dupa EN 10204 3.1.B
conf. cu specificatia 52005759
S GL (German Lloyd) crtificat marin
2 Raport test conf. cu EN10204 2.2
3 Test rutina cu certificat, certificat de inspectie dupa EN 10204 3.1.B
4 Test suprapresiune cu certificat,
certificat de inspectie dupa EN 10204 3.1.B
A Fara
K Ventile aerisire (2 buc.), Alloy C
S GL (German Lloyd) certificat marin
U Bride de montaj pentru perete si teava, AISI 316L
2 Raport test conf. cu EN10204 2.2
3 Test rutina cu certificat, certificat de inspectie dupa EN 10204 3.1.B
4 Test suprapresiune cu certificat,
5 Test scurgeri heliu EN 1518 cu certificat,
PMD70X Cod comanda modul senzor cu conexiune proces
PMD70X 0 A A Cod comanda modul senzor fara conexiune proces
68 Endress+Hauser
8.6.3 Piese de schimb pentru PMD75

Domenii de masurare 100 mbar, 500 mbar, 3 bar, 16 bar, 40 bar
A
12
56
55
57
50
57
55
56
Domenii de masurare 10 mbar si 30 mbar
A
12
56
55
57
50
57
55
56
Endress+Hauser 69
55 Flanse pentru domenii de masurare 100 mbar, 500 mbar, 3 bar, 16 bar, 40 bar
52020669 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.), cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020670 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala (2 buc.)
incl. 4 suruburi blocare, cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020671 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8, aerisire laterala (2 buc.)
incl. 4 suruburi blocare
52020672 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala (2 buc.s)
52020673 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, PN 160, montare: M10, AISI 316L (2 buc.), cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020674 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, PN 160, montare: M10, C22.8 (2 buc.)
52020675 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT, PN 160, montare: M10, AISI 316L (2 buc.)
52020679 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.), cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020680 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.)
52020681 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala (2 buc.) incl. 4 suruburi blocare, cu garnitura PTFE (2
buc.)
52020682 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala (2 buc.) incl. 4 suruburi blocare
55 Flanse pentru domenii de masurare 10 mbar si 30 mbar

52020684 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.), cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020690 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.)
52020691 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (2 buc.), cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020692 Flansa 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8, aerisire laterala (2 buc.)
incl. 4 suruburi blocare, cu garnitura PTFE (2 buc.)
52020696 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala (2 buc.) incl. 4 suruburi blocare
52020697 Flansa RC 1/4, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala (2buc.) incl. 4 suruburi blocare, cu garnitura PTFE (2
buc.)
56 Set montare flanse

52020687 Set montare flansa, PN 420, otel, pentru garnitura NBR, Viton,
consta din : 4 suruburi hexagonale M12x90 si 4 piulite hexagonale
52020693 Set montare flansa, PN 420,otel, pentru garnitura PTFE, cupru,
consta din : 4 suruburi hexagonale M12x90 si 4 piulite hexagonale si 4 saibe de blocare
52020758 Set montare flansa, PN 160,otel inox, pentru garnitura NBR, Viton,
consta din : 4 suruburi hexagonale M12x90 si 4 piulite hexagonale
52020759 Set montare flansa, PN 160,otel inox, pentru garnitura PTFE, cupru,
consta din : 4 suruburi hexagonale M12x90 si 4 piulite hexagonale si 4 saibe de blocare
57 Garnitura de proces pentru domeniu de masurare 100 mbar, 500 mbar, 3 bar, 16 bar, 40 bar
52020731 Garnitura PTFE (4 buc.)
52020732 O-ring 44.0 x 3.0 FKM Viton 90 (4 buc.)
52020734 O-ring 44.0 x 3.0 NBR 70 (4 buc.)
57 Garnitura de proces pentru domeniu de masurare 30 mbar si 30 mbar

52020735 Garnitura PTFE (4 buc.)
52020737 O-ring 58.0 x 3.0 NBR 90 (4 buc.)
70 Endress+Hauser
Modul senzor pentru Deltabar S PMD75 (pozitia 50)
Certificari
A Pentru zone fara pericol de explozie
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6
6 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6, protecte preaplin WHG
2 ATEX II 1/2 D
3 ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
5 ATEX II 2 G EEx d IIC T6
7 ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6
S FM IS, clasa I, II, III divizia 1, grupele A – G; NI clasa I divizia 2, grupele A – D; AEx ia
T FM XP, clasa I, divizia 1, grupele A – D; AEx d
Q FM DIP, clasa II, III divizia 1,grupele E – G
R FM NI, clasa I, divizia 2, grupele A – D
U CSA IS, clasa I, II, III divizia 1, grupele A – G; clasa I divizia 2, grupele A – D, Ex ia
V CSA XP, clasa I, divizia 1, grupele B – D, Ex d
W CSA clasa II, III divizia 1, grupele E – G (Ex-praf)
3 Certificat combinat: ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC T6
C Certificat combinat: FM IS si XP clasa I divizia 1, grupele A – D
D Certificat combinat: CSA IS si XP clasa I divizia 1, grupele A – D
E Certificat combinat: FM/CSA IS si XP clasa I divizia 1, grupele A – D
Celula de masurare, domeniu nominal de operare, PN

7B Celula de masurare 10 mbar, PN 160 (1 kPa/100 mmH2 O/4 inH2O/0.15 psi)
7C Celula de masurare 30 mbar, PN 160 (3 kPa/300 mmH2 O/12 inH2O/0.45 psi)
7D Celula de masurare 100 mbar, PN 160 (10 kPa/1 mH2O/40 inH2O/1.5 psi)
7F Celula de masurare 500 mbar, PN 160 (50 kPa/5 mH2O/200 inH2O/7.5 psi)
7H Celula de masurare 3 bar, PN 160 (300 kPa/30 mH2O/1200 inH2O/45 psi)
7L Celula de masurare 16 bar, PN 160 (1.6 MPa/160 mH2 O/528 ftH2 O/240 psi)
7M Celula de masurare 40 bar, PN 160 (4 MPa/400 mH2 O/1320 ftH2O/600 psi)
8F Celula de masurare 500 mba, PN 420 (50 kPa/5 mH2O/200 inH2O/7.5 psi)
8H Celula de masurare 3 bar, PN 420 (300 kPa/30 mH2O/1200 inH2O/45 psi)
8L Celula de masurare 16 bar, PN 420 (1.6 MPa/160 mH2 O/528 ftH2 O/240 psi)
8M Celula de masurare 40 bar, PN 420 (4 MPa/400 mH2 O/1320 ftH2O/600 psi)
78 Pregatit pentru montare DELTATOP/DELTASET, PN 160
88 Pregatit pentru montare DELTATOP/DELTASET, PN 420
Material diafragma
1 AISI 316L
2 Alloy C
3 Monel
5 Tantalum
6 Alloy C276 cu acoperire Rhodium-Gold
Conexiune proces, material

B 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8
C 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8, aerisire laterala, inclusiv 4 bolturi de
strangere conexiuni (AISI 316L) de montaj
D 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L
E 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, aerisire laterala, inclusiv 4 bolturi de
strangere conexiuni (AISI 316L) de montaj
F 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Alloy C, fara suruburi/aerisiri
H 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Alloy C, aerisire laterala, fara suruburi/aerisiri
U RC 1/4 montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L
V RC 1/4 montare: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8, aerisire laterala, inclusiv 4 bolturi de strangere conexiuni
(AISI 316L) de montaj
1 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: PN 160: M10, PN 420: M12, C22.8
2 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: PN 160: M10, PN 420: M12, AISI 316L
3 1/4 – 18 NPT, montare: PN 160: M10, PN 420: M12, Alloy C
0 fara conexiune proces
PMD75X cod comanda modul senzor cu conexiune proces
PMD75X 0 A A cod comanda modul senzor cufara conexiune proce
→ Pentru continuare cod comanda modul senzor, vezi pagina urmatoare.
Endress+Hauser 71
Material garnitura
A Etansare celula FKM Viton
C Etansare celula PTFE
F Etansare celula NBR
1 Etansare celula FKM Viton , degresata
A Fara
B Test cerificare material pentru parti umede, certificate de inspectie conforme cu EN 10204
3.1.B si spec.52005759
C Material NACE MR0175
D Test cerificare material pentru parti umede, conform cu EN 10204 3.1.B si material NACE
MR0175 , certificat de inspectie conf.cu EN 10204 si spec. 52010806
S GL (German Lloyd) certificat marin
2 Test doc. conform cu EN10204 2.2
3 Test rutina cu certificat , certificat de inspectie conform cu EN 10204 3.1.B
4 Certificat test suprapresiune,
certificat de inspectie conform cu EN 10204 3.1.B
A Fara
K Ventile aerisire (2 buc.), Alloy C
L Ventile aerisire (4 buc.), Alloy C
R Suruburi 7/16 UNF, lungime 1 1/2" (4 buc.)
S GL (German Lloyd)certificat marin
2 Test doc. conform cu EN10204 2.2
3 Test rutina cu certificat , certificat de inspectie conform cu EN 10204 3.1.B
4 Certificat test suprapresiune,
5 Test scurgeri heliu EN 1518 cu certificat de testare,
PMD75X cod comanda modul senzor cu conexiune proces
PMD75X 0 A A cod comanda modul senzor fara conexiune proces
8.7 Returnare
Inainte de a trimite aparatul pentru reparare sau verificare:
• Indepartati orice semn de fluid, acordand o atentie particulara canelurilor de etansare si
golurilor in care s-ar putea adaposti diferite substante. Aceasta este deosebit de important daca
fluidul este periculos pentru sanatate. Va rugam sa vedeti "Declaratia de contaminare".
Va rugam sa anexati urmatoarele documente la returnarea unui aparat:
• Va rugam sa completati si sa semnati "Declaration of Contamination".
Numai asa este posibil pentru Endress+Hauser sa inspecteze si sa returneze aparatul.
• Proprietatile fizice si chimice ale fluidului.
• O descriere a aplicatiei.
• O descriere a erorii care a aparut.
• Instructiuni speciale de manipulare, daca este necesar, de exemplu, foaia de date siguranta
(safety data sheet) conform cu
EN 91/155/EEC.
8.8 Disponibilizare
Cand se disponibilizeaza aparatul, se separa componentele reciclabile dupa tipul materialului.
.
72 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Date tehnice
8.9 Istoric software
Versiune software Modificari software Modificari documentatie

valabila de la :
01.00/01.10.2003 Software original.

Compatibil cu:
– Pachetul ToF Tool Field Tool , versiunea 1.04.00 sau mai mare
– Versiunea Commuwin II 2.08.-1, ap-date G sau mai marer
– HART Communicator DXR 375
(de la OS 4.6) cu rev. aparat.: 10, DD Rev.: 1
02.00/05.2004 – Numarul parametrilor in meniul Quick Setup a fost redus. – Modificari documentatie care reflecta modificari in software.
– Operarea locala: parametri LANGUAGE si MEASURING – Sectiunea "Descrierea parametrilor" a fost mutata in
MODE au fost mutati la nivelul superior. Instructiuni de operare BA274P.
– A fost implementat o noua grupa SAFETY CONFIRM. pentru
SIL.
→ Vezi si SD190P Safety Manual Cerabar S.
– Parametri MEASURING MODE "Level", LEVEL MODE
"Linear": AREA UNIT si TANK SECTION au fost inlocuiti cu
parametri TANK VOLUME si TANK HEIGHT .
– Functia parametrului UNIT FLOW a fost impartita in patru
parametri.
– Functia parametrului SIMULATED VALUE a fost divizata in
sase parametri.
– Grupele SENSOR TRIM si CURRENT TRIM au fost scoase
– Reset adapt senzor, cod 1209 si reset calibrare senzor, cod 2509
au fost scoase.
– Meniurile Quick Setup sunt disponibile prin ToF Tool.
Compatibil cu:
– Pachetul ToF Tool Field Tool versiunea 2.00.00 sau mai mare
– Commuwin II versiunea 2.08.-1, Update > G
– HART Communicator DXR 375
(de la OS 4.6) cu aparat rev.: 20, DD Rev.: 1
9 Date tehnice
Pentru date tehnice, va rugam sa vedeti Informatia tehnica TI382P pentru Deltabar S.
10 Anexa
10.1 Meniu de operare pentru display-ul local, ToF Tool si

comunicatorul manual HARTl
Nota !Note!
• Tot meniul este desenat pe paginile urmatoare.
• Meniul are o structura diferita functie de modul de masurare selectat. Aceasta inseamna ca
numai anumite grupe funcionale sunt afisate pentru un mod de masurare, de exemplu grupa
functionala "LINIARIZARE (LINEARISATION)" pentru mod functionare nivel (Level).
• Suplimentar, sunt anumiti parametri care sunt afisati numai daca alti parametri sunt configurati
corespunzator. De exemplu, parametrul unitate client (Customer Unit P) este afisat numai daca
a fost selectata optiunea "User unit" pentru parametrul PRESS. ENG. UNIT. Acesti parametri
sunt indicati cu un "*".
• Pentru descrierea parametrilor, va rugam sa vedeti instructiunile de operare BA274P
"Descrierea functiilor aparatului". Dependenta exacta a unui parametru individual de un altul
este explicata aici. Vezi si pag.2, sectiunea "Prezentare documentatie".
Endress+Hauser 73
Anexa Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
SETTINGS
POSITION ADJUSTMENT BASIC SETUP
2)
MEASURING MODE
PRESS. ENG. UNIT
CUSTOMER UNIT P
*
2)
CUST. UNIT FACT. P
*
MEASURING MODE
Presiune Nivel Debit Presiune Nivel Debit
POS. ZERO ADJUST POS. ZERO ADJUST POS. ZERO ADJUST POS. ZERO ADJUST SET LRV LEVEL MODE FLOW-MEAS. TYPE
SET LRV EMPTY CALIB.

* MAX. FLOW POS. INPUT VALUE SET URV Continuare, A
vezi pagina urmatoare
SET URV FULL CALIB.
* MAX PRESS. FLOW CALIB. OFFSET GET LRV
X B
DAMPING VALUE DAMPING VALUE DAMPING VALUE GET URV CUSTOMER UNIT F *
DAMPING VALUE CUST. UNIT FACT. F *
MAX. FLOW
MAX PRESS. FLOW
DAMPING VALUE
Volum Gaz Gaz Masa

cond.presiune cond.normale cond.standard cond presiune.
UNIT FLOW NORM FLOW UNIT STD. FLOW UNIT MASS FLOW UNIT
B B B B
1) Afisaj numai prin display-ul local

* Parametri care sunt afisati numai daca alti parametri sunt

configurati corespunzator.
Spre exemplu parametrul CUSTOMER UNIT P este afisat numai daca
ia fost selectata "User unit" pentru parametrul PRESS. ENG. UNI.
Acesti parametri sunt indicati cu un "*".
74 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Anexa
Inaltime Volum Masa %
HEIGHT UNIT UNIT VOLUME MASS UNIT

X
Continuare
BASIC SETUP "Level",
CUTOMER UNIT H * CUSTOMER UNIT V * CUSTOMER UNIT M *
vezi si pagina anterioara
Nivel CUST. UNIT FACT. H * CUST. UNIT FACT. V * CUST. UNIT FACT. M *
D D D D
LEVEL MODE
Liniarizare Liniarizare
Liniar
presiune inaltime E
LIN. MEASURAND LINd MEASURAND COMB. MEASURAND Volum Masa %
UNIT VOLUME MASS UNIT

C E G
D F H CUSTOMER UNIT V * CUSTOMER UNIT M *
CALIBRATION MODE HYDR. PRESS MIN.

CUST. UNIT FACT. V * CUST. UNIT FACT. M *
E
HYDR. PRESS MAX. F F F F

Umed Uscat
EMPTY CALIB. DENSITY UNIT DAMPING VALUE LEVEL MIN
EMPTY PRESSURE ADJUST DENSITY LEVEL MAX G
FULL CALIB. TANK VOLUME * CALIBRATION MODE

Inaltime+... %Inaltime+...
FULL PRESSURE TANK HEIGHT * HEIGHT UNIT

Umed Uscat
ADJUSTED DENSITY * HEIGHT UNIT * EMPTY CALIB. DENSITY UNIT CUTOMER UNIT H *
CUSTOMER UNIT H * EMPTY PRESSURE ADJUST DENSITY CUST. UNIT FACT. H *
CUST. UNIT FACT. H * FULL CALIB. HEIGHT UNIT * H H
100% POINT
* FULL PRESSURE CUSTOMER UNIT H *
ZERO POSITION ADJUSTED DENSITY * CUST. UNIT FACT. H *
100% POINT *
SET LRV
ZERO POSITION
SET URV
DAMPING VALUE DAMPING VALUE

De exemplu, parametrul CUST. UNIT FACT. H este afisat numai daca
a fost selectata optiunea "User unit" pentru parametrul HEIGHT UNIT.
Endress+Hauser 75
EXTENDED SETUP LINEARISATION LINEARISATION TOTALIZER SETUP

Numai mod Numai mod Numai mod
masurare nivel masurare nivel masurare debit
Afisare numai pe Afisare numai prin ToF Tool

display-ul local sau comunicatorul
manual HART
TEMP. ENG UNIT TEMP. ENG UNIT TEMP. ENG UNIT TANK CONTENT MIN TANK CONTENT MIN TOTALIZER 1 UNIT
ADJUST DENSITIY LOW FLOW CUT-OFF TANK CONTENT MAX TANK CONTENT MAX TOT. 1 USER UNIT
*
PROCESS DENSITY SET L. FL. CUT-OFF
* TABLE SELECTION TABLE SELECTION FACT. U. U. TOTAL.1
*
SET LRV * SET LRV Editor tabel
Tabel EDITOR TABLE NEG. FLOW TOT. 1
masuratori
SET URV * SET URV LIN. EDIT MODE MEASURING TABLE LINE-NUMB RESET TOTALIZER 1
EDITOR TABLE X-VAL. TOTALIZER 2 UNIT
Y-VAL. TOT. 2 USER UNIT

*
TANK DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE LIN. TAB. X FACT. U. U. TOTAL. 2 *

ACTIVE LIN. TAB. Y NEG. FLOW TOT. 2
TANK DESCRIPTION
TAB. ACTIVATE

Spre exemplu, parametrul TOT. 1 USER UNIT este afisat numai daca
a fost selectata optiunea "User unit" pentru parametrul TOTALIZER 1 UNIT.
76 Endress+Hauser
SAFETY CONFIRM. DISPLAY OUTPUT TRANSMITTER INFO
HART DATA TRANSMITTER DATA PROCESS CONNECTION SENSOR DATA
SAFETY LOCK MENU DESCRIPTOR OUTPUT CURRENT BUS ADDRESS DEVICE SERIAL No Pmax PROC. CONN. SENSOR SER. NO.
SAFETY PASSWORD MAIN DATA FORMAT CURR. CHARACT. DEVICE TYPE ELECTR. SERIAL No PROC. CONN. TYPE PRESS. SENS LOLIM
DIGIT SETS ALTERNATE DATA OUTPUT FAIL MODE DEVICE REVISION CUST. TAG NUMBER MAT. PROC. CONN. + PRESS. SENS HILIM
2)
CURRENT OUTPUT LANGUAGE ALT. CURR. OUTPUT PREAMBLE NUMBER LONG TAG NUMBER MAT. PROC. CONN. – MINIMUM SPAN
ACK. ALARM MODE DISPLAY CONTRAST SET MAX. ALARM MANUFACTOR ID ADDITIONAL INFO. SEAL TYPE SENSOR MEAS. TYPE
2)
CALIB. OFFSET DIGIT SETS SET MIN. CURRENT HART MESSAGE DEVICE DESIGN. BOLTS MATERIAL Pmin SENS. DAMAGE
3) 2)
MEASURING MODE ASSIGN CURRENT HART DATE HARDWARE REV. NUTS MATERIAL Pmax SENS. DAMAGE
4) 4) 2) 2)
MAX. FLOW LINEAR/SQROOT PRIMARY VALUE IS SOFTWARE VERSION DRAIN VENT MAT. MAT. MEMBRANE
4) 2) 2)
MAX PRESS FLOW PRIMARY VALUE CONFIG RECORDER DRAIN VENT POS. FILLING FLUID
4) 2) 2)
LOW FLOW CUT-OFF SECONDARY VAL. IS PCB TEMPERATURE THREAD Tmin SENSOR
4) 2) 2)
SET L. FLOW CUT-OFF SECONDARY VALUE ALLOWED MIN. TEMP MOUNTING THREAD Tmax SENSOR
2) 2)
SET LRV THIRD VALUE IS ALLOWED MAX. TEMP REMOTE SEAL + SENSOR H/WARE REV.
2) 2)
SET URV THIRD VALUE DIP STATUS REMOTE SEAL –
4) 2) 2)
LINEAR/SQROOT 4TH VALUE IS DIAPHRAGM MAT. +
2) 2)
DAMPING VALUE 4 TH VALUE DIAPHRAGM MAT. –
2)
CONF. PASSWORD NR OF REMOTE SEAL
2)
FILL FLUID
2) Afisare numai prin ToF Tool si

3) Numai mod masurare nivel
4) Numai mod masurare debit
Endress+Hauser 77
PROCESS INFO OPERATION DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESS VALUE PEAK HOLD INDICATOR SIMULATION MESSAGES USER LIMITS
MEASURED VALUE MEASURED VALUE MEASURED VALUE COUNTER:P > Pmax ENTER RESET CODE SIMULATION MODE ALARM STATUS Pmin ALARM WINDOW
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE MAX. MEAS. PRESS. OPERATING HOURS I LAST DIAG. CODE Pmax ALARM WINDOW
CORRECTED PRESS. CORRECTED PRESS. CORRECTED PRESS. COUNTER:P < Pmin INSERT PIN NO ACK. ALARM MODE Tmin ALARM WINDOW
J
SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE MIN. MEAS. PRESS. HistoROM AVAIL. ACK. ALARM * Tmax ALARM WINDOW
SENSOR TEMP. SENSOR TEMP. SENSOR TEMP. COUNTER:T > Tmax HistoROM CONTROL * RESET ALL ALARMS
Afisaj numai prin ToF Tool

MEAS. VAL. TREND MEAS. VAL. TREND MEAS. VAL. TREND MAX. MEAS. TEMP. ERROR NO. sau comunicatorul
manual HART
LEVEL BEFORE LIN * SUPPRESSED FLOW COUNTER:T< Tmin SELECT ALARM TYPE
TANK CONTENT * TOTALIZER 1 MIN. MEAS. TEMP. ALARM DELAY
TOTAL. 1 OVERFLOW PCB COUNT:T > Tmax ALARM DISPL. TIME
TOTALIZER 2 PCB MAX. TEMP.
TOTAL. 2 OVERFLOW PCB COUNT: T< Tmin
PCB MIN. TEMP.
RESET PEAKHOLD
Fara Presiune Debit Nivel Continut rezervor Curent Alarma atentionare

SIM. PRESSURE SIM. FLOW VALUE SIM. LEVEL SIM. TANK CONT. SIM. CURRENT SIM. ERROR NO.
J J J J J J J

78 Endress+Hauser
10.2 Matricea de operare HART Commuwin II

Nota !Note!
Toti parametri sunt afisati prin ToF Tool, comunicatorul manual HART si display-ul local (→
vezi sectiunea 10.1). Commuwin II afiseaza numai parametri listati mai jos.
H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9
V0 Measured Set LRV Set URV Get LRV Get URV Calib. Pos. zero Damping Output fail Press. eng.
Basic value offset adjust value mode unit
setup
V1 Min. meas. Max. meas. Pos. input Sensor Min. meas. Max. PCB PCB min. PCB max. Temp. eng.
Peak hold press. pressure value temp. temp. meas. temp. tempera- temp. temp. unit
indic. ture
V2 Counter: Counter: Safety Counter: Counter: Reset HistoROM HistoROM Table

Transmit- P < Pmin P > Pmax lockstate T < Tmin T > Tmax peakhold avail. control selection
ter info
V3 Measuring Level Measurand Tank Editor Lin. edit Tab. Line-numb X-Val. Y-Val.
Lineari- mode mode content unit table mode activate
sation
V4 Eng. unit Level min./ Level max./ Tank Tank Calibration Empty Empty Full calib. Full
Level level Hydr. press. Hydr. press. content content mode calib. pressure pressure
min. max. min. max.
V5 Unit flow Flow- Max. Max Low flow Set l. fl. cut- Reset Neg. flow Totalizer 1 Totalizer 1
Flow meas. pressure flow cut-off off totalizer 1 tot. 1 unit
type flow
V6 Pmin Alarm Pmax Tmin Tmax Proc. conn. Mat. proc. Mat. proc. Seal type Filling fluid Sensor
Process window Alarm Alarm alarm type conn. + conn. – meas. type
info window window window
V7 Output Set min. Set max. Linear/ Assing Low sensor High sensor Press. sens. Press. sens. Sensor
Output current current alarm sqroot. current trim trim LOLIM HILIM pressure
V8 Simulation Simulated Main line Menu Density Adjust Zero 100% DIP status Damp
Additional mode value format descriptor unit density position point switch
function
V9 Alarm Last diag. Ack. alarm Ack. alarm Alarm Alarm displ. Operating Revision Enter reset Insert PIN
Service status code mode delay time hours count code no
VA Cust. tag Additional Device Sensor ser. Electr. Device Software Cust. unit Flow unit
User number info. serial no no. serial no design. version flow scale
info
10.3 Brevete
Acest produs este protejat cel putin de unul dintre urmatoarele brevete. Mai multe brevete sunt in
asteptare.
• DE 203 11 320 U1
• US 6,631,644 A1 EP 1 299 701 B1
• US 5,670,063 A1 EP 0 516 579 B1
• US 5,539,611 A1
• US 5,050,034 A1 EP 0 445 382 B1
• US 5,097,712 A1 EP 0 420 105 B1
• US 5,050,035 A1 EP 0 414 871 B1
• US 5,005,421 A1 EP 0 351 701 B1
• EP 0 414 871 B1
• US 5,334,344 A1 EP 0 490 807 B1
• US 6,703,943 A1
• US 5,499,539 A1 EP 0 613 552 B1
Endress+Hauser 79
80 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Index
Index
4...20 mA semnal test.... ..................................................... 21 Montarea pe perete/teava ................................. 17
A O
Ajustare pozitie ................................................. 44 Operarea locala . Modul de masurare debit ........ 32
Aplicatii in vacuum ............................................ 16 Operarea locala, Modul de masurare presiune .... 30
B P
Blocarea operarii .............................................. 40 Piese de schimb .................................................. 65
C Pozitia elementelor de operare ............................ 26
Conectarea Commubox FXA 191 .................... 24 Programul de operare ToF Tool ......................... 38
Conectarea comunicatorului manual HART ....... 23 R
Conectarea electrica ......................................... 19 Receptia .............................................................. 8
D Reparare ........................................................... 64
Depozitarea ....................................................... 8 Repararea aparatelor certificate Ex ..................... 64
Detectare defecte ............................................. 55 Reset ................................................................. 41
Display ............................................................. 25 Rotirea carcasei ................................................. 18
Display local ..................................................... 25 S
E Sarcina ............................................................... 22
Ecranare ........................................................... 22 Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului ...... 9
Egalizare potential ............................................. 24 Scopul livrarii ...................................................... 7
Etape de pregatire penru masurarea presiunii dife- Selectare limba ................................................... 43
rentiale ............................................................... 53 Semnal de test 4...20 mA ................................... 21
Etape de pregatire, masurarea debitului .............. 45 Setare fabrica .................................................... 41
Etape de pregatire, masurarea nivelului .............. 48 Specificare cablu ............................................... 21
Eticheta .............................................................. 6 T
F Tensiunea de alimentare ..................................... 21
Functiile elementelor de operare ........................ 27 Z
Functiile elementelor de operare-display local Zone cu pericol de explozie ................................. 4
conectat ............................................................ 29
H
HistoROM/M-Dat ............................................ 35
I
Instalarea pentru masurarea debitului ................... 9
Instalarea pentru masurarea nivelului .................. 10
Instalarea pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale
......................................................................... 14
Instructiuni de instalare diafragme etanse ........... 15
Istoric software ................................................ 73
M
Masurarea debitului .......................................... 46
Masurarea nivelului .......................................... 50
Masurarea presiunii dif. pentru gaze si abur ...... 14
Masurarea presiunii diferentiale .................. 53, 54
Meniu de operare ........................................... 73
Meniul de operare ........................................... 33
Meniul setare rapida pentru masurarea debitului 47
Meniul setare rapida pentru masurarea nivelului .51
Meniul setare rapida pentru masurarea presiunii 54
Mesaje de eroare .............................................. 55
Modul de masurare nivel ................................... 31
Endress+Hauser 81
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 cu HART si 4...20 mA Index
82 Endress+Hauser
"CAJ?P?RGMLMDAMLR?KGL?RGML
$EARCUSTOMER
"ECAUSEOFLEGALDETERMINATIONSANDFORTHESAFETYOFOUREMPLOYEESANDOPERATINGEQUIPMENTWENEEDTHIS $ECLARATIONOF
CONTAMINATION WITHYOURSIGNATUREBEFOREYOURORDERCANBEHANDLED0LEASEINCLUDETHECOMPLETELYFILLEDINDECLARATIONWITHTHE
DEVICEANDTHESHIPPINGDOCUMENTSINANYCASE!DDALSOSAFETYSHEETSANDORSPECIFICHANDLINGINSTRUCTIONSIFNECESSARY
4YPEOFDEVICESENSOR 3ERIALNO
-EDIUMCONCENTRATION 4EMPERATURE 0RESSURE
#LEANEDWITH #ONDUCTIVITY 6ISCOSITY
5?PLGLEFGLRQDMPKCBGSKSQCBMARKTHEAPPROPRIATEHINTS
SAFE
RADIOACTIVE EXPLOSIVE CAUSTIC POISONOUS HARMFULTO BIOLOGICALLY INFLAMMABLE SAFE

HEALTH HAZARDOUS
0C?QMLDMPPCRSPL
!MKN?LWB?R?
#OMPANY #ONTACTPERSON
$EPARTMENT
!DDRESS 0HONE
&AXE MAIL
9OURORDERNO
)HEREBYCERTIFYTHATTHERETURNEDEQUIPMENTHASBEENCLEANEDANDDECONTAMINATEDACCTOGOODINDUSTRIALPRACTICESANDISIN
COMPLIANCEWITHALLREGULATIONS4HISEQUIPMENTPOSESNOHEALTHORSAFETYRISKSDUETOCONTAMINATION
0LACEDATE #OMPANYSTAMPANDLEGALLYBINDINGSIGNATURE
-OREINFORMATIONABOUTSERVICESANDREPAIRS
WWWSERVICESENDRESSCOM
www.endress.com/worldwid
BA270P/00/ro/05.04
52022793
Operating Instructions
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75
Differential pressure measurement
BA270P/00/EN/05.10
71114104
valid from Software version:
02.10.zz
Overview documentation Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
Overview documentation
Device Documentation Content Remarks
Deltabar S Technical Information TI382P Technical data – The documentation can be found on the sup-
4...20 mA HART plied documentation CD.
Operating Instructions BA270P – Identification
– The documentation is also available via the
– Installation Internet. See: www.endress.com
– Wiring
– Operation
– Commissioning, Description of
Quick Setup menus
– Maintenance
– Trouble-shooting and spare parts
– Appendix: Illustration of menu
Operating Instructions BA274P – Examples of configuration for

pressure, level and flow
measurement
– Description of parameters
– Trouble-shooting
– Appendix: Illustration of menu
Brief Operating Instructions KA1018P – Installation – The documentation is supplied with the
– Wiring device.
– Operation on-site
– The documentation can be found on the sup-
– Commissioning
plied documentation CD.
– Description of Quick Setup menus
– The documentation is also available via the
Internet. See: www.endress.com
Leporello KA218P – Wiring – The documentation is supplied with the

– Description of operating elements device. See cover of the terminal
– Operation HistoROM®/M-DAT compartment.
– The documentation can also be found on the
supplied documentation CD.
Functional Safety Manual SD189P – Safety function with Deltabar S – The documentation can be found on the sup-
– Behaviour in operation and failure plied documentation CD.
– Commissioning and iterative tests It applies to the devices showing version "E" in
– Settings feature 100 "Additional options 1" or in
– Technical safety characteristic feature 110 "Additional options 2".
quantities See also Technical Information TI382P,
– Management Summary chapter "Ordering information".
2 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.2 Response of outputs to errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8.3 Confirming messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.4 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . . . 4 8.5 Repair of Ex-certified devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.3 Operational safety and process safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.6 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.4 Notes on safety conventions and icons . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8.7 Returning the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
8.8 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8.9 Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.1 Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.3 CE mark, declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
10 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 10.1 Operating menu for on-site display, FieldCare and HART
handheld terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.1 Incoming acceptance and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 10.2 Patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.4 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1 Connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2 Connecting the measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.3 Potential matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.4 Overvoltage protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.5 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1 On-site display (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.3 On-site operation –
on-site display not connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
on-site display connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.5 HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.6 Operation via HART handheld terminal . . . . . . . . . 46
5.7 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
5.8 Locking/unlocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.9 Factory setting (reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.2 Selecting language and measuring mode . . . . . . . . 50
6.3 Position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.4 Flow measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.5 Level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
6.6 Differential pressure measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8 Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Endress+Hauser 3
Safety instructions Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
1 Safety instructions
1.1 Designated use

The Deltabar S is a differential pressure transmitter for measuring differential pressure, flow and
level.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages resulting from incorrect use or use other than that
designated.
1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation

The device has been designed to operate safely in accordance with current technical, safety and EU
standards. If installed incorrectly or used for applications for which it is not intended, however, it is
possible that application-related dangers may arise, e.g. product overflow due to incorrect
installation or calibration. For this reason, the instrument must be installed, connected, operated
and maintained according to the instructions in this manual: personnel must be authorised and
suitably qualified. The manual must have been read and understood, and the instructions followed.
Modifications and repairs to the device are permissible only when they are expressly approved in
the manual. Pay particular attention to the technical data on the nameplate.
1.3 Operational safety and process safety

Alternative monitoring measures must be taken to ensure operational safety and process safety
durng configuration, testing and maintenance work on the device.
1.3.1 Hazardous areas (optional)

• Devices for use in hazardous areas are fitted with an additional nameplate ( ä 6). If the device
is to be installed in an explosion hazardous area, then the specifications in the certificate as well
as all national and local regulations must be observed. The device is accompanied by separate "Ex
documentation", which is an integral part of this Operating Instructions. The installation
regulations, connection values and Safety Instructions listed in this Ex document must be
observed. The documentation number of the related Safety Instructions is also indicated on the
additional nameplate.
• Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified.
1.3.2 Functional Safety SIL3 (optional)

If using devices for applications with safety integrity, the Functional Safety Manual (SD190P) must
be observed thoroughly.
4 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Safety instructions
1.4 Notes on safety conventions and icons

In order to highlight safety-relevant or alternative operating procedures in the manual, the following
conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding icon in the margin.
Symbol Meaning
#
Warning!
A warning highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, will lead to personal
injury, a safety hazard or destruction of the instrument.
"
Caution!
Caution highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal
injury or incorrect functioning of the instrument.
!
Note!
A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may indirectly affect
operation or may lead to an instrument response which is not planned.
0
Device certified for use in explosion hazardous area
If the device has this symbol embossed on its nameplate, it can be installed in an explosion
hazardous area or a non-explosion hazardous area, according to the approval.
Explosion hazardous area
- Symbol used in drawings to indicate explosion hazardous areas.

– Devices used in hazardous areas must possess an appropriate type of protection.
Safe area (non-explosion hazardous area)
. Symbol used in drawings to indicate, if necessary, non-explosion hazardous areas.

– Devices used in hazardous areas must possess an appropriate type of protection. Lines used in
hazardous areas must meet the necessary safety-related characteristic quantities.
% Direct voltage
A terminal to which or from which a direct current or voltage may be applied or supplied.
&
Alternating voltage
A terminal to which or from which an alternating (sine-wave) current or voltage may be applied
or supplied.
)
Grounded terminal
A grounded terminal, which as far as the operator is concerned, is already grounded by means of
an earth grounding system.
*
Protective grounding (earth) terminal
A terminal which must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connection to the
equipment.
+
Equipotential connection (earth bonding)
A connection made to the plant grounding system which may be of type e.g. neutral star or
equipotential line according to national or company practice.
Safety instruction
For safety instructions refer to the manual for the appropriate instrument version.
Endress+Hauser 5
Identification Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
2 Identification
2.1 Device designation
2.1.1 Nameplate
! Note!
• The MWP (maximum working pressure) is specified on the nameplate. This value refers to a
reference temperature of 20°C (68°F) or 100°F for ANSI flanges.
• The pressure values permitted at higher temperatures can be found in the following standards:
– EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab. 18 1)
– ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2-2.2 F316
– ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2.3.8 N10276
– JIS B 2220
• For PMD70 and PMD75, the MWP applies for the temperature ranges specified in the Technical
Information TI382P in the "Ambient temperature range" and "Process temperature limits"
sections.
• The test pressure corresponds to the over pressure limit (OPL) of the device = MWP x 1.5.
• The Pressure Equipment Directive (EC Directive 97/23/EC) uses the abbreviation "PS". The
abbreviation "PS" corresponds to the MWP (maximum working pressure) of the measuring
device.
1) With regard to their stability-temperature property, the materials 1.4435 and 1.4404 are grouped together under 13EO
in EN 1092-1 Tab. 18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.
Aluminium housing (T14/T15) and stainless steel housing (T14)
R1 55
Deltabar S
Order Code: 1
3
D-79689 Maulburg
Ser.-No.: 2
Made in Germany,
5
23,5
MWP 4 Span 6
P 7
2,5
8 U= 9 12
Mat. 10
11
13 14 14
15
?2,1 -0,1
26
P01-xMDxxxx-18-xx-xx-xx-005
Fig. 1: Nameplate for Deltabar S

1 Order code
See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and digits.
2 Serial number
3 Degree of protection
4 MWP (Maximum working pressure)
5 Symbol: Note: pay particular attention to the data in the "Technical Information"!
6 Minimum/maximum span
7 Nominal measuring range
8 Electronic version (output signal)
9 Supply voltage
10 Wetted materials
11 ID number of notified body with regard to Pressure Equipment Directive (optional)
12 ID number of notified body with regard to ATEX (optional)
13 GL-symbol for GL marine certificate (optional)
14 SIL-symbol for devices with SIL3/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity (optional)
15 Layout identification of the nameplate
6 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Identification
Devices for use in hazardous areas are fitted with an additional nameplate.
1
2
4 5 Dat.: 6
Fig. 2: Additional nameplate for devices for hazardous areas

1 EC type examination certificate number
2 Type of protection e.g. II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4/T6
3 Electrical data
4 Safety Instructions number e.g. XA235P
5 Safety Instructions index e.g. A
6 Device manufacture data
Devices suitable for oxygen applications are fitted with an additional nameplate.
Bei Sauerstoffeinsatz/
for oxygen service
Pmax 1 3
Tmax 2
Fig. 3: Additional nameplate for devices suitable for oxygen applications

1 Maximum pressure for oxygen applications
2 Maximum temperature for oxygen applications
3 Layout identification of the nameplate
Endress+Hauser 7
Identification Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
Hygenic stainless steel housing (T17)
18
Deltabar S 19
20
Made in Germany, D-79689 Maulburg
Order Code:
21
1
Ser.-No.: 2
22
MWP 3 4
Span 5
p 6 23
7 U= 8 24 - 25
Mat.
9
10 Dat.: 26
Bei Sauerstoffeinsatz/for oxygen service:
12 13 14 15 16 Tmax 27 Pmax 28
11
17
Fig. 4: Nameplate for Deltabar S

1 Order code
See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and digits.
2 Serial number
3 MWP (Maximum working pressure)
4 Symbol: Note: pay particular attention to the data in the "Technical Information"!
5 Minimum/Maximum span
7 Electronic version (output signal)
8 Supply voltage
9 Wetted materials
10 Degree of protection
Optional:
11 ID number of notified body with regard to Pressure Equipment Directive
12 ID number of notified body with regard to ATEX
13 3A-symbol
14 CSA-symbol
15 FM-symbol
16 SIL-symbol for devices with SIL3/IEC 61508 Declaration of conformity
17 GL-symbol for GL marine certificate
18 Ex-symbol
19 EC type examination certificate
20 Type of protection e.g. II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4/T6
21 Approval number for WHG overspill protection
22 Temperature operating range for devices for use in hazardous areas
23 Electrical data for devices for use in hazardous areas
24 Safety Instructions number e.g. XA283P
25 Safety Instructions index e.g. A
26 Device manufacture data
27 Maximum temperature for devices suitable for oxygen applications
28 Maximum pressure for devices suitable for oxygen applications
2.1.2 Identifying the sensor type

See parameter "Sensor Meas.Type" in Operating Instruction BA274P. The Operating Instruction
BA274P can be found on the supplied documentation CD.
8 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Identification
2.2 Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery comprises:
• Deltabar S differential pressure transmitter
• For PMD70 and PMD75 with side flanges made of AISI 316L or C22.8: additional 2 vent valves,
AISI 316L
• PMD75 with side flanges made of AISI 316L or C22.8 and side vent: additional 4 locking screws,
AISI 316L
• For devices with the "HistoROM/M-DAT" option:
CD-ROM with Endress+Hauser operating program and documentation
• Optional accessories
Documentation supplied:
• The Operating Instructions BA270P and BA274P, the Technical Information TI382P and the
Safety Instructions, Functional Safety Manual and brochures can be found on the supplied
documentation CD.
See also  ä 2, "Overview documentation" chapter.
• Brief Operating Instructions KA1018P
• Leporello KA218
• Final inspection report
• Also Safety Instructions with ATEX, IECEx and NEPSI devices
• Optional: factory calibration form, test certificates
2.3 CE mark, declaration of conformity

The device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the
factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The device complies with the applicable
standards and regulations as listed in the EC declaration of conformity and thus complies with the
statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms the successful testing of the
device by affixing to it the CE mark.
2.4 Registered trademarks
KALREZ, VITON, TEFLON

Registered trademarks of E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA
TRI-CLAMP
Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA
HART
Registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA.
Endress+Hauser 9
Installation Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
3 Installation
3.1 Incoming acceptance and storage
3.1.1 Incoming acceptance

• Check the packaging and the contents for damage.
• Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your
order.
3.1.2 Storage
The device must be stored in a dry, clean area and protected against damage from impact
(EN 837-2).
Storage temperature range:
• –40 to +90°C (–40 to +194°F)
• On-site display: –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)
• Separate housing: –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F)
3.2 Installation conditions
3.2.1 Dimensions
For dimensions, please refer to the Technical Information for Deltabar S TI382P, "Mechanical
construction" section.  ä 2 "Overview documentation.
3.3 Installation instructions

! Note!
• Due to the orientation of the Deltabar S, there may be a shift in the measured value, i.e. when
the container is empty, the measured value does not display zero. You may correct this zero point
shift either directly on the device using the "E"-key or by remote operation.  ä 34, "Function
of the operating elements – on-site display not connected" or  ä 52, "Position adjustment".
• For FMD77 and FMD78, please refer to  ä 17, Section 3.3.4 "Installation instructions for
devices with diaphragm seals (FMD78)".
• General recommendations for routing the impulse piping can be found in DIN 19210 "Methods
for measurement of fluid flow; differential piping for flow measurement devices" or the
corresponding national or international standards.
• Using a three-valve or five-valve manifold allows for easy commissioning, installation and
maintenance without interrupting the process.
• When routing the impulse piping outdoors, ensure that sufficient anti-freeze protection is used,
e.g. by using pipe heat tracing.
• Install the impulse piping with a monotonic gradient of at least 10%.
• To ensure optimal readability of the on-site display, it is possible to rotate the housing up to 380°.
 ä 22, Section 3.3.9 "Rotating the housing".
• Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing on pipes or walls.  ä 20, Section 3.3.7
"Wall and pipe-mounting (optional)".
10 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Installation
3.3.1 Installation for flow measurement
! Note!
For more information about flow measurement with the Deltabar S differential pressure transmitter
• Deltabar S with orifice plate (TI422P, Deltatop DO6x)
• Deltabar S with Pitot tube (TI425P, Deltatop DP6x)
Flow measurement in gases with PMD70/PMD75
➁
➂
+ – ➃
Fig. 5: Measuring layout for flow measurement in gases with PMD75

1 Deltabar S, here PMD75
2 Three-valve manifold
3 Shut-off valves
4 Orifice plate or pitot tube
• Mount the Deltabar S above the measuring point so that the condensate can run off into the
process piping.
Flow measurement in steam with PMD70/PMD75
➁
➂ ➂
➃
+ –
➄ ➄
➅ ➅
➆
Fig. 6: Measuring layout for flow measurement in steam with PMD75

1 Condensate traps
3 Shut-off valves
5 Separator
6 Drain valves
• Mount the Deltabar S below the measuring point.

• Mount the condensate traps at the same level as the tapping points and at the same distance to
the Deltabar S.
• Prior to commissioning, fill the impulse piping to the height of the condensate traps.
Endress+Hauser 11
Flow measurement in liquids with PMD70/PMD75
➁ ➁
+ ➂ –
➃ ➃
➄ ➄
➅
Fig. 7: Measuring layout for flow measurement in liquids with PMD75

2 Shut-off valves
4 Separator
5 Drain valves
• Mount the Deltabar S below the measuring point so that the impulse piping is always filled with
liquid and gas bubbles can run back into the process piping.
• When measuring in media with solid parts, such as dirty liquids, installing separators and drain
valves is useful for capturing and removing sediment.
3.3.2 Installation for level measurement
Level measurement in an open container with PMD70/PMD75
patm
min. + patm ➀
➃ ➁
➄
➂
Fig. 8: Measuring layout for level measurement in open containers with PMD75
1 The negative side is open to atmospheric pressure
3 Shut-off valve
4 Separator
5 Drain valve
• Mount the Deltabar S below the lower measuring connection so that the impulse piping is always
filled with liquid.
• The negative side is open to atmospheric pressure.
12 Endress+Hauser
Level measurement in an open container with FMD76/FMD77
patm
min.
+ ➀
–
patm
➁
Fig. 9: Measuring layout for level measurement in open containers with FMD76
1 Deltabar S, here FMD76
2 The negative side is open to atmospheric pressure
• Mount the Deltabar S direct on the container.  ä 19, Section 3.3.5 "Seal for flange mounting".
• The negative side is open to atmospheric pressure.
Level measurement in a closed container with PMD70/PMD75
–➀
max.
min. ➀
+
➁
➂ ➂
➃ ➃
➄
Fig. 10: Measuring layout for level measurement in a closed container with PMD75
1 Shut-off valves
2 Deltabar S, PMD75
3 Separator
4 Drain valves
filled with liquid.
• Always connect the impulse piping of negative side above the maximum level.
Endress+Hauser 13
Level measurement in a closed container with FMD76/FMD77
➀
–
max.
min.
➁
+ ➂
➃
Fig. 11: Measuring layout for level measurement in a closed container with FMD76
1 Shut-off valve
2 Separator
3 Drain valve
Level measurement in a closed container with FMD78
–
max.
➀
+
min.
Fig. 12: Measuring layout for level measurement in a closed container with FMD78
• Mount the Deltabar S below the lower diaphragm seal.  ä 17, Section 3.3.4 "Installation
instructions for devices with diaphragm seals (FMD78)".
• The ambient temperature should be the same for both capillaries.
! Note!
Level measurement is only ensured between the upper edge of the lower diaphragm seal and the
lower edge of the upper diaphragm seal.
14 Endress+Hauser
Level measurement in a closed container with superimposed steam with PMD 70/
PMD75
– ➀
max.
➁
min. ➁
+
➂
➃ ➃
➄ ➄
➅
Fig. 13: Measuring layout for level measurement in a container with superimposed steam with PMD75
1 Condensate trap
2 Shut-off valves
4 Separator
5 Drain valves
filled with liquid.
• A condensate trap ensures constant pressure on the negative side.
Level measurement in a closed container with superimposed steam with FMD 76/
FMD77
– ➀
max.
➁
min.
➂
+ ➃
➄
Fig. 14: Measuring layout for level measurement in a container with superimposed steam with FMD76
1 Condensate trap
2 Shut-off valve
3 Separator
4 Drain valve
Endress+Hauser 15
• A condensate trap ensures constant pressure on the negative side.
3.3.3 Installation for differential pressure measurement
Differential pressure measurement in gases and steam with PMD70/PMD75
➁
+
➂ ➂
➃
Fig. 15: Measuring layout for differential pressure measurement in gases and steam with PMD75
3 Shut-off valves
4 e.g. filter
• Mount the Deltabar S above the measuring point so that the condensate can run off into the
process piping.
Differential pressure measurement in liquids with PMD70/PMD75
➀
➁ ➁
+ –
➂
➃ ➃
➄ ➄
➅
Fig. 16: Measuring layout for differential pressure measurement in liquids with PMD75
1 e.g. filter
2 Shut-off valves
4 Separator
5 Drain valves
• Mount the Deltabar S below the measuring point so that the impulse piping is always filled with
liquid and gas bubbles can run back into the process piping.
16 Endress+Hauser
Differential pressure measurement in gases, steam and liquids with FMD78
➀
➁ ➁
+ –
➂
➃
Fig. 17: Measuring layout for differential pressure measurement in gases, steam and liquids with FMD78
1 Diaphragm seal
2 Capillary
3 e.g. filter
• Mount the diaphragm seal with capillaries at the top or on the side on the piping.
• For vacuum applications: mount the Deltabar S below the measuring point.  ä 17,
Section 3.3.4 "Installation instructions for devices with diaphragm seals (FMD78)", "Vacuum
application" part.
• The ambient temperature should be the same for both capillaries.
3.3.4 Installation instructions for devices with diaphragm seals

(FMD78)
! Note!
• The diaphragm seal, together with the pressure transmitter, forms a closed, calibrated system,
which is filled through openings in the diaphragm seal and in the measurement system of the
pressure transmitter. This openings are sealed and must not be opened.
• Do not clean or touch diaphragm seals with hard or pointed objects.
• Do not remove the protection of the process isolating diaphragm until shortly before installation.
• When using a mounting bracket, sufficient strain relief must be ensured for the capillaries in order
to prevent the capillary bending down (bending radius 100 mm (3.94 in)).
• Please note that the hydrostatic pressure of the liquid columns in the capillaries can cause zero
point shift. The zero point shift can be corrected.  ä 52, Section 6.3 "Position adjustment".
• Please note the application limits of the diaphragm seal filling oil as detailed in the Technical
Information for Deltabar S TI382P, Section "Planning instructions for diaphragm seal systems". 
 ä 2 "Overview documentation".
In order to obtain more precise measurement results and to avoid a defect in the device, mount the
capillaries as follows:
• vibration-free (in order to avoid additional pressure fluctuations)
• not in the vicinity of heating or cooling lines
• insulate if the ambient temperature is below ore above the reference temperature
• with a bending radius of 100 mm (3.94 in).
• The ambient temperature and length of both capillaries should be the same when using two-sided
diaphragm seal systems.
• Two diaphragm seals which are the same (e.g. with regard to diameter, material, etc.) should
always be used for the negative and positive side (standard delivery).
Endress+Hauser 17
–
≥ 100 mm
+ –
Fig. 18: Mounting Deltabar S, FMD78 with diaphragm seals and capillary, recommended mounting for vacuum
applications: mount pressure transmitter below the lowest diaphragm seal!
Vacuum application (FMD78)

For applications under vacuum, Endress+Hauser recommends mounting the pressure transmitter
underneath the lower diaphragm seal. A vacuum load of the diaphragm seal caused by the presence
of filling oil in the capillaries is hereby prevented.
When the pressure transmitter is mounted above the lower diaphragm seal, the maximum height
difference H1 in accordance with the illustration below on the left must not be exceeded. The
maximum height difference is dependent on the density of the filling oil and the smallest ever
pressure that is permitted to occur at the diaphragm seal on the positive side (empty container), see
illustration below, on the right.
12.0
Low temperature oil
10.0
Height difference H1 [m]
Vegetable oil
8.0
– Silicone oil
6.0
High temperature
– + oil
4.0
+ –
H1 Inert oil
2.0
+
0.0
50 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Pressure, diaphragm seal positive side [mbarabs]
P01-FMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-001 P01-FMD7xxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-002
Fig. 19: Installation above the lower Fig. 20: Diagram of maximum installation height above the lower
diaphragm seal diaphragm seal for vacuum applications dependent on
the pressure at the diaphragm seal on the positive side
18 Endress+Hauser
3.3.5 Seal for flange mounting
➀ ➁
Fig. 21: Mounting the versions with flange or diaphragm seal

1 Process isolating diaphragm
2 Seal
# Warning!
The seal is not allowed to press on the process isolating diaphragm as this could affect the
measurement result.
3.3.6 Heat insulation – FMD77

The FMD77 must only be insulated up to a certain height. The maximum permitted insulation
height is labelled on the devices and applies to an insulation material with a heat conductivity
 0.04 W/(m x K) and to the maximum permitted ambient and process temperature ( see table
below). The data were determined under the most critical application "quiescent air".
TA λ ≤ 0.04 W
m•K
TP
Fig. 22: Maximum permitted insulation height
FMD77
Ambient temperature (TA)  70°C (158°F)
Process temperature (TP) max. 400°C (752°F), depending on the

diaphragm seal filling oil used ( see
Technical Information TI382P Deltabar S)
Endress+Hauser 19
3.3.7 Wall and pipe-mounting (optional)

Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls. A bracket with
mounting accessories for pipe mounting is included with the device.
! Note!
When using a valve block, the block's dimensions must be taken into account.
37.5
➀
135
74
12 74
4 6
10
Fig. 23: Mounting bracket for wall and pipe mounting

1 Device mounting
Please note the following when mounting:

• Devices with capillary lines: mount capillaries with a bending radius of 100 mm (3.94 in).
• To prevent the mounting screws from scoring, lubricate them with a multi-purpose grease prior
to mounting.
• In the case of pipe mounting, the nuts on the bracket must be tightened uniformly with a torque
of at least 30 Nm (22.13 lbf ft).
20 Endress+Hauser
3.3.8 Assembling and mounting the "separate housing" version
5
7
4
1 r ³ 120 mm
Fig. 24: "Separate housing" version

1 In the "separate housing" version, the sensor is supplied with process connection and cable fitted.
2 Cable with connection jack
4 Plug
5 Locking screw
6 Housing fitted with housing adapter, included
7 Mounting bracket suitable for wall and pipe mounting, included
Assembly and mounting

1. Connect plug (item 4) into the corresponding connection jack of the cable (item 2).
2. Plug the cable into the housing adapter (item 6).
3. Tighten the locking screw (item 5).
4. Mount the housing on a wall or pipe using the mounting bracket (item 7). When mounting
on a pipe, tighten the nuts on the bracket uniformly with a torque of at least 5 Nm (3.69 lbs ft).
Mount the cable with a bending radius (r)  120 mm (4.72 in).
Endress+Hauser 21
3.3.9 Rotating the housing

The housing can be rotated up to 380° by loosening the Allen screw.
max. 380°
Fig. 25: Aligning the housing

– T14 and T15 housing: Loosen setscrew with a 2 mm (0.08 in) Allen key.
Hygenic T17 housing: Loosen setscrew with a 3 mm (0.12 in) Allen key.
– Rotate housing (max. up to 380°).
– Retighten setscrew.
3.3.10 Close cover on a hygenic stainless steel housing (T17)
P01-FMB70xxx-17-xx-xx-xx-001
Fig. 26: Close cover
The covers for the terminal and electronics compartment are hooked into the casing and closed with
a screw. These screws should be finger-tightened (2 Nm (1.48 lbf ft)) to the stop to ensure that the
covers sit tightly.
3.4 Post-installation check

After installing the device, carry out the following checks:
• Are all screws firmly tightened?
• Are the housing covers screwed down tight?
• Are all locking screws and vent valves firmly tightened?
22 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Wiring
4 Wiring
4.1 Connecting the device

! Note!
• When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the
corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or
Control Drawings.
• Devices with integrated overvoltage protection must be earthed.
• Protective circuits against reverse polarity, HF influences and overvoltage peaks are installed.
• The supply voltage must match the supply voltage on the nameplate. ( ä 6, Section 2.1.1
"Nameplate".)
• Switch off the supply voltage before connecting the device.
• Remove housing cover of the terminal compartment.
• Guide cable through the gland. Preferably use twisted, screened two-wire cable.
• Connect device in accordance with the following diagram.
• Screw down housing cover.
• Switch on supply voltage.
➀ ➅ 10.5 V DC
➆ 11.5 V DC
4…20 mA
Test
Test
➁ 4... 20mA Test
➂ ➄
➇
4... 20mA Test
➃
Fig. 27: Electrical connection 4...20 mA HART

Observe also sSection 4.2.1 "Supply voltage",  ä 25,.
1 Housing
2 Jumper for 4...20 mA test signal.
 ä 25, Section 4.2.1 "Taking 4...20 mA test signal" part.
3 Internal earth terminal
4 External earth terminal
5 4...20 mA test signal between plus and test terminal
6 minimum supply voltage = 10.5 V DC, jumper is inserted in accordance with the illustration.
7 minimum supply voltage = 11.5 V DC, jumper is inserted in "Test" position.
8 Devices with integrated overvoltage protection are labelled OVP (overvoltage protection) here.
Endress+Hauser 23
Wiring Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
4.1.1 Connecting devices with Harting plug Han7D
+
+ – 7
– 8 6
1
2 5
Han7D 3 4
+– P01-xxx7xxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-001
Fig. 28: Left: electrical connection for devices with Harting plug Han7D
Right: view of the plug connector at the device
4.1.2 Connecting devices with M12 plug
+ – – +
M12
+– P01-xxx7xxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-000
Fig. 29: Left: electrical connection for devices with M12 plug
Right: view of the plug at the device
24 Endress+Hauser
4.2 Connecting the measuring unit
4.2.1 Supply voltage
! Note!
• All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available upon
request. The Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved for use in
explosion hazardous areas.
• When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the
corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or
Control Drawings.
Electronic version Jumper for 4...20 mA test signal in Jumper for 4...20 mA test signal in
"Test" position (Delivery status) "Non-Test" position
4...20 mA HART, for non-hazardous 11.5...45 V DC 10.5...45 V DC

areas
Taking 4...20 mA test signal

A 4...20 mA signal may be measured via the positive and test terminal without interrupting the
measurement. The minimum supply voltage of the device can be reduced by simply changing the
position of the jumper. As a result, operation is also possible with lower voltage sources. To keep
the measured error below 0.1%, the current measuring device should display an internal resistance
of < 0.7 . Observe the position of the jumper in accordance with the following table.
Jumper position for test signal Description
– Taking 4...20 mA test signal via plus and test terminal:

Test possible. (Thus, the output current can be measured without
interruption via the diode.)
– Delivery status
– minimum supply voltage: 11.5 V DC
– Taking 4...20 mA test signal via plus and test terminal:

Test not possible.
– minimum supply voltage: 10.5 V DC
4.2.2 Cable specification

• Endress+Hauser recommends using twisted, screened two-wire cables.
• Terminals for wire cross-sections 0.5...2.5 mm2 (20 to 14 AWG)
• Cable external diameter: 5...9 mm (0.2 to 0.35 in)
Endress+Hauser 25
4.2.3 Load
➀ RLmax ➁ RLmax
[Ω] [Ω]
Test 1500 Test
1456
1282 1239
847 804
➃ ➃
413
➂ 369
➂
10.5 20 30 40 45 U 11.5 20 30 40 45 U
[V] [V]
U – 10.5 V U – 11.5 V
RLmax ≤ RLmax ≤
23 mA 23 mA
Fig. 30: Load diagram, observe the position of the jumper and the explosion protection ( ä 25, Section 4.2.1
"Taking 4...20 mA test signal".)
1 Jumper for 4...20 mA test signal inserted in "Non-Test" position
2 Jumper for 4...20 mA test signal inserted in "Test" position
3 Supply voltage 10.5 (11.5)...30 V DC for 1/2 G, 1GD, 1/2 GD, FM IS, CSA IS, IECEx ia, NEPSI Ex ia
4 Supply voltage 10.5 (11.5)...45 V DC for device for non-hazardous areas, 1/2 D, 1/3 D, 2 G EEx d,
3 G EEx nA, FM XP, FM DIP, FM NI, CSA XP, CSA Dust Ex, NEPSI Ex d
RLmax Maximum load resistance
U Supply voltage
! Note!
When operating via a handheld terminal or via PC with an operating program, a minimum
communication resistance of 250 must exist within the loop.
4.2.4 Screening/potential matching

• You achieve optimum screening against disturbances if the screening is connected on both sides
(in the cabinet and on the device). If you have to reckon with potential equalisation currents in
the plant, only earth screening on one side, preferably at the transmitter.
• When using in hazardous areas, you must observe the applicable regulations.
Separate Ex documentation with additional technical data and instructions is included with all Ex
systems as standard.
26 Endress+Hauser
4.2.5 Connecting HART handheld terminal

With a HART handheld terminal you can set and check the transmitter and avail of additional
functions all along the 4...20 mA line.
➀ min. 250 Ω
Test
4…20 mA
4... 20mA Test
➂ DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
352 mbar
➁ DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
352 mbar
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
352 mbar
4 SV 0 °C 4 SV 0 °C 4 SV 0 °C
HELP SAVE HELP SAVE HELP SAVE
6 6 6
9 Page
Up 9 Page
Up 9 Page
Up
EX EX
Bksp Delete Bksp Delete Bksp Delete
Page Page Page

On On On
#%& ABC DEF #%& ABC DEF #%& ABC DEF

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Copy Paste Hot Key Copy Paste Hot Key Copy Paste Hot Key
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
Insert + Hot Key Insert + Hot Key Insert + Hot Key
PQRS TUV W XY Z PQRS TUV W XY Z PQRS TUV W XY Z

7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
,()‘ _<> +*/ ,()‘ _<> +*/ ,()‘ _<> +*/
. 0 - . 0 - . 0 -
375 375 375

FIELD COMMUNICATOR FIELD COMMUNICATOR FIELD COMMUNICATOR
Fig. 31: Connecting an HART handheld terminal, e.g. Field Communicator 375
1 Necessary communication resistor  250 
2 HART handheld terminal
3 HART handheld terminal, directly connected to the device even in the Ex i-area
# Warning!
• In the case of Ex d type of protection, do not connect the handheld terminal in the hazardous area.
• Do not replace the battery of the handheld terminal in the hazardous area.
• For devices with FM or CSA certificates, establish electrical connection as per Installation or
Control Drawing (ZD) supplied.
Endress+Hauser 27
4.2.6 Connecting Commubox FXA195 for operation via

FieldCare
Test
4…20 mA
4... 20mA Test
EX EX
Fig. 32: Connecting PC with operating program FieldCare via Commubox FXA195
1 Computer with operating program FieldCare
2 Commubox FXA195
Connecting Commubox FXA195

The Commubox FXA195 connects intrinsically safe transmitters to a computer's USB port using the
HART protocol. This allows remote operation of the measuring transmitter using Endress+Hauser
operating program FieldCare. The Commubox is supplied with power through the USB port. The
Commubox is also suitable for connection to intrinsically safe circuits. See Technical Information
TI237F for further information
28 Endress+Hauser
4.2.7 Connecting Commubox FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291 for

operation via FieldCare
Connecting Commubox FXA291

The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruments with CDI interface (=
Endress+Hauser Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a
notebook. For details refer to TI405C/07/en.
! Note!
For the following Endress+Hauser instruments you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional
accessory:
• Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x
• Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x
• Deltapilot S FMB70
Connecting ToF Adapter FXA291

The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 via the USB interface of a personal
computer or a notebook to the following Endress+Hauser instruments:
For details refer to KA271F/00/a2.
4.3 Potential matching

Ex applications: Connect all devices to the local potential matching.
Observe the applicable regulations.
Endress+Hauser 29
4.4 Overvoltage protection (optional)

Devices showing version "M" in feature 100 "Additional options 1" or feature 110 "Additional
options 2" in the order code are equipped with overvoltage protection (see also Technical
Information TI382P "Ordering information".
• Overvoltage protection:
– Nominal functioning DC voltage: 600 V
– Nominal discharge current: 10 kA
• Surge current check î = 20 kA as per DIN EN 60079-14: 8/20 s satisfied
• Arrester AC current check I = 10 A satisfied
# Warning!
Devices with integrated overvoltage protection must be earthed.
4.5 Post-connection check

Perform the following checks after completing electrical installation of the device:
• Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?
• Is the device connected as per section 4.1?
• Are all screws firmly tightened?
• Are the housing covers screwed down tight?
As soon as voltage is applied to the device, the green LED on the electronic insert lights up for a few
seconds or the connected on-site display lights up.
30 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Operation
5 Operation
Feature 20 "Output; operation" in the order code provides you with information on the operating
options available to you.
Versions in the order code Operation
A 4...20 mA HART; external operation, LCD Via on-site display and 3 keys on the exterior of the device
B 4...20 mA HART; internal operation, LCD Via on-site display and 3 keys on the inside of the device
C 4...20 mA; internal operation Without on-site display, 3 keys on the inside of the device
5.1 On-site display (optional)

A 4-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used for display and operation. The on-site display shows
measured values, dialog texts, fault messages and notice messages.
The display of the device can be turned in 90° steps.
Depending on the installation position of the device, this makes it easy to operate the device and
read the measured values.
Functions:
• 8-digit measured value display including sign and decimal point, bargraph for current display
• simple and complete menu guidance thanks to separation of the parameters into several levels and
groups
• each parameter is given a 3-digit ID number for easy navigation
• option for configuring the display according to individual requirements and desires, such as
language, alternating display, contrast setting, display of other measured values such as sensor
temperature
• comprehensive diagnostic functions (fault and warning message, peak-hold indicators, etc.)
• rapid and safe commissioning with the Quick Setup menus
Measured value display Parameter

Identification
Function name Value number
Header line
Main line
Unit
Information
line
– + E Symbol
Bargraph
Editing modes
Operating keys
Selection
options
Value that
can be edited
Current measured value

Endress+Hauser 31
Operation Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
The following table illustrates the symbols that can appear on the on-site display. Four symbols can
occur at one time.
Symbol Meaning
Alarm symbol
– Symbol flashing: warning, device continues measuring.
– Symbol permanently lit: error, device does not continue measuring.
Note: The alarm symbol may overlie the tendency symbol.
Lock symbol
The operation of the device is locked. Unlock device,  Section 5.8.
Communication symbol
Data transfer via communication
Note: The alarm symbol may overlie the communication symbol.
Square root symbol

Active measuring mode "Flow measurement"
The root flow signal is used for the current output.
Tendency symbol (increasing)

The measured value is increasing.
Tendency symbol (decreasing)

The measured value is decreasing.
Tendency symbol (constant)

The measured value has remained constant over the past few minutes.
32 Endress+Hauser
5.2 Operating elements
5.2.1 Position of operating elements

With regard to aluminium housings (T14/T15) and stainless steel housing (T14), the operating keys
are located either outside the device under the protection cap or inside on the electronic insert. In
hygenic stainless housings (T17), the operating keys are always located inside on the electronic
insert.
➃➄
t ➅
on
➀
➀ ➁
off
➂
1 2
PC
P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-056 P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-104
Fig. 33: Operating keys, external Fig. 34: Operating keys, internal
1 Operating keys on the exterior of the device under 1 Operating keys
the protective flap 2 Slot for optional display
3 Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT
4 DIP-switch for locking/unlocking measured-value-
relevant parameters
5 DIP-switch for damping on/off
6 Green LED to indicate value being accepted
Endress+Hauser 33
5.2.2 Function of the operating elements –

on-site display not connected
Press and hold the key or the key combination for at least 3 seconds to execute the corresponding
function. Press the key combination for at least 6 seconds for a reset.
Operating key(s) Meaning
Adopt lower range value. A reference pressure is present at the device.

 ä 36, Section 5.3.1 "Pressure measuring mode",  ä 37, Section 5.3.2 "Level
measuring mode" or  ä 39, Section 5.3.3 "Flow measuring mode".
Adopt upper range value. A reference pressure is present at the device.

 ä 36, Section 5.3.1 "Pressure measuring mode",  ä 37, Section 5.3.2 "Level
measuring mode" or  ä 39, Section 5.3.3 "Flow measuring mode".
Position adjustment
Reset all parameters. The reset via operating keys corresponds to the software reset code
and and 7864.
Copy the configuration data from the optional HistoROM®/M-DAT module to the device.
and
Copy the configuration data from the device to the optional HistoROM®/M-DAT module.
and
– DIP-switch 1: for locking/unlocking measured-value-relevant parameters

τ on Factory setting: off (unlocked)
– DIP-switch 2: damping on/off,
Factory setting: on (damping on)
1 2 off
34 Endress+Hauser
5.2.3 Function of the operating elements –

on-site display connected
Operating key(s) Meaning
O – Navigate upwards in the picklist

– Edit the numerical values and characters within a function
S – Navigate downwards in the picklist

– Edit the numerical values and characters within a function
F – Confirm entry
– Jump to the next item
Contrast setting of on-site display: darker

O and F
Contrast setting of on-site display: brighter
S and F
ESC functions:
– Exit edit mode without saving the changed value.
– You are in a menu within a function group. The first time you press the keys
simultaneously, you go back a parameter within the function group. Each time you press
O and S the keys simultaneously after that, you go up a level in the menu.
– You are in a menu at a selection level. Each time you press the keys simultaneously, you
go up a level in the menu.
Note: The terms function group, level and selection level are explained in section 5.4.1,
page 40.
Endress+Hauser 35

on-site display not connected
! Note!
To operate the device with a HistoROM®/M-DAT module  ä 42, Section 5.5 "HistoROM®/M-
DAT (optional)".
5.3.1 Pressure measuring mode

If no on-site display is connected, the following functions are possible by means of the three keys
on the electronic insert or on the exterior of the device:
• Position adjustment (zero point correction)
• Setting lower range value and upper range value
• Device reset,  ä 34, Section 5.2.2 "Function of the operating elements – on-site display not
connected", Table.
! Note!
• The operation must be unlocked.  ä 47, Section 5.8 "Locking/unlocking operation".
• The device is configured for the Pressure measuring mode as standard. You can switch measuring
modes by means of the MEASURING MODE parameter.  ä 50, Section 6.2 "Selecting
language and measuring mode".
• The pressure applied must be within the nominal pressure limits of the sensor. See information
on the nameplate.
Carry out position adjustment.1 Setting lower range value. Setting upper range value.
Pressure is present at device. Desired pressure for lower range Desired pressure for upper range
value is present at device. value is present at device.
  
Press "E"-key for 3 s. Press "–"-key for 3 s. Press "+"-key for 3 s.
  
Does the LED on the electronic insert Does the LED on the electronic insert Does the LED on the electronic insert
light up briefly? light up briefly? light up briefly?
Yes No Yes No Yes No
     
Applied pressure Applied pressure Applied pressure Applied pressure Applied pressure Applied pressure
for for position for for for for
position adjustment has lower range value lower range value upper range value upper range value
adjustment has not been has been has not been has been has not been
been accepted. accepted. accepted. accepted. accepted. accepted.
Observe the input Observe the input Observe the input
limits. limits. limits.
1) Observe "Warning" on page 50 in Chapter 6 "Commissioning".
36 Endress+Hauser
5.3.2 Level measuring mode

• Set the lower and upper pressure value and assign to the lower and upper level value
connected", Table.
! Note!
• The "-" and "+"- keys only have a function in the following cases:
– LEVEL SELECTION "Level Easy Pressure", CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"
– LEVEL SELECTION "Level Standard", LEVEL MODE "Linear",
CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"
The keys have no function in other settings.
The following parameters are set to the following values in the factory:
– LEVEL SELECTION: Level Easy Pressure
– CALIBRATION MODE: Wet
– OUTPUT UNIT or LIN. MEASURAND: %
– EMPTY CALIB.: 0.0
– FULL CALIB.: 100.0.
– SET LRV: 0.0 (corresponds to 4 mA value)
– SET URV: 100.0 (corresponds to 20 mA value)
These parameters can only be modified by means of the on-site display or remote operation such
as the FieldCare.
on the nameplate.
•  ä 56, Section 6.5 "Level measurement". For parameter description see Operating Instructions
BA274P.
• LEVEL SELECTION, CALIBRATION MODE, LEVEL MODE, EMPTY CALIB., FULL CALIB, SET
LRV and SET URV are parameter names used for on-site display or remote operation such as
FieldCare for instance.
Endress+Hauser 37
Carry out position adjustment.1 Setting lower pressure value. Setting upper pressure value.
Pressure is present at device. Desired pressure for lower pressure Desired pressure for upper pressure
value (EMPTY PRESSURE2) is present value (FULL PRESSURE1) is present
at device. at device.
  
Press "E"-key for 3 s. Press "–"-key for 3 s. Press "+"-key for 3 s.
  
Does the LED on the electronic insert Does the LED on the electronic insert Does the LED on the electronic insert
light up briefly? light up briefly? light up briefly?
Yes No Yes No Yes No
     
Applied pressure Applied pressure The pressure The pressure The pressure The pressure
for for position present was saved present was not present was saved present was not
position adjustment has as the lower saved as the as the upper saved as the
adjustment has not been pressure value lower pressure pressure value upper pressure
been accepted. accepted. (EMPTY value. Observe (FULL value. Observe
Observe the input PRESSURE1) and the input limits. PRESSURE1) and the input limits.
limits. assigned to the assigned to the
lower level value upper level value
(EMPTY (FULL CALIB.1).
CALIB.1).

2) Parameter name used for the on-site display or remote operation such as the FieldCare.
38 Endress+Hauser
5.3.3 Flow measuring mode

• Set the maximum pressure value and assign it to the maximum flow value
connected", Table.
! Note!
• The "-"- key does not have any function.
on the nameplate.
•  ä 55, Section 6.4.3 "Quick Setup menu for the Flow measuring mode" and Operating
Instructions BA274P, parameter descriptions MAX. PRESS. FLOW, MAX. FLOW, SET LRV –
Flow and LINEAR/SQROOT.
Carry out position adjustment.1 Setting maximum pressure value.
Pressure is present at device. Desired pressure for the maximum

pressure value (MAX. FLOW2) is
present at device.
 
Press "E"-key for 3 s. Press "+"-key for 3 s.
 
Does the LED on the electronic insert Does the LED on the electronic insert
light up briefly? light up briefly?
Yes No Yes No
   
Applied pressure Applied pressure The pressure The pressure

for for position present was saved present was not
position adjustment has as the maximum saved as the
adjustment has not been pressure value maximum
been accepted. accepted. (MAX. PRESS pressure value.
Observe the input FLOW1) and Observe the input
limits. assigned to the limits.
maximum flow
value (MAX.
FLOW.1).

2) Parameter name used for the on-site display or remote operation such as
the FieldCare.
Endress+Hauser 39

on-site display connected
If the on-site display is connected, the three operating keys are used to navigate through the
operating menu,  ä 35, Section 5.2.3 "Function of the operating elements – on-site display
connected".
5.4.1 General structure of the operating menu

The menu is split into four levels. The three upper levels are used to navigate while you use the
bottom level to enter numerical values, select options and save settings. The entire menu is
illustrated in section 10.1 "Menu for on-site display, FieldCare and HART handheld terminal".
The structure of the OPERATING MENU depends on the measuring mode selected, e.g. if the
"Pressure" measuring mode is selected, only the functions necessary for this mode are displayed.
Measured value
GROUP SELECTION
➁
➀ SETTINGS DISPLAY
POSITION ADJUSTMENT BASIC SETUP EXTENDED SETUP
POS. ZERO ADJUST
➂
➃ POS. INPUT VALUE
CALIB. OFFSET
Fig. 35: Structure of the operating menu

1 1. Selection level
2 2. Selection level
3 Function groups
4 Parameter
! Note!
The LANGUAGE and MEASURING MODE parameters are only displayed via the on-site display on
the 1st selection level. In the digital communication, the LANGUAGE parameter is displayed in the
DISPLAY group and the MEASURING MODE parameter is displayed in the QUICK SETUP menus
or in the BASIC SETUP function group.  See also Section 10.1 "Operating menu for on-site
display, FieldCare and HART handheld terminal".
40 Endress+Hauser
5.4.2 Selecting an option

Example: select "English" as the language of the menu.
German is selected as the language. A ✓in front of the

menu text indicates the active option.
Select English with "+" or "–".
1. Confirm your choice with "E". A ✓ in front of the

menu text indicates the active option. (English is now
selected as the menu language.)
2. Jump to the next item with "E".
5.4.3 Editing a value

Example: adjusting DAMPING VALUE function from 2.0 s to 30.0 s.  ä 35, Section 5.2.3
"Function of the operating elements – on-site display connected".
The on-site display shows the parameter to be changed.

The value highlighted in black can be changed. The "s" unit
is fixed and cannot be changed.
1. Press "+" or "–" to get to the editing mode.

2. The first digit is highlighted in black.
1. Use "+" to change "2" to "3".

2. Confirm "3" with "E". The cursor jumps to the next
position (highlighted in black).
The decimal point is highlighted in black, i.e. you can now

edit it.
1. Keep pressing "+" or "–" until "0" is displayed.

2. Confirm "0" with "E".
The cursor jumps to the next position.  is displayed
and is highlighted in black. See next graphic.
Endress+Hauser 41
Use "E" to save the new value and exit the editing mode.
 See next graphic.
The new value for the damping is now 30.0 s.

– Jump to the next parameter with "E".
– You can get back to the editing mode with "+" or
"–".
5.4.4 Taking pressure applied at device as value

Example: configuring upper range value – assign 20 mA to the pressure value 400 mbar.
The bottom line on the on-site display displays the pressure

present, here 400 mbar.
Use "+" or "–" to switch to the "Confirm" option. The active

selection is highlighted in black.
Use "E" to assign the value (400 mbar) to the GET URV
parameter. The device confirms the calibration and jumps
back to the parameter, here GET URV (see next graphic).
Switch to the next parameter with "E".
5.5 HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional)

HistoROM®/M-DAT is a memory module, which is attached to the electronic insert and fulfils the
following functions:
• Back-up copy of configuration data
• Copying configuration data of a transmitter into another transmitter
• Cyclic recording of pressure and sensor-temperature measured values
• Recording diverse events, such as alarms, configuration changes, counters for measuring range
undershooting and exceeding for pressure and temperature, exceeding and undershooting the
user limits for pressure and temperature, etc.
# Warning!
Detach HistoROM®/M-DAT from the electronic insert or attach it to the insert in a deenergised
state only.
42 Endress+Hauser
! Note!
• The HistoROM®/M-DAT module may be retrofitted at any time (Order No.: 52027785).
• The HistoROM data and the data in the device are analysed once a HistoROM®/M-DAT is
attached to the electronic insert and power is reestablished to the device. During the analysis, the
messages "W702, HistoROM data not consistent" and "W706, Configuration in HistoROM and
device not identical" can occur. For measures,  ä 67, Section 8.1 "Messages."
5.5.1 Copying configuration data
➁
on
t
off
➀
1 2
PC
R
HART
250002271-–
FIELD COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
HW-Version: 1
SW-Version: 2
Abb. 36: Electronic insert with optional HistoROM®/M-DAT memory module

1 optional HistoROM®/M-DAT
2 To copy configuration data from the HistoROM®/M-DAT module to a device or from a device to a HistoROM®/
M-DAT,, the operation must be unlocked DIP-switch 1, Position "off" ,parameter INSERT PIN NO. = 100). Observe
page 47, section 5.9 "Locking/unlocking operation".
On-site operation – on-site display not connected

Copying configuration data from a device to a HistoROM®/M-DAT module:
! Note!
The operation must be unlocked.
1. Disconnect device from supply voltage.
2. Attach the HistoROM®/M-DAT module to the electronic insert.
3. Reestablish supply voltage to the device.
4. Press "E" and "-"-keys (for at least 3 seconds) until the LED on the electronic insert lights up.
5. Wait approx. 20 seconds. Configuration data are loaded from the device to the HistoROM®/
M-DAT. The device is not restarted.
6. Disconnect device from the supply voltage again.
7. Detach memory module.
Endress+Hauser 43
Copying configuration data from a HistoROM®/M-DAT to a device:
! Note!
2. Attach the HistoROM®/M-DAT module to the electronic insert. Configuration data from
another device are stored in the HistoROM®/M-DAT.
4. Press "E" und "+"-keys (for at least 3 seconds) until the LED on the electronic insert lights up.
5. Wait approx. 20 seconds. All parameters except DEVICE SERIAL No, DEVICE DESIGN.,
CUST. TAG NUMBER, LONG TAG NUMBER, DESCRIPTION, BUS ADDRESS and the
parameters in the POSITION ADJUSTMENT and PROCESS CONNECTION group are loaded
into the device by HistoROM®/M-DAT. The device is restarted.
6. Before removing the HistoROM®/M-DAT again from the electronic insert, disconnect the
device from supply voltage.
On-site operation via on-site display (optional) or remote operation

Copying configuration data from a device to a HistoROM®/M-DAT:
! Note!
2. Attach the HistoROM®/M-DAT module to the electronic insert.
4. The DOWNLOAD SELECT. parameter setting has no influence on an upload from the device
into HistoROM.
(Menu path: (GROUP SELECTION )OPERATING MENU OPERATION)
5. Using the HistoROM CONTROL parameter select the option "Device HistoROM" as the
data transfer direction.
(Menu path: GROUPSELECTION OPERATING MENU OPERATION)
M-DAT. The device is not restarted.
7. Disconnect device from the supply voltage again.
8. Detach memory module.
44 Endress+Hauser
Copying configuration data from a HistoROM®/M-DAT to a device:
! Note!
2. Attach the HistoROM®/M-DAT module to the electronic insert. Configuration data from
another device are stored in the HistoROM®/M-DAT.
4. Use the DOWNLOAD SELECT parameter to select which parameters are to be overwritten
(Menu path: (GROUPS SELECTION )OPERATING MENU OPERATION).
The following parameters are overwritten according to the selection:

– Configuration copy (factory setting):
all parameters except DEVICE SERIAL No., DEVICE DESIGN, CUST. TAG NUMBER,
LONG TAG NUMBER, DESCRIPTION, BUS ADDRESS and the parameters in the
POSITION ADJUSTMENT, PROCESS CONNECTION, CURR. TRIM (SERVICE /SYSTEM 2),
SENSOR TRIM and SENSOR DATA group.
– Device replacement:
all parameters except DEVICE SERIAL No., DEVICE DESIGN and the parameters in the
POSITION ADJUSTMENT, PROCESS CONNECTION, CURR. TRIM (SERVICE/SYSTEM 2),
SENSOR TRIM and SENSOR DATA group.
– Electronics replace:
all parameters except the parameters in the CURR. TRIM (SERVICE/SYSTEM 2), POSITION
ADJUSTMENT and SENSOR DATA group.
Factory setting: Configuration copy
5. Using the HistoROM CONTROL parameter select the option "HistoROM Device" as the
data transfer direction.
(Menu path: GROUP SELECTION OPERATING MENU OPERATION)
M-DAT. The device is restarted.
7. Before removing the HistoROM®/M-DAT again from the electronic insert, disconnect the
device from supply voltage.
Endress+Hauser 45
5.6 Operation via HART handheld terminal

Use the HART handheld terminal to set all parameters all the way along the 4...20 mA cable via
menu operation.
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * * ONLINE
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
➀
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU 2 OPERATING MENU Delete
3 PV 352 mbar
4 SV 0 °C 3 PV 352 mbar
4 SV 0 °C
HELP SAVE
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
6
9
HELP SAVE
Page OPERATING MENU
Up
➁
1 SETTINGS
Bksp Delete 2 DISPLAY Delete
3 OUTPUT
Page 4 TRANSMITTER INFO
On Bksp 5 PROCESS INFO
➂
#%& ABC DEF
1 2 3
Copy
GHI
Paste
JKL
Hot Key
MNO
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
4 5 6 SAVE HOME DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *

Insert + Hot Key
SETTINGS
PQRS TUV W XY Z
1 POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Page
7 8 9
2 BASIC SETUP Up
,()‘ _<> +*/ 3 EXTENDED SETUP
. 0 - 4 LINEARISATION
Bksp 5 TOTALIZER SETUP Page
On
375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR
SAVE HOME
Fig. 37: HART handheld terminal, here e.g. Field Communicator 375 and menu guidance
1 LC display with menu text
2 Keys for menu selection
3 Keys for parameter entry
! Note!
•  ä 27, Section 4.2.5 "Connecting HART handheld terminal".
• For further information, please refer to the Operating Instructions for the handheld terminal. The
Operating Instructions are supplied with the handheld terminal.
5.7 FieldCare
FieldCare is an FDT-based system asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. With FieldCare,
you can configure all Endress+Hauser devices as well as devices from other manufacturers that
support the FDT standard. The following operating systems are supported: WinNT4.0, Win2000
and Windows XP.
FieldCare supports the following functions:
• Configuration of transmitters in online operation
• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)
• HistoROM®/M-DAT analysis
• Documentation of the measuring point
Connection options:
• HART via Commubox FXA195 and the USB interface of a computer
• HART via Fieldgate FXA520
! Note!
•  ä 28, Section 4.2.6 "Connecting Commubox FXA195 for operation via FieldCare".
• Further information on the FieldCare can be found on the Internet (http://www.endress.com,
Download Search for: FieldCare).
46 Endress+Hauser
5.8 Locking/unlocking operation

Once you have entered all the parameters, you can lock your entries against unauthorised and
undesired access.
You have the following possibilities for locking/unlocking the operation:
• Via a DIP-switch on the electronic insert, locally on the display.
• Via the on-site display (optional)
• Via digital communication.
The -symbol on the on-site display indicates that operation is locked. Parameters which refer to
how the display appears, e.g. LANGUAGE and DISPLAY CONTRAST can still be altered.
! Note!
• If operation is locked by means of the DIP-switch, you can only unlock operation again by means
of the DIP-switch. If operation is locked by means of the on-site display or remote operation e.g.
FieldCare, you can only unlock operation again by means of the on-site display or remote
operation.
The table provides an overview of the locking functions:
Locking via View/read Modify/write via1 Unlocking via

parameter
On-site Remote DIP-switch On-site Remote
display operation display operation
DIP-switch Yes No No Yes No No
On-site display Yes No No No Yes Yes
Remote operation Yes No No No Yes Yes
1) Parameters which refer to how the display appears, e.g. LANGUAGE and DISPLAY CONTRAST can still be altered.
5.8.1 Locking/unlocking operation locally via DIP-switch

Damping [t]
Damping [t]
➀
➁ ➂
on on
1 2
1 2 1 2 PC
off off
HART
R
250002271-–
FIELD COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
HW-Version: 1
SW-Version: 2
– + E
Fig. 38: DIP-switch position "Hardware locking" on the electronic insert

1 If necessary, remove on-site display (optional)
2 DIP-switch is at "on": operation is locked.
3 DIP-switch is at "off": operation is unlocked (operation possible)
Endress+Hauser 47
5.8.2 Locking/unlocking operation via on-site display or remote

operation
Description
Locking operation 1. Select INSERT PIN NO. parameter,

Menu path: OPERATING MENU OPERATION INSERT PIN NO.
2. To lock operation, enter a number for this parameter between 0...9999 that is 100.
Unlocking operation 1. Select INSERT PIN NO. parameter.

2. To unlock operation, enter "100" for the parameter.
5.9 Factory setting (reset)

By entering a certain code, you can completely, or partially, reset the entries for the parameters to
the factory settings. (For factory settings refer to the Operating Instructions BA274P "Cerabar S/
Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of device functions".  ä 2, "Overview documentation".)
Enter the code by means of the ENTER RESET CODE parameter (Menu path: (GROUP SELECTION
) OPERATING MENU OPERATING).
There are various reset codes for the device. The following table illustrates which parameters are
reset by the particular reset codes. Operation must be unlocked to reset parameters ( ä 48,
Section 5.9).
! Note!
Any customer-specific configuration carried out by the factory is not affected by a reset (customer-
specific configuration remains). If, after a reset, you wish the parameters to be reset to the factory
settings, please contact Endress+Hauser Service.
Reset code Description and effect

1846 Display reset
– This reset resets all parameters which have to do with how the display appears (DISPLAY
group).
– Any simulation which may be running is ended.
– The device is restarted.
62 PowerUp reset (warm start)

– This reset resets all the parameters in the RAM. Data are read back anew from the
EEPROM (processor is initialised again).
2710 Measuring mode level reset

– Depending on the settings for the LEVEL MODE, LIN MEASURAND,
LINdMEASURAND or COMB. MEASURAND parameters, the parameters needed for
this measuring task will be reset.
Example LEVEL MODE = linear and LIN. MEASURAND = Height
• HEIGHT UNIT = m
• CALIBRATION MODE = wet
• EMPTY CALIB. = 0
• FULL CALIB. = Sensor end value converted to mH2O, e.g. 5.99 mH2O for a 500 mbar
(7,5 psi) sensor
333 User reset

– Affects the following parameters:
– Function group POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Function group BASIC SETUP, except for the customer-specific units
– Function group EXTENDED SETUP
– Function group TOTALIZER SETUP
– Group OUTPUT
– Function group HART DATA: BUS ADDRESS and PREAMBLE NUMBER
48 Endress+Hauser
Reset code Description and effect
7864 Total reset

– Affects the following parameters:
– Function group POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Function group BASIC SETUP
– Function group EXTENDED SETUP
– Function group LINEARISATION (an existing linearisation table is erased)
– Function group TOTALIZER SETUP
– Group OUTPUT
– Function group PEAK HOLD INDICATOR
– Function group HART DATA
– All configurable messages ("Error" type) are set to factory setting.
 ä 67, Section 8.1 "Messages" and page  ä 75, Section 8.2 "Response of outputs
to errors".
– Function group USER LIMITS
– Function group SYSTEM 2
8888 HistoROM reset

The measured value memory and event memory are cleared. During the reset, the
HistoROM must be attached to the electronic insert.
Endress+Hauser 49
Commissioning Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
6 Commissioning
# Warning!
• If a pressure smaller than the minimum permitted pressure is present at the device, the messages
"E120 Sensor low pressure" and "E727 Sensor pressure error - overrange" are output in
succession.
• If a pressure greater than the maximum permitted pressure is present at the device, the messages
"E115 Sensor overpressure" and "E727 Sensor pressure error - overrange" are output in
succession.
• Messages E727, E115 and E120 are "Error"-type messages and can be configured as a "Warning"
or an "Alarm". These messages are configured as "Warning" messages at the factory. This setting
prevents the current output from assuming the set alarm current value for applications (e.g.
cascade measurement) where the user is consciously aware of the fact that the sensor range can
be exceeded
• We recommend setting messages E727, E115 and E120 to "Alarm" in the following instances:
– The sensor range does not have to be exceeded for the measuring application.
– Position adjustment has to be carried out that has to correct a large measured error as a result
of the orientation of the device (e.g. devices with a diaphragm seal).
! Note!
The device is configured for the Pressure measuring mode as standard. The measuring range and
the unit in which the measured value is transmitted correspond to the specifications on the
nameplate.
6.1 Function check

Carry out a post-installation and a post-connection check as per the checklist before commissioning
the device.
• "Post-installation check" checklist see Section 3.4
• "Post-connection check" checklist see Section 4.5
6.2 Selecting language and measuring mode
6.2.1 On-site operation

The LANGUAGE and MEASURING MODE parameters are located on the top menu level. See
also  ä 40, Section 5.4.1 "General structure of the operating menu".
The following languages are available:
• Deutsch
• English
• Français
• Italiano
• Español
• Nederlands
• Chinese (CHS)
• Japanese (JPN)
The following measuring modes are available:
• Pressure
• Level
• Flow
50 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Commissioning
6.2.2 Digital communication

The MEASURING MODE parameter is displayed in the digital communication in the QUICK
SETUP menus and in the BASIC SETUP function group (OPERATING MENU SETTINGS 
BASIC SETUP).
The following measuring modes are available:
• Pressure
• Level
• Flow
The LANGUAGE parameter is arranged in the DISPLAY group (OPERATING MENU DISPLAY).
• Use the LANGUAGE parameter to select the menu language for the on-site display.
• Select the menu language for FieldCare by means of the "Language Button" in the configuration
window. Select the menu language for the FieldCare frame via the "Extra" menu "Options" 
"Display" "Language".
The following languages are available:
• Deutsch
• English
• Français
• Italiano
• Español
• Nederlands
• Chinese (CHS)
• Japanese (JPN)
Endress+Hauser 51
6.3 Position adjustment

Due to the orientation of the device, there may be a shift in the measured value, i.e. when the
container is empty or partly filled, the measured value parameter does not display zero. There are
three options to choose from when performing position adjustment.
(Menu path: (GROUP SELECTION ) OPERATING MENU SETTINGS POSITION
ADJUSTMENT)
Parameter name Description
POS. ZERO ADJUST (685) Position adjustment – the pressure difference between zero (set point) and the measured
Entry pressure need not be known.
Example:
– MEASURED VALUE = 2.2 mbar (0,032 psi)
– Correct the MEASURED VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the
"Confirm" option. This means that you are assigning the value 0.0 to the pressure
present.
– MEASURED VALUE (after pos. zero adjust) = 0.0 mbar
– The current value is also corrected.
The CALIB. OFFSET parameter displays the resulting pressure difference (offset) by which
the MEASURED VALUE was corrected.
Factory setting:
0.0
POS. INPUT VALUE (563) Position adjustment – the pressure difference between zero (set point) and the measured
Entry pressure need not be known. To correct the pressure difference, you need a reference
measurement value (e. g. from a reference device).
Example:
– For the POS. INPUT VALUE parameter, specify the desired set point for the
MEASURED VALUE, e.g. 2.0 mbar (0,029 psi).
(MEASURED VALUEnew = POS. INPUT VALUE)
– MEASURED VALUE (after entry for POS. INPUT VALUE) = 2.0 mbar (0,029 psi)
– The CALIB. OFFSET parameter displays the resulting pressure difference (offset) by
which the MEASURED VALUE was corrected.
CALIB. OFFSET = MEASURED VALUEold – POS. INPUT VALUE,
here: CALIB. OFFSET = 0.5 mbar (0,0073 psi) – 2.0 mbar (0,029 psi) = – 1.5 mbar
(0,022 psi))
Factory setting:
0.0
CALIB. OFFSET (319) Position adjustment – the pressure difference between zero (set point) and the measured
Entry pressure is known.
Example:
– Via the CALIB. OFFSET parameter, enter the value by which the MEASURED VALUE
should be corrected. To correct the MEASURED VALUE to 0.0 mbar, you must enter
the value 2.2 here.
(MEASURED VALUE new = MEASURED VALUEold – CALIB. OFFSET)
– MEASURED VALUE (after entry for calib. offset) = 0.0 mbar
Factory setting:
0.0
52 Endress+Hauser
6.4 Flow measurement
6.4.1 Preparatory steps
! Note!
• The Deltabar S PMD70 or PMD75 is usually used for flow measurement.
• Before calibrating the Deltabar S, the impulse piping must be cleaned and filled with fluid. See
the following table.
Valves Meaning Preferred installation
1 Close 3.
2 Fill measuring system with fluid. 6 7

Open A, B, 2, 4. Fluid flows in. I
3 Clean impulse piping if necessary1: + –

– by blowing out with compressed air in the case of gases
II 3
– by rinsing out in the case of liquids.
Close 2 and 4. Block off device. 2 4
Open 1 and 5. Blow out/rinse out impulse + –

piping. A B
Close 1 and 5. Close valves after cleaning.
4 Vent device.
Open 2 and 4. Introduce fluid.
Close 4. Close negative side.
Open 3. Balance positive and negative

side.
A B
Open 6 and 7 briefly, then Fill device completely with
6 7
close them again. fluid and remove air. + I
5 Carry out pos. zero adjustment if the following conditions are
met. If the conditions are not met, then do not carry out the III III
+ –
pos. zero adjustment until after step 6.  ä 55, II
3
Section 6.4.3 and  ä 52, Section 6.3.
Conditions: 2 4
1 5
– The process cannot be blocked off.
– The tapping points (A and B) are at the same geodetic
height. P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-002
6 Set measuring point in operation. Fig. 39: Above: preferred installation for gases
Below: preferred installation for liquids
Close 3. Shut off positive side from
negative side. I Deltabar S, PMD70 or PMD75
II Three-valve manifold
Open 4. Connect negative side. Separator
1, 5 Drain valves
Now
2, 4 Inlet valves
– 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7 are closed.
3 Equalising valve
– 2 and 4 are open.
6, 7 Vent valves on Deltabar S
– A and B open (if present).
A, B Shut-off valves
7 Carry out pos. zero adjustment if the flow can be blocked off.
In this case, step 5 is not applicable.
 ä 55, Section 6.4.3 and  ä 52, Section 6.3
8 Carry out calibration.  ä 54, Section 6.4.2.
1) for arrangement with 5 valves
Endress+Hauser 53
6.4.2 Information on flow measurement

In the "Flow" measuring mode, the device determines a volume or mass flow value from the
differential pressure measured. The differential pressure is generated by means of primary elements
such as pitot tubes or orifice plates and depends on the volume or mass flow. Four flow measuring
modes are available: volume flow, norm volume flow (European norm conditions), standard volume
flow (American standard conditions) and mass flow.
In addition, the Deltabar S software is equipped with two totalizers as standard. The totalizers add
up the volume or the mass flow. The counting function and the unit can be set separately for both
totalizers. The first totalizer (totalizer 1) can be reset to zero at any time while the second
(totalizer 2) totalises the flow from commissioning onwards and cannot be reset.
! Note!
• There is a Quick Setup menu for each of the measuring modes Pressure, Level and Flow which
guides you through the most important basic functions. With the setting in the MEASURING
MODE parameter, you specify which Quick Setup menu should be displayed. See also
 ä 50, Section 6.2 "Selecting language and measuring mode".
• For a detailed description of the parameters see the Operating Instructions BA274P "Cerabar S/
Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of device functions"
– Table 6, POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Table 12, BASIC SETUP
– Table 17, EXTENDED SETUP
– Table 20, TOTALIZER SETUP.
See also  ä 2, section "Overview documentation".
• For flow measurement, select the "Flow" option by means of the MEASURING MODE parameter.
The operating menu is structured appropriately. Section 10.1.
54 Endress+Hauser
6.4.3 Quick Setup menu for the Flow measuring mode
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
2)
MEASURING MODE
Pressure Level Flow
POS. ZERO ADJUST
MAX FLOW
MAX. PRESS. FLOW

1) Display via on-site display only
2) Display via ToF Tool, FieldCare and
HART handheld terminal only DAMPING VALUE
Fig. 40: Quick Setup menu for the Flow measuring mode
On-site operation Digital communication

Measured value display Measured value display
On-site display: Switch from the measured value display Select QUICK SETUP menu.
to GROUP SELECTION with F.
Select MEASURING MODE. Select "Flow" option.
MEASURING MODE
Select "Flow" option.
GROUP SELECTION
Select QUICK SETUP menu.

Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in Due to orientation of the device, there may be a shift in
the measured value. You correct the MEASURED the measured value. You correct the MEASURED
VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the VALUE via the POS. ZERO ADJUST parameter with the
"Confirm" option, i. e. you assign the value 0.0 to the "Confirm" option, i. e. you assign the value 0.0 to the
pressure present. pressure present.
MAX. FLOW MAX. FLOW

Enter maximum flow of primary device. (See also Enter maximum flow of primary device. (See also
layout sheet of primary device). layout sheet of primary device).
MAX. PRESS FLOW MAX. PRESS FLOW
Enter maximum pressure of primary device. Enter maximum pressure of primary device.
(See also layout sheet of primary device). (See also layout sheet of primary device).
Enter damping time (time constant ). The damping Enter damping time (time constant ). The damping
affects the speed at which all subsequent elements, such affects the speed at which all subsequent elements, such
as the on-site display, measured value and current as the on-site display, measured value and current
output react to a change in the pressure. output react to a change in the pressure.
! Note!
For on-site operation,  ä 35, Section 5.2.3 "Function of the operating elements – on-site display
connected" and  ä 40, Section 5.4 "On-site operation – on-site display connected".
Endress+Hauser 55
6.5 Level measurement
Open container
! Note!
• The Deltabar S PMD70, PMD75, FMD76 and FMD77 are suitable for level measurement in an
open container.
• FMD76 and FMD77: the device is ready for calibration immediately after opening a shut-off valve
(may or may not be present).
• PMD70 and PMD75: before calibrating the device, the impulse piping must be cleaned and filled
with fluid. See the following table.
Valves Meaning Installation
1 Fill container to a level above the lower tap.

2 Fill measuring system with fluid.
Open A. Open shut-off valve.
3 Vent device. +
Open 6 briefly, then close it Fill device completely with 6
again. fluid and remove air. II I
4 Set measuring point in operation.

B + – patm
Now
– B and 6 are closed. A
– A is open.
Carry out calibration.  ä 59, Section 6.5.2.

5
Fig. 41: Open container
I Deltabar S, PMD70 or PMD75
II Separator
6 Vent valves on Deltabar S
A Shut-off valve
B Drain valve
56 Endress+Hauser
Closed container
! Note!
• All Deltabar S versions are suitable for level measurement in closed containers.
• FMD76 and FMD77: the device is ready for calibration immediately after opening the shut-off
valves (may or may not be present).
• FMD78: the device is ready for calibration immediately.

B
negative side.
Open A and B. Open shut-off valves. + A

3 Vent positive side (empty negative side if necessary).
Open 2 and 4. Introduce fluid on positive 6 7

side. I
Open 6 and 7 briefly, then Fill positive side completely
close them again. with fluid and remove air. + –
II
4 Set measuring point in operation. III 3 III
Now 2 4
– 3, 6 and 7 are closed.
1 5
– 2, 4, A and B are open.
5 Carry out calibration.  ä 59, Section 6.5.2. P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-004
Fig. 42: Closed container

I Deltabar S, PMD70 and PMD75
III Separator
1, 2 Drain valves
2, 4 Inlet valves
3 Equalising valve
6, 7 Vent valve on Deltabar S
A, B Shut-off valve
Endress+Hauser 57
Closed container with superimposed steam
! Note!
• All Deltabar S versions are suitable for level measurement in containers with superimposed steam.
• FMD76 and FMD77: the device is ready for calibration immediately after opening the shut-off
valves (may or may not be present).
Open A and B. Open shut-off valves.
B
Fill the negative impulse piping to the level of the condensate
trap. + A
3 Vent device.
Open 2 and 4. Introduce fluid. 6 7

Close 4. Close negative side. I
Open 3. Balance positive and negative + –

side. II
III 3 III
close them again. fluid and remove air. 2 4
4 Set measuring point in operation. 1 5

negative side.
Fig. 43: Closed container with superimposed
Open 4. Connect negative side. steam
Now I Deltabar S, PMD70 and PMD75
– 3, 6 and 7 are closed. II Three-valve manifold
– 2, 4, A and B are open. III Separator
1, 5 Drain valves
5 Carry out calibration.  ä 59, Section 6.5.2.
2, 4 Inlet valves
3 Equalising valve
A, B Shut-off valves
58 Endress+Hauser
6.5.2 Information on level measurement
! Note!
• The Flow, Level and Pressure operating modes each have a quick setup menu which guides you
through the most important basic functions.  ä 61 for the "Level" quick setup menu.
• Furthermore, the three level modes "Level Easy Pressure", "Level Easy Height" and "Level
Standard" are available to you for level measurement. You can select from the "Linear", "Pressure
linearized" and "Height linearized" level types for the "Level Standard" level mode. The table in
the "Overview of level measurement" section below provides an overview of the various
measuring tasks.
– In the "Level Easy Pressure" and "Level Easy Height" level modes, the values entered are not
tested as extensively as in the "Level Standard" level mode. The values entered for EMPTY
CALIB./FULL CALIB., EMPTY PRESSURE/FULL PRESSURE, EMPTY HEIGHT/FULL
HEIGHT and SET LRV/SET URV must have a minimum interval of 1% for the "Level Easy
Pressure" and "Level Easy Height" level modes. The value will be rejected with a warning
message if the values are too close together. Further limit values are not checked; i.e. the values
entered must be appropriate for the sensor and the measuring task so that the measuring device
can measure correctly.
– The "Level Easy Pressure" and "Level Easy Height" level modes encompass fewer parameters
than the "Level Standard" mode and are used for quick and easy configuration of a level
application.
– Customer-specific units of fill level, volume and mass or a linearization table may only be
entered in the "Level Standard" level mode.
– Where the device is intended for use as a subsystem in a safety function (SIL), a "Device
configuration with enhanced parameter security" (SAFETY CONFIRM.) is only possible for the
"Level" operating mode in the "Level Easy Pressure" level mode. All parameters previously
entered are checked after a password is entered. Once the "Level Easy Height" or "Level
Standard" has been selected, the configuration will first have to be reset to the ex-works setting
using the RESET parameter (menu path: (GROUP SELECTION ) OPERATING MENU 
OPERATION) using the reset code "7864". For further information see the Deltabar S
(SD189P) Functional Safety Manual.
• See the Operating Instructions BA274P "Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of device
functions". See also  ä 2, "Overview documentation" section.
Endress+Hauser 59
6.5.3 Overview of level measurement
Measuring task LEVEL Measured Description Comment Measured value

SELECTION/ variable options display
LEVEL MODE
The measured variable is LEVEL SELECTION: Via OUTPUT UNIT – Calibration with reference – Incorrect entries are The measured value
in direct proportion to the Level Easy Pressure parameter: %, level, pressure – wet calibration, possible display and the LEVEL
measured pressure. volume or mass see Operating Instructions – SIL mode possible BEFORE LIN parameter
Calibration is performed units. BA274P. – Customised units are show the measured value.
by entering two pressure- – Calibration without not possible
level value pairs. reference pressure – dry
calibration, see Operating
Instructions BA274P.
The measured variable is LEVEL SELECTION: Via OUTPUT UNIT – Calibration with reference – Incorrect entries are The measured value
in direct proportion to the Level Easy Height parameter: %, level, pressure – wet calibration, possible display and the LEVEL
measured pressure. volume or mass see Operating Instructions – SIL mode not possible BEFORE LIN parameter
Calibration is performed units. BA274P. – Customised units are show the measured value.
by entering the density – Calibration without not possible
and two height-level value reference pressure – dry
pairs. calibration, see Operating
The measured variable is LEVEL SELECTION: Via LIN. – Calibration with reference – Incorrect entries are The measured value
in direct proportion to the Level standard/ MEASURAND pressure – wet calibration, rejected by the device display and the LEVEL
measured pressure. LEVEL MODE: parameter: see Operating Instructions – SIL mode not possible BEFORE LIN parameter
Linear – % (level) BA274P. – Customised level, show the measured value.
– Level – Calibration without volume and mass units
– Volume reference pressure – dry are possible
– Mass calibration, see Operating
The measured variable is LEVEL SELECTION: Via LINd. – Calibration with reference – Incorrect entries are The measured value
not in direct proportion to Level standard/ MEASURAND pressure: semiautomatic rejected by the device display and the
the measured pressure as, LEVEL MODE: parameter: entry of linearisation table, – SIL mode not possible TANK CONTENT
for example, with Pressure linearized – Pressure + % see Operating Instructions – Customised level, parameter show the
containers with a conical – Pressure + volume BA274P. volume and mass units measured value.
outlet. A linearisation table – Pressure + mass – Calibration without are possible
must be entered for the reference pressure: manual
calibration. entry of linearisation table,
see Operating Instructions
BA274P.
– Two measured variables LEVEL SELECTION: Via COMB. – Calibration with reference – Incorrect entries are The measured value
are required or Level standard/ MEASURAND pressure: wet calibration rejected by the device display and the
– The container shape is LEVEL MODE: parameter: and semiautomatic entry of – SIL mode not possible TANK CONTENT
given by value pairs, Height linearized – Height + volume linearisation table, see – Customised level, parameter show the 2nd
such as height and – Height + mass Operating Instructions volume and mass units measured value (volume,
volume. – Height + % BA274P. are possible mass or %).
The 1st measured variable – %-Height + – Calibration without
volume reference pressure: dry The LEVEL BEFORE LIN
%-height or height must be
– %-Height + mass calibration and manual parameter displays the 1st
in direct proportion to the
measured pressure. The – %-Height + % entry of linearisation table, measured value (%-height
see Operating Instructions or height).
2nd measured variable
BA274P.
volume, mass or % need
not to be in direct
proportion to the
measured pressure. A
linearisation table must be
entered for the 2nd
measured variable. The
2nd measured variable is
assigned to the 1st
measured variable by
means of this table.
60 Endress+Hauser
6.5.4 Quick Setup menu for Level measuring mode
! Note!
• Some parameters are only displayed if other parameters are appropriately configured. For
example, the EMPTY CALIB. parameter is only displayed in the following cases:
– LEVEL SELECTION "Level Easy Pressure" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"
– LEVEL SELECTION "Level Standard", LEVEL MODE "Linear" and
CALIBRATION MODE "WET"
You can find the LEVEL MODE parameter in the BASIC SETTINGS function group (menu path:
(GROUP SELECTION )OPERATING MENU SETTINGS BASIC SETTINGS).
• The following parameters are set to the following values in the factory:
– LEVEL SELETION: Level Easy Pressure
– CALIBRATION MODE: Wet
– OUTPUT UNIT or LIN. MEASURAND: %
– EMPTY CALIB.: 0.0
– FULL CALIB.: 100.0
– SET LRV (BASIC SETTINGS group): 0.0 (corresponds to 4 mA value)
– SET URV (BASIC SETTINGS group): 100.0 (corresponds to 20 mA value).
• The quick setup is suitable for simple and quick commissioning. If you wish to make more
complex settings, e.g. change the unit from "%" to "m", you will have to calibrate using the BASIC
SETTINGS group.  See Operating Instructions BA274P or  ä 2, "Overview documentation"
section.
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
2)
LEVEL SELECTION
MEASURING MODE
Pressure Level Flow
LEVEL SELECTION
POS. ZERO ADJUST

3)
2) Display via FieldCare and
EMPTY CALIB.
HART handheld terminal only
3)
3) – LEVEL SELECTION "Level Easy Pressure" and
FULL CALIB.
CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"
– LEVEL SELECTION = "Level Standard",
LEVEL MODE = "Linear" and
DAMPING VALUE
CALIBRATION MODE = "Wet"
Abb. 44: Quick Setup menu for the Level measuring mode


Select MEASURING MODE. Select "Level" option.
MEASURING MODE
Select "Level" option.
LEVEL SELECTION LEVEL SELECTION

Select level mode. For an overview  ä 60. Select level mode. For an overview  ä 60.
GROUP SELECTION
Endress+Hauser 61

EMPTY CALIB. 1 EMPTY CALIB. 1

Enter level for the lower calibration point. Enter level for the lower calibration point.
For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned
to the pressure present at the device. to the pressure present at the device.
FULL CALIB. 1 FULL CALIB. 1

Enter level for the upper calibration point. Enter level for the upper calibration point.
For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned For this parameter, enter a level value which is assigned
to the pressure present at the device. to the pressure present at the device.

1) – LEVEL SELECTION "Level Easy Pressure" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"

– LEVEL SELECTION "Level Standard", LEVEL MODE "Linear" and CALIBRATION MODE "Wet"
! Note!
62 Endress+Hauser
6.6 Differential pressure measurement
! Note!
• The Deltabar S PMD70, PMD75 and FMD78 are usually used for differential pressure
measurement.
Valves Meaning Preferred installation
1 Close 3.
2 Fill measuring system with fluid. 6 7

Open A, B, 2, 4. Fluid flows in. I
3 Clean impulse piping if necessary:1 + –

– by blowing out with compressed air in the case of gases
II 3
– by rinsing out in the case of liquids.
Close 2 and 4. Block off device. 2 4
Open 1 and 5. Blow out/rinse out impulse + –

piping. A B
Close 1 and 5. Close valves after cleaning.
4 Vent device.
Open 2 and 4. Introduce fluid.
Close 4. Close negative side.
Open 3. Balance positive and negative

side.
A B
6 7
close them again. fluid and remove air. + I
5 Set measuring point in operation.
III + – III
II
negative side. 3
Open 4. Connect negative side. 2 4

1 5
Now
– 1, 3, 5, 6 and 7 are closed.
– 2 and 4 are open. P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-002
– A and B open (if present). Fig. 45: Above: preferred installation for gases
Below: preferred installation for liquids
6 Carry out calibration if necessary.  ä 64, Section 6.6.2.
I Deltabar S, PMD70 or PMD75
III Separator
1, 5 Drain valves
2, 4 Inlet valves
3 Equalising valve
A, B Shut-off valve
1) for arrangement with 5 valves
Endress+Hauser 63
6.6.2 Information on differential pressure measurement
! Note!
• There is a Quick Setup menu for each of the measuring modes Pressure, Level and Flow which
guides you through the most important basic functions. With the setting in the MEASURING
MODE parameter, you specify which Quick Setup menu should be displayed.  ä 50,
Section 6.2 "Selecting language and measuring mode".
• For a detailed description of the parameters see the Operating Instructions BA274P "Cerabar S/
Deltabar S/Deltapilot S, Description of device functions"
– Table 6, POSITION ADJUSTMENT
– Table 7, BASIC SETUP
– Table 15, EXTENDED SETUP
• For differential pressure measurement, select the "Pressure" option by means of the MEASURING
MODE parameter. The operating menu is structured appropriately. See also Section 10.1.
6.6.3 Quick Setup menu for Pressure measuring mode
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
2)
MEASURING MODE
Pressure Level Flow

POS. ZERO ADJUST
SET LRV
1) Display via on-site display only SET URV

HART handheld terminal only DAMPING VALUE
Fig. 46: Quick Setup menu for Pressure measuring mode


Select MEASURING MODE. Select "Pressure" option.
MEASURING MODE
Select "Pressure" option.
GROUP SELECTION

SET LRV SET LRV

Set the measuring range (enter 4 mA value). Set the measuring range (enter 4 mA value).
Specify a pressure value for the lower current value Specify a pressure value for the lower current value
(4 mA value). A reference pressure does not have to be (4 mA value). A reference pressure does not have to be
present at the device. present at the device.
64 Endress+Hauser
SET URV SET URV

Set the measuring range (enter 20 mA value). Set the measuring range (enter 20 mA value).
The pressure for the upper current value (20 mA value) The pressure for the upper current value (20 mA value)
is present at device. With the "Confirm" option, you is present at device. With the "Confirm" option, you
assign the upper current value to the pressure value assign the upper current value to the pressure value
present. present.

! Note!
Endress+Hauser 65
Maintenance Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
7 Maintenance
Deltabar S requires no maintenance.
7.1 Exterior cleaning

Please note the following points when cleaning the device:
• The cleaning agents used should not attack the surface and the seals.
• Mechanical damage to the process isolating diaphragm, e.g. due to pointed objects, must be
avoided.
• Observe degree of protection. See therefor nameplate if necessary ( ä 6).
66 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Trouble-shooting
8 Trouble-shooting
8.1 Messages
The following table lists all the possible messages that can occur.
The device differentiates between the error types "Alarm", "Warning" and "Error". You may specify
whether the instrument should react as if for an "Alarm" or "Warning" for "Error" messages.
See "Error type/NA 64" column and Section 8.2 "Response of outputs to errors".
In addition, the "Error type/NA 64" column classifies the messages in accordance with NAMUR
Recommendation NA 64:
• Break down: indicated with "B"
• Maintenance need: indicated with "C" (check request)
• Function check: indicated with "I" (in service)
Error message display on the on-site display:
• The measured value display shows the message with the highest priority. See "Priority"
column.
• The ALARM STATUS parameter shows all the messages present in descending order of priority.
You can scroll through all the messages present with the S-key or O-key.
Message display via digial communication:
• The ALARM STATUS parameter shows the message with the highest priority.  See "Priority"
column.
! Note!
• If the device detects a defect in the on-site display during initialization, special error messages are
generated. For the error messages,  ä 74, Section 8.1.1 "On-site display error messages".
• For support and further information, please contact Endress+Hauser Service.
• See also Section 8.4 ff.
Code Error type/ Message/description Cause Measure Priority

NA 64
101 (A101) Alarm B>Sensor electronic EEPROM – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Wait a few minutes. 17
B error than specifications in the technical – Restart the device. Perform reset
data. (See Section 9.) This (Code 62).
message normally only appears – Block off electromagnetic effects or
briefly. eliminate source of disturbance.
– Sensor defect. – Replace sensor.
102 (W102) Warning C>Checksum error in EEPROM: – Main electronics defect. Correct – Replace main electronics. 53
C peakhold segment measurement can continue as long
as you do not need the peak hold
indicator function.
106 (W106) Warning C>Downloading - please wait – Downloading. – Wait for download to complete. 52
C
110 (A110) Alarm B>Checksum error in EEPROM: – The supply voltage is disconnected – Reestablish supply voltage. Perform 6
B configuration segment when writing. reset (Code 7864) if necessary.
Carry out calibration again.
– Electromagnetic effects are greater – Block off electromagnetic effects or

than specifications in the technical eliminate sources of disturbance.
data.
(See Section 9.)
– Main electronics defect. – Replace main electronics.
113 (A113) Alarm B>ROM failure in transmitter – Main electronics defect. – Replace main electronics. 1
B electronic
Endress+Hauser 67
Trouble-shooting Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART

NA 64
115 (E115) Error B>Sensor overpressure – Overpressure present. – Reduce pressure until message 29
B disappears.
factory
setting:
Warning
116 (W116) Warning C>Download error, repeat – The file is defect. – Use another file. 36
C download
– During the download, the data are – Check cable connection PC –
not correctly transmitted to the transmitter.
processor, e.g. because of open cable – Block off electromagnetic effects or
connections, spikes (ripple) on the eliminate sources of disturbance.
supply voltage or electromagnetic – Perform reset (Code 7864) and carry
effects. out calibration again.
– Repeat download.
120 (E120) Error B>Sensor low pressure – Pressure too low. – Increase pressure until message 30
B disappears.
factory
setting: – Sensor defect. – Replace sensor.
Warning
121 (A121) Alarm B>Checksum error in factory – Main electronics defect. – Replace main electronics. 5
B segment of EEPROM
122 (A122) Alarm B>Sensor not connected – Cable connection sensor –main – Check cable connection and repair if 13
B electronics disconnected. necessary.
– Electromagnetic effects are greater – Block off electromagnetic effects or

than specifications in the technical eliminate source of disturbance.
data.
130 (A130) Alarm B>EEPROM is defect. – Main electronics defect. – Replace main electronics. 10
B
131 (A131) Alarm B>Checksum error in EEPROM: – Main electronics defect. – Replace main electronics. 9
B min/max segment
132 (A132) Alarm B>Checksum error in totalizer – Main electronics defect. – Replace main electronics. 7
B EEPROM
133 (A133) Alarm B>Checksum error in History – An error occurred when writing. – Perform reset (Code 7864) and carry 8
B EEPROM out calibration again.
– Main electronics defect. – Replace electronics.
602 (W602) Warning C>Linearisation curve not – The linearisation table is not – Add to linearisation table or perform 57
C monotone monotonic increasing or decreasing. linearisation again.
604 (W604) Warning C>Linearisation table not valid. – The linearisation table consists of – Add to linearisation table. If 58
C Less than 2 points or points too less than 2 points. necessary, perform linearisation
close again.
– At least 2 points in the linearisation – Correct linearisation table and

table are too close together. A accept again.
minimum gap of 0.5 % of the
distance between two points must
be maintained.
Spans for the "Pressure linearized"
option: HYDR. PRESS MAX. –
HYDR. PRESS MIN.; TANK
CONTENT MAX. – TANK
CONTENT MIN.
Spans for the "Height linearized"
option: LEVEL MAX – LEVEL MIN;
TANK CONTENT MAX. – TANK
CONTENT MIN.
613 (W613) Warning I>Simulation is active – Simulation is switched on, i.e. the – Switch off simulation. 60
I device is not measuring at present.
68 Endress+Hauser

NA 64
620 (E620) Error C>Current output out of range The current is outside the permitted – Check pressure applied, reconfigure 49
C range 3.8 to 20.5 mA. measuring range if necessary (See
Factory also Operating Instructions BA274P
– The pressure applied is outside the
setting: set measuring range (but within the or these Operating Instructions
Warning  ä 2.)
sensor range).
– Perform reset (Code 7864) and carry
out calibration again.
– Loose connection at sensor cable – Wait a short period of time and
tighten the connection, or avoid
loose connection.
700 (W700) Warning C>Last configuration not stored – An error occurred when writing or – Perform reset (Code 7864) and carry 54
C reading configuration data or the out calibration again.
power supply was disconnected.
701 (W701) Warning C>Measuring chain config. – The calibration carried out would – Carry out calibration again. 50
C exceeds sensor range result in the sensor nominal
operating range being undershot or
overshot.
702 (W702) Warning C>HistoROM data not consistent. – Data were not written correctly to – Repeat upload. 55
C the HistoROM, e.g. if the HistoROM – Perform reset (Code 7864) and carry
was detached during the writing out calibration again.
process.
– HistoROM does not have any data. – Copy suitable data to the HistoROM.
(See also  ä 43, Section 5.5.1
"Copying configuration data".)
703 (A703) Alarm B>Measurement error – Fault in the main electronics. – Briefly disconnect device from the 22
B power supply.
B power supply.
B power supply.
706 (W706) Warning C>Configuration in HistoROM – Configuration (parameters) in the – Copy data from the device to the 59
C and device not identical HistoROM and in the device is not HistoROM. (See also  ä 43,
identical. Section 5.5.1 "Copying
configuration data".)
– Copy data from the HistoROM to
the device. (See also  ä 43,
Section 5.5.1 "Copying
configuration data".) The message
remains if the HistoROM and the
device have different software
versions. The message goes out if
you copy the data from the device to
the HistoROM.
– Device reset codes such as 7864 do
not have any effect on the
HistoROM. That means that if you
do a reset, the configurations in the
HistoROM and in the device may
not be the same.
707 (A707) Alarm B>X-VAL. of lin. table out of edit – At least one X-VALUE in the – Carry out calibration again. (See 38
B limits. linearisation table is either below the also Operating Instructions BA274P
value for HYDR. PRESS MIN. or or these Operating Instructions
MIN. LEVEL or above the value for  ä 2.)
HYDR. PRESS. MAX. or LEVEL
MAX.
Endress+Hauser 69

NA 64
710 (W710) Warning B>Set span too small. Not – Values for calibration (e.g. lower – Adjust calibration to suit sensor. 51
C allowed. range value and upper range value) (See also Operating Instructions
are too close together. BA274P, parameter description
MINIMUM SPAN or these
Operating Instructions  ä 2.)
– The sensor was replaced and the – Adjust calibration to suit sensor.
customer-specific configuration does – Replace sensor with a suitable
not suit the sensor. sensor.
– Unsuitable download carried out. – Check configuration and perform

download again.
711 (A711) Alarm B>LRV or URV out of edit limits – Lower range value and/or upper – Reconfigure lower range value and/ 37
B range value undershoot or overshoot or upper range value to suit the
the sensor range limits. sensor. Pay attention to position
factor.
– The sensor was replaced and the – Reconfigure lower range value and/
customer-specific configuration does or upper range value to suit the
not suit the sensor. sensor. Pay attention to position
factor.
– Replace sensor with a suitable
sensor.

download again.
713 (A713) Alarm B>100% POINT level out of edit – The sensor was replaced. – Carry out calibration again. 39
B limits
715 (E715) Error C>Sensor over temperature – The temperature measured in the – Reduce process temperature/ 32
C sensor is greater than the upper ambient temperature.
Factory nominal temperature of the sensor.
setting: (See also Operating Instructions
Warning BA274P, parameter description
Tmax SENSOR or these Operating
Instructions  ä 2.)

download again.
716 (E716) Error B>process isolating diaphragm – Sensor defect. – Replace sensor. 24
B broken – PMD70, FMD76: Overpressure is – Reduce pressure.
Factory present at minus or plus side of the
setting: device (on-sided overpressure)
Alarm
717 (E717) Error C>Transmitter over temperature – The temperature measured in the – Reduce ambient temperature. 34
C electronics is greater than the upper
Factory nominal temperature of the
setting: electronics (+88 °C (+190 °F)).
Warning
download again.
718 (E718) Error C>Transmitter under temperature – The temperature measured in the – Increase ambient temperature. 35
C electronics is smaller than the lower Insulate device if necessary.
Factory nominal temperature of the
setting: electronics (–43 °C (-45 °F)).
Warning
download again.
719 (A719) Alarm B>Y-VAL of lin. table out of edit – At least on Y-VALUE in the – Carry out calibration again. (See 40
B limits linearisation table is below the MIN. also Operating Instructions BA274P
TANK CONTANT or above the or these Operating Instruction
MAX. TANK CONTENT.  ä 2.)
70 Endress+Hauser

NA 64
720 (E720) Error C>Sensor under temperature – The temperature measured in the – Increase process temperature/ 33
C sensor is smaller than the lower ambient temperature.
Factory nominal temperature of the sensor.
setting: ( See also Operating Instructions
Warning BA274P, parameter description
Tmin SENSOR or Operating

download again.

loose connection.
721 (A721) Alarm B>ZERO POSITION level out of – LEVEL MIN or LEVEL MAX has – Perform reset (Code 2710) and carry 41
B edit limits been changed. out calibration again.
722 (A722) Alarm B>EMPTY CALIB. or FULL – LEVEL MIN or LEVEL MAX has – Perform reset (Code 2710) and carry 42
B CALIB. out of edit limits been changed. out calibration again.
723 (A723) Alarm B>MAX. FLOW out of edit limits – FLOW-MEAS. TYPE has been – Carry out calibration again. 43
B changed.
725 (A725) Alarm B>Sensor connection error, cycle – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Block off electromagnetic effects or 25
B disturbance than specifications in the technical eliminate source of disturbance.
data.
– Sensor or main electronics defect. – Replace sensor or main electronics.
726 (E726) Error C>Sensor temperature error - – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Block off electromagnetic effects or 31
C overrange than specifications in the technical eliminate source of disturbance.
Factory data.
setting: (See Section 9.)
Warning
– Process temperature is outside – Check temperature present, reduce
permitted range. or increase if necessary.
– Sensor defect. – If the process temperature is within

the permitted range, replace sensor.
727 (E727) Error C>Sensor pressure error - – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Block off electromagnetic effects or 28
C overrange than specifications in the technical eliminate source of disturbance.
Factory data.
setting: (See Section 9.)
Warning
– Pressure is outside permitted range. – Check pressure present, reduce or
increase if necessary.
– Sensor defect. – If the pressure is within the

permitted range, replace sensor.
728 (A728) Alarm B>RAM error – Fault in the main electronics. – Briefly disconnect device from the 2
B power supply.
B power supply.
Endress+Hauser 71

NA 64
730 (E730) Error C>LRV user limits exceeded – Pressure measured value has – Check system/pressure measured 46
C undershot the value specified for the value.
Factory Pmin ALARM WINDOW parameter. – Change value for Pmin ALARM
setting: WINDOW if necessary. (See also
Warning Operating Instructions BA274P,
parameter description Pmin ALARM
WINDOW or these Operating
Instruction  ä 2.)

loose connection.
731 (E731) Error C>URV user limits exceeded – Pressure measured value has – Check system/pressure measured 45
C overshot the value specified for the value.
Factory Pmax ALARM WINDOW – Change value for Pmax ALARM
setting: parameter. WINDOW if necessary. (See also
parameter description Pmax ALARM
732 (E732) Error C>LRV Temp. User limits – Temperature measured value has – Check system/temperature 48
C exceeded undershot the value specified for the measured value.
Factory Tmin ALARM WINDOW parameter. – Change value for Tmin ALARM
setting: WINDOW if necessary. (See also
parameter description Tmin ALARM

loose connection.
733 (E733) Error C>URV Temp. User limits – Temperature measured value has – Check system/temperature 47
C exceeded overshot the value specified for the measured value.
Factory Tmax ALARM WINDOW – Change value for Tmax ALARM
setting: parameter. WINDOW if necessary. (See also
parameter description Tmax
ALARM WINDOW or these
Operating Instructions  ä 2.)
B power supply.
B power supply.
B power supply.
B power supply.
72 Endress+Hauser

NA 64
740 (E740) Error C>Calculation overflow, bad – Level measuring mode: the – Check configuration and carry out 27
C configuration measured pressure has undershot calibration again if necessary.
Factory the value for HYDR. PRESS. MIN. or – Select a device with a suitable
setting: overshot the value for HYDR. PRESS measuring range.
Warning MAX.
– Level measuring mode: The – Check configuration and carry out

measured level did not reach the calibration again if necessary.
LEVEL MIN value or exceeded the (See also Operating Instructions
LEVEL MAX value. BA274P, parameter description
LEVEL MIN. these Operating
– Flow measuring mode: the – Check configuration and carry out

measured pressure has undershot calibration again if necessary.
the value for MAX. PRESS FLOW. – Select a device with a suitable
measuring range.
741 (A741) Alarm B>TANK HEIGHT out of edit – LEVEL MIN or LEVEL MAX has – Perform reset (Code 2710) and carry 44
B limits been changed. out calibration again.
742 (A742) Alarm B>Sensor connection error – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Wait a few minutes. 18
B (upload) than specifications in the technical – Perform reset (Code 7864) and carry
data. (See Section 9.) This out calibration again.
message normally only appears
briefly.
– Cable connection sensor –main – Check cable connection and repair if

electronics disconnected. necessary.
743 (E743) Alarm B>Electronic PCB error during – This message normally only appears – Wait a few minutes. 14
B initialisation briefly. – Restart the device. Perform reset
(Code 62).

744 (A744) Alarm B>Main electronic PCB error – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Restart the device. Perform reset 11
B than specifications in the technical (Code 62).
data. – Block off electromagnetic effects or
(See Section 9.) eliminate source of disturbance.
745 (W745) Warning C>Sensor data unknown – Sensor does not suit the device – Replace sensor with a suitable 56
C (electronic sensor nameplate). sensor.
Device continues measuring.
746 (W746) Warning C>Sensor connection error - – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Wait a few minutes. 26
C initialising than specifications in the technical – Restart the device. Perform reset
data. (See Section 9.) This (Code 7864).
message normally only appears – Block off electromagnetic effects or
briefly. eliminate source of disturbance.
– Overpressure or low pressure – Reduce or increase pressure.

present.
747 (A747) Alarm B>Sensor software not compatible – Sensor does not suit the device – Replace sensor with a suitable 16
B to electronics (electronic sensor nameplate). sensor.
748 (A748) Alarm B>Memory failure in signal – Electromagnetic effects are greater – Block off electromagnetic effects or 15
B processor than specifications in the technical eliminate source of disturbance.
data.
(See Section 9.)
Endress+Hauser 73
8.1.1 On-site display error messages

If the device detects a defect in the on-site display during initialization, the following error messages
can be displayed:
Message Measure
Initialization, VU Electr. Defect A110 Exchange on-site display.
Initialization, VU Electr. Defect A114
Initialization, VU Electr. Defect A281
Initialization, VU Checksum Err. A110
74 Endress+Hauser
8.2 Response of outputs to errors

The device differentiates between the error types Alarm, Warning and Error.
 See the following table and  ä 67, Section 8.1 "Messages".
Output A (Alarm) W (Warning) E (Error: Alarm/Warning)
Current output Assumes the value specified via the Device continues measuring. For this error, you can enter whether the
OUTPUT FAIL MODE1, ALT. CURR. device should react as in the event of an
OUTPUT1 and SET MAX. ALARM1 alarm or as in the event of a warning. See
parameter. See also the following corresponding "Alarm" or "Warning"
section "Configuring current output for an column. (See also Operating Instructions
alarm". BA274P, parameter description SELECT
ALARM TYPE or these Operating
Bargraph The bargraph adopts the value defined by The bargraph adopts the value which  See this table, "Alarm" or "Warning"
(on-site display) the OUTPUT FAIL MODE 1 parameter. corresponds to the current value. column, depending on selection.
On-site display – The measured value and message are – The measured value and message are – The measured value and message are
displayed alternately displayed alternately displayed alternately
– Measured value display: -symbol is – Measured value display: -symbol – Measured value display: see
permanently displayed. flashes. corresponding "Alarm" or "Warning"
column
Message display Message display: Message display:

– 3-digit number such as A122 and – 3-digit number such as W613 and – 3-digit number such as E731 and
description description description
Remote operation In the case of an alarm, the In the case of a warning, the ALARM In the case of an error, the
(digital communication) ALARM STATUS2 parameter displays a 3- STATUS2 parameter displays a 3-digit ALARM STATUS2 parameter displays a 3-
digit number such as 122 for "Sensor not number such as 613 for "Simulation is digit number such as 731 for "URV user
connected". active". limits exceeded".
1) Menu path: (GROUP SELECTION ) OPERATING MENU  OUTPUT

2) Menu path: (GROUP SELECTION ) OPERATING MENU MESSAGES
Endress+Hauser 75
8.2.1 Configuring current output for an alarm

You can configure the current output for the event of an alarm by means of the OUTPUT FAIL
MODE, ALT. CURR. OUTPUT and SET MAX. ALARM parameters. The parameters are displayed
in the OUTPUT group (menu path: (GROUP SELECTION )OPERATING MENU OUTPUT).
In the event of an alarm, the current and the bargraph assume the value entered with the OUTPUT
FAIL MODE parameter.
I
max.
➀ 21...23 mA
min.
➂ 3.6 mA
t
P01-xxxxxxxx-05
Fig. 47: Current output in the event of an alarm

Options:
1 Max. alarm (110%): can be set between 21...23 mA via the SET MAX. ALARM parameter
2 Hold meas. value: last measured value is kept
3 Min. alarm (–10%): 3.6 mA
Factory setting:
• OUTPUT FAIL MODE: Max. Alarm (110%)
• SET MAX. ALARM: 22 mA
Use the ALT. CURR. OUTPUT parameter to set the current output value for the error messages E
120 "Sensor low pressure" and E 115 "Sensor overpressure". You have the following options:
– Normal: the current output assumes the value set via the OUTPUT FAIL MODE and SET MAX.
ALARM parameters.
– NAMUR
– Lower sensor limit undershot (E 120 "Sensor low pressure"): 3.6 mA
– Upper sensor limit overshot (E 115 "Sensor overpressure") overshot: current output assumes
the value set via the SET MAX ALARM parameter.
Factory setting:
• ALT. CURR. OUTPUT: normal
76 Endress+Hauser
8.3 Confirming messages

Depending on the settings for the ALARM DISPL. TIME and ACK. ALARM MODE parameters, the
following measures should be taken to clear a message:
Settings 1 Measures
– ALARM DISPL. TIME = 0 s – Rectify cause of the message (see also Section 8.1).
– ACK. ALARM MODE = off
– ALARM DISPL. TIME > 0 s – Rectify cause of the message (see also Section 8.1).
– ACK. ALARM MODE = off – Wait for the alarm display time to elapse.
– ALARM DISPL. TIME = 0 s – Rectify cause of the message (see also Section 8.1).
– ACK. ALARM MODE = on – Confirm message using ACK. ALARM parameter.
– ALARM DISPL. TIME > 0 s – Rectify cause of the message (see also Section 8.1).
– ACK. ALARM MODE = on – Confirm message using ACK. ALARM parameter.
– Wait for the alarm display time to elapse. If a message appears and the alarm
display time elapses before the message has been acknowledged, the message
will be cleared once it has been acknowledged.
1) Menu path for ALARM DISPL. TIME and ACK. ALARM MODE: (GROUP SELECTION) OPERATING MENU 
DIAGNOSTICS MESSAGES
If the on-site display displays a message, you can suppress it with the F-key.
If there are several messages, the on-site display shows the message which has the highest priority
(see also Section 8.1). Once you have suppressed this message using the F-key, the message with
the next highest priority is displayed. You can use the F-key to suppress each message, one after
the other.
The ALARM STATUS parameter continues to display all the messages present.
Endress+Hauser 77
8.4 Repair
The Endress+Hauser repairs concept provides for measuring devices to have a modular design and
also the customer may carry out repairs ( ä 79, Section 8.6 "Spare Parts").
! Note!
• For certified devices, please consult Chapter "Repair of Ex-certified devices".
• For more information on service and spare parts contact the Endress+Hauser Service. ( See
www.endress.com/worldwide)
8.5 Repair of Ex-certified devices

# Warning!
When repairing Ex-certified devices, please note the following:
• Only specialist personnel or Endress+Hauser may undertake repairs of certified devices.
• Relevant standards, national hazardous area regulations and Safety Instructions and Certificates
must be observed.
• Only genuine Endress+Hauser spare parts may be used.
• When ordering spare parts, please check the device designation on the nameplate. Identical parts
may only be used as replacements.
• Electronic inserts or sensors already in use in a standard instrument may not be used as spare parts
for a certified device.
• Carry out repairs according to the instructions. After repairs, the device must fulfil the
requirements of the specified individual tests.
• A certified device may only be converted into another certified variant by Endress+Hauser.
• All repairs and modifications must be documented.
78 Endress+Hauser
8.6 Spare Parts

An overview of the spare parts for your device is available in the internet at www.endress.com.
To obtain information on the spare parts, proceed as follows:
1. Go to "www.endress.com" and select your country.
2. Click "Instruments".
3. Enter the product name into the "product name" field.
4. Select the device.

5. Click the "Accessories/Spare parts" tab.
6. Select the required spare parts (You may also use the overview drawing on the right side of the
screen.)
When ordering spare parts, always quote the serial number indicated on the nameplate. As far as
necessary, the spare parts also include replacement instructions.
Endress+Hauser 79
8.7 Returning the device

Before you send in a device for repairs or checking:
• Remove all signs of fluids, paying particular attention to seal grooves and gaps in which fluid can
become lodged. This is especially important if the fluid is hazardous to health. Please refer also to
the "Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination".
Please enclose the following when returning the device:
• Please fill out completely and sign the "Declaration of Hazardous Material and
De-Contamination".
It is only then possible for Endress+Hauser to inspect or repair the returned device.
• The chemical and physical properties of the fluid.
• A description of the application.
• A description of the error which occurred.
• Special instructions on handling, if necessary, e.g. safety data sheet as per
EN 91/155/EEC.
8.8 Disposal
When disposing, separate and recycle the device components based on the materials.
80 Endress+Hauser
8.9 Software history
Date Software Changes software Documentation

version
CD-ROM Operating Description of
Instructions Instrument Functions
11.2003 01.00.zz Original software. — BA270P/00/EN/10.03 —

52020515
Compatible with:
– ToF Tool Field Tool Package, version 1.04.00 or higher
– Commuwin II version 2.08.-1, Update G or higher
– HART Communicator DXR375 with Device Rev.: 10,
DD Rev.: 1
06.2004 02.00.zz – Number of parameters in the Quick Setup menus has — BA270P/00/EN/05.04 BA274P/00/EN/05.04
been reduced. 52022793 52021469
– On-site operation: LANGUAGE and MEASURING
MODE parameters have been moved to the top level.
– New SAFETY CONFIRM. group implemented for SIL.
See also SD189P Safety Manual Deltabar S.
– MEASURING MODE "Level", LEVEL MODE "Linear":
AREA UNIT and TANK SECTION parameters have
been replaced with the TANK VOLUME and TANK
HEIGHT parameters.
– Function of the UNIT FLOW parameter has been split
across four parameters.
– Function of the SIMULATED VALUE parameter has
been split across six parameters.
– SENSOR TRIM and CURRENT TRIM groups have been
removed.
– Sensor adapt reset, code 1209 and sensor calibration
reset, code 2509 have been removed.
– Quick Setup menus are available via ToF Tool.
Compatible with:
– ToF Tool Field Tool Package version 2.00.00 or higher
– Commuwin II version 2.08.-1, Update > G
DD Rev.: 1
06.2005 02.01.zz – Operating keys also integrated on the optional on-site — BA270P/00/EN/06.05 BA274P/00/EN/05.04
display. 71000109 52021469
– Chinese and Japanese are available as the menu
language on request. — BA270P/00/EN/11.05 BA274P/00/EN/05.04
71009586 52021469
Compatible with:
– ToF Tool Field Tool Package version 3.00.00 or higher
– FieldCare version 2.01.00, DTM Library version
2.06.00,
DTM: Deltabar S/MD7x/V02.00 V 1.4.98.74*
DD Rev.: 1*
* Menu languages Chinese and Japanese not selectable
Endress+Hauser 81
Date Software Changes software Documentation

version
CD-ROM Operating Description of
Instructions Instrument Functions
06.2006 02.10.zz – New "Level Easy Pressure" and "Level Easy Height" level — BA270P/00/en/07.06 BA274P/00/en/07.06
modes implemented. New LEVEL SELECTION 71027244 71027249
parameter implemented.
– OPERATION group with DOWNLOAD SELECT — BA270P/00/en/08.06 BA274P/00/en/07.06
71027244 71027249
parameter extended.
– SAFETY CONFIRM group extended for the "Level" CD506P/00/A2/10.07 BA270P/00/en/10.07 BA274P/00/en/07.07
operating mode in the "Level Easy Pressure" level 71033929 71043294 71061021
selection.
See also SD189P Safety Manual Deltabar S. CD506P/00/A2/12.07 BA270P/00/en/12.07 BA274P/00/en/07.07
– Factory setting for the "Error" messages redefined. 71033929 71043294 71061021
– Chinese and Japanese included as menu languages by
CD506P/00/A2/05.08 BA270P/00/en/05.08 BA274P/00/en/05.08
default. 71071762 71071730 71071855
Compatible with:
CD506P/00/A2/08.08 BA270P/00/en/08.08 BA274P/00/en/05.08
– ToF Tool Field Tool Package version 4.0
– FieldCare version 2.02.00 71077542 71077506 71071855
– HART Communicator DXR375 with Device Rev.: 21, CD506P/00/A2/06.09 BA270P/00/EN/06.09 BA274P/00/EN/06.09
DD Rev.: 1 71095432 71095415 71095452
CD506P/00/A2/05.10 BA270P/00/EN/05.10 BA274P/00/EN/05.10

71111787 71114104 71118244
82 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Technical data
9 Technical data
For technical data, please refer to the Technical Information TI382P for Deltabar S.
10 Appendix
10.1 Operating menu for on-site display, FieldCare and

HART handheld terminal
! Note!
• The entire menu is depicted on the following pages.
• The menu has a different structure depending on the measuring mode selected. This means that
some function groups are only displayed for one measuring mode, e.g. "LINEARISATION"
function group for the Level measuring mode.
• In addition, there are also parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are appropriately
configured. For example the Customer Unit P parameter is only displayed if the "User unit" option
was selected for the PRESS. ENG. UNIT parameter. These parameters are indicated with a "*".
• For a description of the parameters, please refer to Operating Instructions BA274P "Description
of device functions". The exact dependency of individual parameters on one another is explained
here. See also  ä 2, section "Overview documentation".
Endress+Hauser 83
Appendix Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART
Measured value
1)
GROUP SELECTION
1) 1)
1)
Level measuring
LEVEL SELECTION mode only SETTINGS
POSITION ADJUSTMENT
2)
MEASURING MODE
Pressure Level Flow

2)
POS. ZERO ADJUST LEVEL SELECTION POS. ZERO ADJUST POS. ZERO ADJUST
SET LRV POS. ZERO ADJUST MAX. FLOW POS. INPUT VALUE
SET URV EMPTY CALIB.

* MAX PRESS. FLOW CALIB. OFFSET
DAMPING VALUE FULL CALIB.

* DAMPING VALUE
DAMPING VALUE

HART Handheld terminal only
* There are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are
appropriately configured.
For example the CUSTOMER UNIT P parameter is only displayed
if the "User unit" option was selected for the PRESS. ENG. UNIT parameter.
These parameters are indicated with a "*".
84 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Appendix
BASIC SETUP
2)
MEASURING MODE
Pressure Level Flow

2)
PRESS. ENG. UNIT LEVEL SELECTION PRESS. ENG. UNIT
CUSTOMER UNIT P
* CUSTOMER UNIT P
*
Level Easy Pressure Level Easy Height Level Standard
CUST. UNIT FACT. P
* CUST. UNIT FACT. P
*
PRESS. ENG. UNIT PRESS. ENG. UNIT
X
SET LRV
CUSTOMER UNIT P
* CUSTOMER UNIT P
* Continuation,
see the following page
FLOW-MEAS. TYPE
SET URV
CUST. UNIT FACT. P
* CUST. UNIT FACT. P
* A
GET LRV B
OUTPUT UNIT OUTPUT UNIT
GET URV CUSTOMER UNIT F

*
CALIBRATION MODE HEIGHT UNIT
DAMPING VALUE
Dry
CUST. UNIT FACT. F
*
Wet CALIBRATION MODE
EMPTY CALIB. EMPTY CALIB. MAX. FLOW

Wet Dry
FULL CALIB. EMPTY PRESSUE DENSITY UNIT DENSITY UNIT MAX PRESS. FLOW
FULL CALIB. ADJUST DENSITY ADJUST DENSITY DAMPING VALUE
FULL PRESSURE EMPTY CALIB. EMPTY CALIB.
FULL CALIB. EMPTY HEIGHT

SET LRV
FULL CALIB.
SET URV
FULL HEIGHT
DAMPING VALUE
SET LRV
SET URV
DAMPING VALUE
Volume Gas Gas Mass

p. cond. norm cond. std. cond.
UNIT FLOW NORM FLOW UNIT STD. FLOW UNIT MASS FLOW UNIT
B B B B

HART Handheld terminal only
For example the CUSTOMER UNIT P parameter is only displayed
if the "User unit" option was selected for the PRESS. ENG. UNIT parameter.
Endress+Hauser 85
C
Continuation
BASIC SETUP "Level",
X see also the previous page Height Volume Mass %
LEVEL SELECTION = HEIGHT UNIT UNIT VOLUME MASS UNIT

Level Standard
PRESS. ENG. UNIT CUTOMER UNIT H * CUSTOMER UNIT V * CUSTOMER UNIT M *

CUSTOMER UNIT P CUST. UNIT FACT. H * CUST. UNIT FACT. V * CUST. UNIT FACT. M *
CUST. UNIT FACT. P D D D D
LEVEL MODE
Linear
Pressure Height E
Linearized Linearized
LIN. MEASURAND LINd MEASURAND COMB. MEASURAND
% Volume Mass
UNIT VOLUME MASS UNIT

C E G
D F H CUSTOMER UNIT V * CUSTOMER UNIT M *
CALIBRATION MODE HYDR. PRESS MIN.
E CUST. UNIT FACT. V * CUST. UNIT FACT. M *
HYDR. PRESS MAX. F
Wet Dry F F F
EMPTY CALIB. DENSITY UNIT DAMPING VALUE LEVEL MIN
EMPTY PRESSURE ADJUST DENSITY LEVEL MAX

G
FULL CALIB. VOLUME UNIT
* CALIBRATION MODE
Height+... %Height+...
FULL PRESSURE CUSTOMER UNIT V
*
Wet Dry HEIGHT UNIT
ADJUSTED DENSITY * CUST. UNIT FACT. V

* EMPTY CALIB. DENSITY UNIT
*
CUTOMER UNIT H
TANK VOLUME
* EMPTY PRESSURE ADJUST DENSITY
*
CUST. UNIT FACT. H
HEIGHT UNIT
* FULL CALIB. HEIGHT UNIT *
H H
CUSTOMER UNIT H FULL PRESSURE CUSTOMER UNIT H *
CUST. UNIT FACT. H
* ADJUSTED DENSITY * CUST. UNIT FACT. H *
TANK HEIGHT
* 100% POINT *
100% POINT
* ZERO POSITION
ZERO POSITION
DAMPING VALUE
SET LRV
SET URV
DAMPING VALUE * There are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are
For example the CUST. UNIT FACT. H parameter is only displayed
if the "User unit" option was selected for the HEIGHT UNIT parameter.
86 Endress+Hauser
EXTENDED SETUP LINEARISATION LINEARISATION TOTALIZER SETUP

Level measuring Level measuring Flow measuring
mode only mode only mode only
Display via on-site Display via ToF Tool or

display only HART handheld terminal
only
Pressure Level Flow
TEMP. ENG UNIT TEMP. ENG UNIT TEMP. ENG UNIT TANK CONTENT MIN TANK CONTENT MIN TOTALIZER 1 UNIT
DENSITIY UNIT LOW FLOW CUT-OFF TANK CONTENT MAX TANK CONTENT MAX TOT. 1 USER UNIT
*
ADJUST DENSITIY SET L. FL. CUT-OFF
* TABLE SELECTION TABLE SELECTION FACT. U. U. TOTAL.1
*
PROCESS DENSITY SET LRV Measuring Measuring NEG. FLOW TOT. 1
Editor Table Editor Table
Table Table
SET LRV
* SET URV LIN. EDIT MODE MEASURING TABLE LIN. EDIT MODE LINE-NUMB RESET TOTALIZER 1
SET URV * EDITOR TABLE MEASURING TABLE EDITOR TABLE ACTIVE LIN. TAB. X TOTALIZER 2 UNIT
EDITOR TABLE LINE-NUMB ACTIVE LIN. TAB. Y TOT. 2 USER UNIT

*
EDITOR TABLE X-VAL. FACT. U. U. TOTAL. 2 *
Y-VAL. NEG. FLOW TOT. 2
TANK DESCRIPTION
EDITOR TABLE
TANK DESCRIPTION
For example the TOT. 1 USER UNIT parameter is only displayed
if the "User unit" option was selected for the TOTALIZER 1 UNIT parameter.
Endress+Hauser 87
SAFETY CONFIRM.
** DISPLAY OUTPUT
SAFETY LOCK MENU DESCRIPTOR OUTPUT CURRENT
SAFETY PASSWORD MAIN DATA FORMAT CURR. CHARACT.
DIGIT SETS ALTERNATE DATA OUTPUT FAIL MODE
2)
CURRENT OUTPUT LANGUAGE ALT. CURR. OUTPUT
ACK. ALARM MODE DISPLAY CONTRAST SET MAX. ALARM
CALIB. OFFSET DIGIT SETS SET MIN. CURRENT
3)
MEASURING MODE ASSIGN CURRENT
4)
Pressure Level Flow LINEAR/SQROOT
5)
SET LRV EMPTY PRESSURE MAX. FLOW
SET URV EMPTY CALIB. MAX PRESS FLOW
DAMPING VALUE FULL PRESSURE LOW FLOW CUT-OFF
CONF. PASSWORD FULL CALIB. SET L. FLOW CUT-OFF

*
SET LRV LINEAR/SQROOT
SET URV SET LRV
DAMPING VALUE SET URV
CONF. PASSWORD DAMPING VALUE
CONF. PASSWORD
2) Display via
HART handheld terminal only * There are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are
3) Level measuring mode only These parameters are indicated with a "*".
4) Flow measuring mode only See Safety Manual SD189P
5) only LEVEL SELECTION = Level Easy Pressure
** for Deltabar S.
88 Endress+Hauser
TRANSMITTER INFO PROCESS INFO
HART DATA TRANSMITTER DATA PROCESS CONNECTION SENSOR DATA PROCESS VALUE PEAK HOLD INDICATOR
Pressure Level Flow
BUS ADDRESS DEVICE SERIAL No Pmax PROC. CONN. SENSOR SER. NO. MEASURED VALUE MEASURED VALUE MEASURED VALUE COUNTER:P > Pmax
DEVICE TYPE ELECTR. SERIAL No PROC. CONN. TYPE PRESS. SENS LOLIM PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE MAX. MEAS. PRESS.
DEVICE REVISION CUST. TAG NUMBER MAT. PROC. CONN. + PRESS. SENS HILIM CORRECTED PRESS. CORRECTED PRESS. CORRECTED PRESS. COUNTER:P < Pmin
2)
BURST MODE LONG TAG NUMBER MAT. PROC. CONN. – MINIMUM SPAN SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE MIN. MEAS. PRESS.
2)
BURST OPTION ADDITIONAL INFO. SEAL TYPE SENSOR MEAS. TYPE SENSOR TEMP. SENSOR TEMP. SENSOR TEMP. COUNTER:T > Tmax
2)
PREAMBLE NUMBER DEVICE DESIGN. BOLTS MATERIAL Pmin SENS. DAMAGE MEAS. VAL. TREND MEAS. VAL. TREND MEAS. VAL. TREND MAX. MEAS. TEMP.
2)
MANUFACTOR ID HARDWARE REV. NUTS MATERIAL Pmax SENS. DAMAGE LEVEL BEFORE LIN
* SUPPRESSED FLOW COUNTER:T< Tmin
2)
HART MESSAGE SOFTWARE VERSION DRAIN VENT MAT. MAT. MEMBRANE TANK CONTENT
* TOTALIZER 1 MIN. MEAS. TEMP.
2)
HART DATE CONFIG RECORDER DRAIN VENT POS. FILLING FLUID TOTAL. 1 OVERFLOW PCB COUNT:T > Tmax
2) 2)
PRIMARY VALUE IS PCB TEMPERATURE THREAD Tmin SENSOR TOTALIZER 2 PCB MAX. TEMP.
2) 2)
PRIMARY VALUE ALLOWED MIN. TEMP MOUNTING THREAD Tmax SENSOR TOTAL. 2 OVERFLOW PCB COUNT: T< Tmin
2) 2)
SECONDARY VAL. IS ALLOWED MAX. TEMP REMOTE SEAL + SENSOR H/WARE REV. PCB MIN. TEMP.
2) 2)
SECONDARY VALUE DIP STATUS REMOTE SEAL – RESET PEAKHOLD
2) 2)
THIRD VALUE IS DIAPHRAGM MAT. +
2) 2)
THIRD VALUE DIAPHRAGM MAT. –
2) 2)
4TH VALUE IS NR OF REMOTE SEAL
2) 2)
4 TH VALUE FILL FLUID
2) Display via FieldCare

HART handheld terminal only
There are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are
* appropriately configured.
Endress+Hauser 89
OPERATION DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE
SIMULATION MESSAGES USER LIMITS SYSTEM 2
ENTER RESET CODE SIMULATION MODE ALARM STATUS Pmin ALARM WINDOW CURR. TRIM 4mA
OPERATING HOURS LAST DIAG. CODE Pmax ALARM WINDOW CURR. TRIM 20mA
INSERT PIN NO ACK. ALARM MODE Tmin ALARM WINDOW OFFSET 4mA TRIM
HistoROM AVAIL. ACK. ALARM * Tmax ALARM WINDOW OFFSET 20mA TRIM
DOWNLOAD SELECT. * RESET ALL ALARMS
HistoROM CONTROL * ERROR NO.

Display via digital communication
SELECT ALARMTYPE
ALARM DELAY
ALARM DISPL. TIME
none Pressure Flow Level Tank content Current Alarm Warning

SIM. PRESSURE SIM. FLOW VALUE SIM. LEVEL SIM. TANK CONT. SIM. CURRENT SIM. ERROR NO.
There are parameters that are only displayed if other parameters are
* appropriately configured.
90 Endress+Hauser
10.2 Patents
This product may be protected by at least one of the following patents. Further patents are pending.
• DE 203 11 320 U1
• US 6,631,644 A1 i EP 1 299 701 B1
• US 5,670,063 A1 i EP 0 516 579 B1
• US 5,539,611 A1
• US 5,050,034 A1 i EP 0 445 382 B1
• US 5,097,712 A1 i EP 0 420 105 B1
• US 5,050,035 A1 i EP 0 414 871 B1
• US 5,005,421 A1 i EP 0 351 701 B1
• EP 0 414 871 B1
• US 5,334,344 A1 i EP 0 490 807 B1
• US 6,703,943 A1
• US 5,499,539 A1 i EP 0 613 552 B1
Endress+Hauser 91
92 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 93
Deltabar S FMD76/77/78, PMD70/75 with 4...20 mA HART Index
Index
Numerics Measuring mode, selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4...20 mA test signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
N
A Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
O
C On-site display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Operating elements, function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34–35
Commubox FXA191, connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operating elements, position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Commubox FXA195, connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operating keys, on-site, Flow measuring mode . . . . . . . . . 39
Connecting Commubox FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Operating keys, on-site, function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34–35
Connecting ToF Adapter FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Operating keys, on-site, Level measuring mode . . . . . . . . . 37
Operating keys, on-site, Pressure measuring mode. . . . . . . 36
D Operating keys, position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Diaphragm seals, installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 83
Diaphragm seals, vacuum application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Differential pressure measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Differential pressure measurement, information . . . . . . . . 64 P
Differential pressure measurement, installation . . . . . . . . . 16 Pipe mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Differential pressure measurement, preparatory steps . . . . 63 Position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Differential pressure measurement, Quick Setup menu . . . 64 Potential matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Pressure measurement, Quick Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
E Q
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Quick Setup menu flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Quick Setup menu level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Quick Setup menu pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
F
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 R
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Flow measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Repair of Ex-certified devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Flow measurement, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Flow measurement, Ouick Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Rotating the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow measurement, preparatory steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
S
H Scope of delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HART handheld terminal, connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Hazardous areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Separate housing, assemble and mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Heat insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Service Interface FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
HistoROM/M-Dat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SIL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
I Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
L
Language, selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 T
Level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59–60 Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Level measurement, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Level measurement, preparatory steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 U
Level measurement, Quick Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Unlocking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Locking operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 W
Wand mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
M Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Measuring layout for flow measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Measuring layout for level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Measuring layout for pressure measurement . . . . . . . . . . . 16
94 Endress+Hauser
Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination
Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung
Please reference the Return Authorization Number (RA#), obtained from Endress+Hauser, on all paperwork and mark the RA#
clearly on the outside of the box. If this procedure is not followed, it may result in the refusal of the package at our facility.
RA No. Bitte geben Sie die von E+H mitgeteilte Rücklieferungsnummer (RA#) auf allen Lieferpapieren an und vermerken Sie diese
auch außen auf der Verpackung. Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisung führt zur Ablehnung ihrer Lieferung.
Because of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment, we need the "Declaration of Hazardous Material
and De-Contamination", with your signature, before your order can be handled. Please make absolutely sure to attach it to the outside of the
packaging.
Aufgrund der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und zum Schutz unserer Mitarbeiter und Betriebseinrichtungen, benötigen wir die unterschriebene
"Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung", bevor Ihr Auftrag bearbeitet werden kann. Bringen Sie diese unbedingt außen an der
Verpackung an.
Type of instrument / sensor Serial number

Geräte-/Sensortyp ____________________________________________ Seriennummer ________________________
Used as SIL device in a Safety Instrumented System / Einsatz als SIL Gerät in Schutzeinrichtungen
Process data/Prozessdaten Temperature / Temperatur_____ [°F] _____ [°C] Pressure / Druck _____ [psi] _____ [ Pa ]
Conductivity / Leitfähigkeit ________ [μS/cm] Viscosity /Viskosität _____ [cp] _____ [mm2/s]
Medium and warnings

Warnhinweise zum Medium
harmful/
Medium /concentration Identification flammable toxic corrosive irritant other * harmless
Medium /Konzentration CAS No. entzündlich giftig ätzend gesundheits- sonstiges* unbedenklich
schädlich/
reizend
Process
medium
Medium im
Prozess
Medium for
process cleaning
Medium zur
Prozessreinigung
Returned part
cleaned with
Medium zur
Endreinigung
* explosive; oxidising; dangerous for the environment; biological risk; radioactive
* explosiv; brandfördernd; umweltgefährlich; biogefährlich; radioaktiv
Please tick should one of the above be applicable, include safety data sheet and, if necessary, special handling instructions.
Zutreffendes ankreuzen; trifft einer der Warnhinweise zu, Sicherheitsdatenblatt und ggf. spezielle Handhabungsvorschriften beilegen.
Description of failure / Fehlerbeschreibung __________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Company data /Angaben zum Absender
Company /Firma ___________________________________ Phone number of contact person /Telefon-Nr. Ansprechpartner:

_________________________________________________ ____________________________________________
Address / Adresse Fax / E-Mail ____________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________ Your order No. / Ihre Auftragsnr. ____________________________
“We hereby certify that this declaration is filled out truthfully and completely to the best of our knowledge.We further certify that the returned
parts have been carefully cleaned. To the best of our knowledge they are free of any residues in dangerous quantities.”
“Wir bestätigen, die vorliegende Erklärung nach unserem besten Wissen wahrheitsgetreu und vollständig ausgefüllt zu haben. Wir bestätigen
weiter, dass die zurückgesandten Teile sorgfältig gereinigt wurden und nach unserem besten Wissen frei von Rückständen in gefahrbringen-
der Menge sind.”
P/SF/Konta XIV
(place, date / Ort, Datum) Name, dept./Abt. (please print /bitte Druckschrift) Signature / Unterschrift
www.endress.com/worldwide
BA270P/00/EN/05.10
71114104
CCS/FM+SGML6.0 71114104
Technical Information
Deltabar S PMD70/75, FMD76/77/78

Differential pressure measurement
Differential pressure transmitter with ceramic and silicon sensors
Overload-resistant and function-monitored; Communication via
HART, PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Application Your benefits

The Deltabar S differential pressure transmitter is used • Very good reproducibility and long-term stability
for the following measuring tasks: • High reference accuracy: up to 0.075 %,
• Flow measurement (volume or mass flow) in as PLATINUM version: 0.05 %
conjunction with primary devices in gases, vapors and • Turn down up to 100:1, higher on request
liquids • Used for flow and differential pressure monitoring
• Level, volume or mass measurement in liquids up to SIL 3, certified to IEC 61508 by TÜV SÜD
• Differential pressure monitoring, e.g. of filters and • HistoROM®/M-DAT memory module
pumps • Function-monitored from the measuring cell to the
• International usage thanks to a wide range of approvals electronics
• Continuous modularity for differential pressure,
hydrostatics and pressure (Deltabar S, Deltapilot S,
Cerabar S), e.g.
– replaceable display
– universal electronics
• Quick commissioning with Quick Setup menu
• Menu-guided operation
• Extensive diagnostic functions
TI382P/00/EN/05.10
No. 71111786
Deltabar S
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Warm-up period – PMD70, FMD76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Device selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Influence of the operating pressure on zero point and span –
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 PMD70, FMD76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Thermal change of the zero output and the output span – PMD70,
Level measurement (level, volume and mass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 FMD76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Operating conditions (Installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 General installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Measuring arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wall and pipe-mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 "Separate housing" version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Oxygen applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ultrapure gas applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Applications with hydrogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Signal range – 4 to 20 mA HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Load – 4 to 20 mA HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Operating conditions (Environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dead time, time constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dynamic behavior, current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dynamic behavior, HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dynamic behavior, PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dynamic behavior, FOUNDATION Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Overvoltage protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Data of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operating conditions (Process) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Process temperature limits (temperature at transmitter) . . . . . . . 29
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Process temperature range, seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Pressure specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Dimensions of T14 housing, optional display on the side . . . . . . . 31
Residual ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Dimensions of T15 housing, optional display on the top . . . . . . . 31
Influence of power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Dimensions of T17 housing (hygienic), optional display on
the side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Performance characteristics – general . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Process connections PMD70 with ceramic process isolating
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 diaphragms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Long-term stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Process connections PMD70 with ceramic process isolating
Influence of the installation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 diaphragms (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Vibration effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Process connections PMD75 with metal process isolating
diaphragms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Process connections PMD75 with metal process isolating
Performance characteristics – metal process isolating diaphragms (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
diaphragms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Process connections PMD75 with metal process isolating
Reference accuracy – PMD75, FMD77, FMD78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 diaphragms (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Total performance – PMD75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Process connection FMD76 with ceramic process isolating
Total error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 diaphragms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warm-up period – PMD75, FMD77, FMD78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Process connection FMD76 with ceramic process isolating
Influence of the operating pressure on zero point and span – PMD75, diaphragms (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
FMD77, FMD78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Process connection FMD76 with ceramic process isolating
Thermal change of the zero output and the output span – diaphragms (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PMD75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Process connections FMD77 with diaphragm seal,
low-pressure side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Performance characteristics – ceramic process isolating Process connections FMD77 with diaphragm seal,
diaphragms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 high-pressure side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Process connections FMD77 with diaphragm seal,
Reference accuracy – PMD70, FMD76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
high-pressure side (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Total performance – PMD70, FMD76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Process connections FMD77 with diaphragm seal,
Total error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
high-pressure side (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Additional documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

FMD78 basic device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Field of Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal (continued) . . 45 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal (continued) . . 46 Brief Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal (continued) . . 47 Functional safety manual (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal (continued) . . 48 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal (continued) . . 49 Installation/Control Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal (continued) . . 50 Overfill protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Wall and pipe mounting with mounting bracket or separate
housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Material (not wetted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Material (wetted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Filling oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hardware and software for onsite and remote operation . . . . . . . 60
Planning instructions, diaphragm seal systems . . . . . 62

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Design and operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Diaphragm seal filling oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operating temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Ex approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Suitability for hygienic processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Marine certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Functional Safety SIL / IEC 61508 Declaration of Conformity
(optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Overfill protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
CRN approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PMD70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PMD70 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
PMD70 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PMD75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
PMD75 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
PMD75 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
FMD76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
FMD76 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
FMD76 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
FMD77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
FMD77 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FMD77 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
FMD78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FMD78 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
FMD78 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
FMD78 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Function and system design

Device selection
Deltabar S – PMD70 PMD75 FMD76 FMD77 FMD78

product family
+ –
+ –
P01-PMD70xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-PMD75xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-FMD76xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-FMD77xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-FMD78xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-003
With ceramic process With metal process With ceramic process With metal process With metal process
isolating diaphragms isolating diaphragms isolating diaphragms isolating diaphragms isolating diaphragms
and diaphragm seal and capillary
mounted on one side diaphragm seals
Field of application – Flow – Flow – Level – Level – Level

– Level – Level – Differential pressure
– Differential pressure – Differential pressure
Process connections – 1/4 – 18 NPT – 1/4 – 18 NPT Low-pressure side (–): Low-pressure side (–): – Wide range of
– RC 1/4 – RC 1/4 – 1/4 – 18 NPT – 1/4 – 18 NPT diaphragm seals
– RC 1/4 – RC 1/4
High-pressure side (+): High-pressure side (+):
– DN 80 – DN 100 – DN 50 – DN 100
– ANSI 3" – 4" – ANSI 2" – 4"
– JIS 80A – 100A – JIS 80A – 100A
Measuring ranges From –25 to +25 mbar From –10 to +10 mbar From –100 to +100 From –100 to +100 mbar From –100 to +100 mbar
(-0.375 to +0.375 psi) (-1 to +1 psi) mbar (-1.5 to +1.5 psi) (-1.5 to +1.5 psi) (-1.5 to +1.5 psi)
to –3 to +3 bar to –40 to +40 bar to –3 to +3 bar to –16 bar to +16 bar to –40 to +40 bar
(-45 to +45 psi) (-600 to +600 psi) (-45 to +45 psi) (-1 to +1 psi) (-600 to +600 psi)
OPL 1 On one side: up to On one side: up to On one side: up to On one side: up to On one side: up to
100 bar (1500 psi) 420 bar (6300 psi) 100 bar (1500 psi) 160 bar (2400 psi) 160 bar (2400 psi)
On both sides: up to On both sides: up to On both sides: up to
150 bar (2250 psi) 630 bar (9450 psi) 240 bar (3600 psi)
Process temperature –20 to +85°C –40 to +85°C –20 to +85°C Up to +400 °C (752 °F) Up to +400 °C (752 °F)
range (–4 to +185°F) (–40 to +185°F) (–4 to +185°F) (depending on the filling (depending on the filling
(temperature at process oil) oil)
connection)
Ambient temperature –20 to +85 °C –40 to +85°C –20 to +85°C –40 to +85 °C –40 to +85 °C
range (-4 to +185 °F) (–40 to +185°F) 2 (-4 to +185 °F) (-40 to +185 °F) 2 (-40 to +185 °F)2
Ambient temperature -20 to +60°C

range, separate housing (-4 to +122 °F)
Reference accuracy – Up to 0.075 % of the set span – Up to 0.075 % of the set span
– PLATINUM version: up to 0.05 % of the set span
Supply voltage – Version for non-hazardous areas: 10.5 to 45 V DC

– Ex ia: 10.5 to 30 V DC
Output 4 to 20 mA with superimposed HART protocol, PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Options – High-pressure version up to pstat 700 bar (10500 psi)

– PMD75, FMD77, FMD78: gold-rhodium-coated process isolating diaphragm, NACE-compliant material
– Separate housing
4 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Deltabar S – PMD70 PMD75 FMD76 FMD77 FMD78

product family
Specialties – Metal-free – pstat to 420 bar – Abrasion-resistant and – For high medium – Wide range of
(options) measurement with (6300 psi) corrosion-resistant temperatures diaphragm seals
PVDF flange – Process isolating – No diaphragm-seal
– Available with diaphragm: tantalum temperature effects
Deltatop as flow – Available with – Metal-free
compact device Deltatop as flow measurement possible
compact device with ECTFE-coated
process connection
– HistoROM®/M-DAT memory module
1) OPL: over pressure limit; dependent on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components
2) Lower temperatures on request
Measuring principle
Ceramic process isolating diaphragm used for Metal process isolating diaphragm used for PMD75, FMD77 and FMD78
PMD70 and FMD76
➀
➀ ➁
➁ ➆
➅
p1 p2
➂ ➇
➂ p1 ➃ p2 p1 p2
➈
➃ ➄
➄
P01-xMD7xxxx-03-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-xMD7xxxx-03-xx-xx-xx-002 P01-xMD7xxxx-03-xx-xx-xx-003
Ceramic measuring cell PMD70 and FMD76 Metal measuring cell 10 mbar (0.15 psi) and 30 mbar Metal measuring cell as of 100 mbar (1.5 psi)
(0.45 psi)
1 Meter body 6 Sensing element
2 Process isolating diaphragm 1 Sensing element 7 Middle diaphragm
3 Electrodes 2 Silicon diaphragm 8 Filling oil
4 Glass frit fixes the process isolating 3 Process isolating diaphragm 9 Process isolating diaphragm
diaphragm onto the meter body 4 Filling oil
5 Temperature sensor 5 Middle diaphragm
Ceramic process isolating diaphragm used for PMD70 and FMD76

The ceramic measuring cell is based on the principle of a plate capacitor with an electrode on a meter body (1)
and a movable electrode on the interior of the diaphragm (3). Silicone oil or mineral oil are used as the standard
filling oils for this measuring cell.
A differential pressure (p1 p2) causes a corresponding deflection of both diaphragms. Both capacitance values
are converted and are fed to the microprocessor of the transmitter as a digital signal.
Advantages:
• Self-monitoring for process isolating diaphragm break or oil loss (constant comparison of the measured
temperature with a temperature calculated from the capacitance values)
• Extremely high resistance to aggressive media
• Suitable for vacuums up to 1 mbarabs (0.015 psi)
• Metal-free versions available
• Secondary containment for enhanced integrity
Metal process isolating diaphragm used for PMD75, FMD77 and FMD78
The process isolating diaphragms (3/9) are deflected on both sides by the acting pressures. A filling oil (4/8)
transfers the pressure to a resistance bridge (semi-conductor technology). The change in the bridge output
voltage, which depends on the differential pressure, is measured and processed further.
Endress+Hauser 5
Deltabar S
Advantages:
• Standard system pressures: 160 bar (2400 psi) and 420 bar (6300 psi)
• High long-term stability
• Very high single-sided overload resistance
• Secondary containment for enhanced integrity
Flow measurement Design and operation mode
+ – + –
Q ~ Δp p1 p2 Q ~ Δp p1 p2
Q Q
P01-PMD7xxxx-15-xx-xx-xx-000
Flow measurement with Deltabar S and primary device, left: orifice plate and right: Pitot tube
Q Flow
p Differential pressure, p = p1 – p2
Your benefits
• Choice of four flow modes of operation: volume flow, corrected volume flow (European norm conditions),
standard volume flow (American standard conditions) and mass flow.
• Choice of diverse flow units with automatic unit conversion.
• A customized unit can be specified.
• Low flow cut off: when activated, this function suppresses small flows which can lead to large fluctuations
in the measured value.
• Contains two totalizers as standard. One totalizer can be reset to zero.
• The totalizing mode and unit can be individually set for each totalizer. This allows independent daily and
annual quantity totalizing.
• With the Deltatop product family, Endress+Hauser is offering universal and reliable solutions for flow
measurement:
– Deltatop, the compact, ready-to-use flow measuring unit including the Deltabar S differential pressure
transmitter
Note!
For more information about flow measurement with the Deltabar S differential pressure transmitter
• Deltabar S with orifice plate (TI422P, Deltatop DO6x)
• Deltabar S with Pitot tube (TI425P, Deltatop DP6x)
6 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Level measurement (level, Design and operation mode

volume and mass)
– – Δp
h= ρ g
➀
h
➂
➁ +
+
P01xMD7xxxx-15-xx-xx-xx-000
Level measurement with Deltabar S

1 Level measurement via pressure piping and PMD70
2 Level measurement with FMD76
3 Level measurement with FMD78
h Height (level)
p Differential pressure
 Density of the medium
g Gravitation constant
Your benefits
• Choice of three level operating modes.
• Volume and mass measurements in any tank shapes by means of a freely programmable characteristic curve.
• Choice of diverse level units with automatic unit conversion.
• A customized unit can be specified.
• Has a wide range of uses, e.g.
– for level measurement in tanks with pressure overlay
– in the event of foam formation
– in tanks with agitators of screen fittings
– in the event of liquid gases
– for standard level measurement
Communication protocol • 4 to 20 mA with HART communication protocol

• PROFIBUS PA
– The Endress+Hauser devices meet the requirements of the FISCO model.
– Due to the low current consumption of 13 mA ± 1 mA, the following number of devices can be operated
on one bus segment if installing as per FISCO:
– up to 7 Deltabar S for Ex ia, CSA IS and FM IS applications
– up to 27 Deltabar S for all other applications, e.g. in non-hazardous areas, Ex nA, etc.
Further information on PROFIBUS PA can be found in Operating Instructions BA034S "PROFIBUS DP/PA:
Guidelines for planning and commissioning" and in the PNO Guideline.
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus
– The Endress+Hauser devices meet the requirements of the FISCO model.
– Due to the low current consumption of 15 mA ± 1 mA, the following number of devices can be operated
on one bus segment if installing as per FISCO:
– up to 6 Deltabar S for Ex ia, CSA IS and FM IS applications
– up to 24 Deltabar S for all other applications, e.g. in non-hazardous areas, Ex nA, etc.
Further information on FOUNDATION Fieldbus, such as requirements for bus system components can be
found in Operating Instructions BA013S "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview".
Endress+Hauser 7
Deltabar S
Input
Measured variable Differential pressure, from which flow (volume flow or mass flow) and level (level, volume or mass) are derived
Measuring range PMD75, FMD77, FMD78 (with metal process isolating diaphragms)
Nominal Range limit Smallest MWP 1 OPL 2 Min. operating Versions in the
value calibratable pressure 3 order code 4
span 5
lower (LRL) upper (URL) on one side on both PN 160 6 PN 420 6

sides
[mbar (psi)] [mbar (psi)] [mbar (psi)] [mbar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [mbarabs (psiabs)]
7
10 (0.15) –10 (-0.15) +10 (+0.15) 0.25 (0.00375) 7B –
30 (0.45) 7 –30 (-0.45) +30 (+0.45) 0.3 (0.0045) 7C –
160 (2400) 160 (2400) 240 (3600)
100 (1.5) –100 (-1.5) +100 (+1.5) 1/5 7D –
(0.015/0.075) 8
500 (7.5) –500 (-7.5) +500 (+7.5) 5 (0.075) 7F 8F

0.1 (0.0015)
160/420
3000 (45) –3000 (-45) +3000 (+45) 30 (0.45) 7H 8H
(2400/6300)
16000 (240) –16000 (-240) +16000 (+240) 160 (2.4) 160/420 240/630 7L 8L
(2400/6300) 9 (3600/9450)
40000 (600) –40000 (-600) +40000 (+600) 400 (6) "+" side: 7M 8M
160/420
(2400/6300) 10
PMD70, FMD76 (with ceramic process isolating diaphragms)
Nominal Range limit Smallest MWP 1 OPL 2 Min. operating Versions in the
value calibratable pressure 3 order code 4
span 5
lower (LRL) upper (URL) on one side on both

sides
[mbar (psi)] [mbar (psi)] [mbar (psi)] [mbar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [mbarabs (psiabs)]
25 (0.375) –25 (-0.375) +25 (+0.375) 0.25 (0.00375) 10 (150) 10 (150) 15 (225) 7B
100 (1.5) –100 (-1.5) +100 (+1.5) 1 (0.015) 16 (240) 16 (240) 24 (360) 7D
1 (0.015)
500 (7.5) –500 (-7.5) +500 (+7.5) 5 (0.075) 100 (1500) 100 (1500) 150 (2250) 7F
3000 (45) –3000 (-45) +3000 (+45) 30 (0.45) 100 (1500) 100 (1500) 150 (2250) 7H
1) The MWP (maximum working pressure; MWP = PN) for the measuring device depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected
components, i.e. the process connection ( ä 31 ff) has to be taken into consideration in addition to the measuring cell (see Table above). Also observe
pressure-temperature dependency. For the appropriate standards and further information, see  ä 30, "Pressure specifications" section.
2) OPL: over pressure limit depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components  ä 30, "Pressure specifications" section.
3) The minimum operating pressure indicated in the table applies to silicone oil under reference operating conditions. Min. operating pressure at 85 °C (185 °F)
for silicone oil: up to 10 mbarabs (0.15 psiabs ).
FMD77 and FMD78: Min. operating pressure: 50 mbarabs (0.75 psiabs); observe also the pressure and temperature application limits of the selected filling oil
on  ä 64. For vacuum applications, please observe the installation instructions on  ä 65 ff.
4) Version in the order code  ä 69 ff, feature 40 "Nominal range; PN"
5) Turn down > 100:1 on request
6) PN 160 versions with A2 stainless steel screws M12, PN 420 versions with A4 stainless steel screws M12
PN 420 version for PMD75 only.
7) PMD75 only
8) Minimum span that can be calibrated for PMD75: 1 mbar (0,015 psi); minimum span that can be calibrated for FMD77 and FMD78: 5 mbar (0.075 psi)
9) For PMD75 devices with CRN-approved process connections, the MWP is 315 bar (4725 psi).
10) "–" side: 100 bar (1500 psi)
8 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Explanation of terms Explanation of the terms "turn down (TD)",

"set span" and "zero-based span"
Case 1:
• Lower range value (LRV) Upper range value ➀=➁
(URV) LRL LRV URV URL
Example:
• Lower range value (LRV) = 0 mbar –500 mbar 0 100 +500 mbar
• Upper range value (URV) = 100 mbar (1.5 psi)
• Nominal value (URL) = 500 mbar (7.5 psi)
Turn down:
➂
• TD = URL /URV5:1
➃
Set span:
• URV – LRV = 100 mbar (1.5 psi) ➄
This span is based on the zero point. P01-xxxxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-001
Example: 500 mbar (7.5 psi) measuring cell
Case 2:
• Lower range value (LRV) Upper range value ➀=➁
(URV)
LRL LRV URV URL
Example:
• Lower range value (LRV) = –300 mbar (4.5 psi)
• Upper range value (URV) = 0 bar –500 mbar 0 +500 mbar
• Nominal value (URL) = 500 mbar (7.5 psi) –300 mbar
Turn down: ➂
• TD = URL / (LRV) = 1.67:1
Set span: ➃
• URV – LRV = 300 mbar (4.5 psi)
This span is based on the zero point.
➄
Example: 500 mbar (7.5 psi) measuring cell
1 Set span
2 Zero-based span
3 Nominal value i upper range limit (URL)
5 Sensor measuring range
LRL Lower range limit
URL Upper range limit
LRV Lower range value
URV Upper range value
Endress+Hauser 9
Deltabar S
Output
Output signal • 4 to 20 mA with superimposed digital communication protocol HART 5.0, 2-wire
• Digital communication signal PROFIBUS PA (Profile 3.0)
– signal coding: Manchester Bus Powered (MBP): Manchester II
– data transmission rate: 31.25 KBit/s voltage mode
• Digital communication signal FOUNDATION Fieldbus
– signal coding: Manchester Bus Powered (MBP): Manchester II
– data transmission rate: 31.25 KBit/s voltage mode
Signal range – 3.8 mA to 20.5 mA

4 to 20 mA HART
Signal on alarm As per NAMUR NE 43

• 4 to 20 mA HART
Options:
– Max. alarm: can be set from 21 to 23 mA (Factory setting: 22 mA)
– Hold measured value: last measured value is held
– Min. alarm: 3.6 mA
• PROFIBUS PA: can be set in the Analog Input block,
Options: Last Valid Out Value, Fsafe Value (factory setting), Status Bad
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus: can be set in the Analog Input block,
Options: Last Good Value, Fail Safe Value (factory setting), Wrong Value
Load – 4 to 20 mA HART
➀ RLmax ➁ RLmax
[Ω] [Ω]
Test 1500 Test
1456
1282 1239
847 804
➃ ➃
413
➂ 369
➂
10.5 20 30 40 45 U 11.5 20 30 40 45 U
[V] [V]
U – 10.5 V U – 11.5 V
RLmax ≤ RLmax ≤
23 mA 23 mA
Load diagram, observe the position of the jumper and the explosion protection ( ä 17, "Measuring a 4 to 20 mA test
signal" section.)
1 Jumper for 4 to 20 mA test signal set to "Non-test" position
2 Jumper for 4 to 20 mA test signal set to "Test" position
3 Power supply 10.5 (11.5) to 30 V DC for 1/2 G Ex ia, 1 GD Ex ia, 1/2 GD Ex ia, FM IS, CSA IS, IECEx ia, NEPSI Ex ia
4 Power supply 10.5 (11.5) to 45 V DC for device for non-hazardous areas, 1/2 D, 1/3 D, 2 G Ex d, 3 G Ex nA, FM XP,
FM DIP, FM NI, CSA XP, CSA dust ignition proof, NEPSI Ex d
RLmax Maximum load resistance
U Supply voltage
Note!
When operating via a handheld terminal or via a PC with an operating program, a minimum communication
resistance of 250 must exist within the loop.
Resolution • Current output: 1 A

• Display: can be set (factory setting: presentation of the maximum accuracy of the transmitter)
10 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Dead time, time constant

I
100 %
90 %
63 %
t1 t2 t
t3
Presentation of the dead time and the time constant
Dynamic behavior, Type Dead Measuring cell Time constant (T63), t2 Time constant (T90), t3
current output time t1
PMD75 45 ms • 10 mbar (0.15 psi) and 30 mbar • 200 ms • 1315 ms

• 100 mbar (1.5 psi) measuring cell • 60 ms • 138 ms
• 500 mbar (7.5 psi) measuring cell • 45 ms • 103.5 ms
• 3 bar (45 psi) measuring cell • 40 ms • 92 ms
• 16 bar (240 psi) and 40 bar (600 psi) • 60 ms • 138 ms
measuring cell
FMD77, Dependent on the diaphragm seal

FMD78
PMD70, 90 ms • 25 mbar (0.375 psi) measuring cell • 4700 ms • 10810 ms
FMD76 • 100 mbar (1.5 psi) measuring cell • 280 ms • 644 ms
Dynamic behavior, HART Type Dead Measuring cell Time constant (T63), t2 Time constant (T90), t3
time t1

measuring cell
FMD78

Reading cycle
• HART commands: 3 to 4 per second on average.
The Deltabar S commands the BURST MODE function for cyclic value transmission via the HART
communication protocol.
Response time
 250 ms
Cycle time (update time)

On average 250 to 330 ms.
Endress+Hauser 11
Deltabar S
Dynamic behavior, A typical cyclic parametrization for the PLC of 20 values per second results in the following behavior:
PROFIBUS PA
Type Dead Measuring cell Time constant (T63), t2 Time constant (T90), t3
time t1

measuring cell

FMD78

Response time
• Cyclic: approx. 10 ms per request
• Acyclic: < 50 ms
All values are typical values.

The cycle time in a bus segment in cyclic data communication depends on the number of devices, on the
segment coupler used and on the internal PLC cycle time.
Dynamic behavior, A typical configuration for the macro cycle time (host system) of 250 ms results in the following behavior:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Type Dead Measuring cell Time constant (T63), t2 Time constant (T90), t3
time t1

measuring cell

FMD78
Reading cycle
• Cyclic: up to 5/s, dependent on the number and type of function blocks used in a closed-control loop
• Acyclic: 10/s

250 ms
Response time
• Cyclic: < 80 ms
• Acyclic: < 40 ms
All values are typical values.
12 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Damping A damping affects all outputs (output signal, display).

• Via onsite display, handheld terminal or PC with operating program, continuous from 0 to 999 s
• Additionally for HART and PROFIBUS PA: via DIP switch on the electronic insert, switch position
"on" = set value and "off"
• Factory setting: 2 s
Data of the FOUNDATION Basic data

Fieldbus interface
Device Type 1009F (hex)
Device Revision 06 (hex)
DD Revision 01 (hex)
CFF Revision 01 (hex)
ITK Version 5.0
ITK Certification Driver No. IT054700
Link-Master (LAS) capable Yes
Link Master / Basic Device Yes; factory setting: Basic Device

selectable
Number of VCRs 44
Number of Link Objects in VFD 50
Virtual communication references (VCRs)
Permanent Entries 44
Client VCRs 0
Server VCRs 5
Source VCRs 8
Sink VCRs 0
Subscriber VCRs 12
Publisher VCRs 19
Link settings
Slot time 4
Min. inter PDU delay 12
Max. response delay 10
Transducer Blocks
Block Content Output values
TRD1 Block Contains all parameters related to the measurement • Pressure, flow or level (channel 1)
• Process temperature (channel 2)
Service Block Contains service information • Pressure after damping (channel 3)

• Pressure peakhold indicator
(channel 4)
• Counter for max. pressure
transgressions (channel 5)
Dp Flow Block Contains flow and totalizer parameter Totalizer 1 (channel 6)
Diagnostic Block Contains diagnostic information Error code via DI channels

(channel 0 to 16)
Display Block Contains parameters to configure the onsite display No output values
Endress+Hauser 13
Deltabar S
Function blocks
Block Content Number Execution time Functionality

of blocks
Resource Block The Resource Block contains all the data that 1 enhanced
uniquely identify the device. It is an electronic
version of a nameplate of the device.
Analog Input The AI Block receives the measuring data from the 3 45 ms enhanced
Block 1 Sensor Block, (selectable via a channel number) and
Analog Input makes the data available to other function blocks at
Block 2 its output. Enhancement: digital outputs for process
alarms, fail safe mode.
Digital Input This block contains the discrete data of the Diagnose 1 40 ms standard
Block Block (selectable via a channel number 0 to 16) and
provides them for other blocks at the output.
Digital Output This block converts the discrete input and thus 1 60 ms standard
Block initiates an action (selectable via a channel number)
in the DP Flow Block or in the Service Block.
Channel 1 resets the counter for max. pressure
transgressions..
PID Block The PID Block serves as a proportional-integral- 1 120 ms standard

derivative controller and is used almost universally
for closed-loop-control in the field including cascade
and feedforward. Input IN can be indicated on the
display. The selection is performed in the Display
Block (DISPLAY_MAIN_LINE_CONTENT).
Arithmetic This block is designed to permit simple use of popular 1 50 ms standard

Block measurement math functions. The user does not have
to know how to write equations. The math algorithm
is selected by name, chosen by the user for the
function to be performed.
Input Selector The Input Selector Block facilitates the selection of up 1 35 ms standard
Block to four inputs and generates an output based on the
configured action. This block normally receives its
inputs from AI Blocks. The block performs maximum,
minimum, average and ‘first good’ signal selection.
Inputs IN1 to IN4 can be indicated on the display.
The selection is performed in the Display Block
(DISPLAY_MAIN_LINE_CONTENT).
Signal The Signal Characterizer Block has two sections, 1 30 ms standard

Characterizer each with an output that is a non-linear function of
Block the respective input. The non-linear function is
generated by a single look-up table with 21 arbitrary
x-y pairs.
Integrator The Integrator Block integrates a variable as a 1 35 ms standard

Block function of the time or accumulates the counts from a
Pulse Input Block. The block may be used as a
totalizer that counts up until reset or as a batch
totalizer that has a setpoint, where the integrated or
accumulated value is compared to pre-trip and trip
settings, generating a binary signal when the setpoint
is reached.
Analog Alarm This block contains all process alarm conditions 1 35 ms standard
Block (working like a comparator) and represents them at
the output.
Additional function block information:
Instantiate Function Block YES
Number of instantiate blocks 15
14 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Power supply
Electrical connection Note!
• When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the corresponding
national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or Control Drawings.  ä 85,
"Safety Instructions" and "Installation/Control Drawings" sections.
• Devices with integrated overvoltage protection must be grounded.  ä 28.
• Protective circuits against reverse polarity, HF influences and overvoltage peaks are installed.
4 to 20 mA HART
➀ ➅ 10.5 V DC
➆ 11.5 V DC
4…20 mA
Test
Test
➁ 4... 20mA Test
➂ ➄
➇
4... 20mA Test
➃
Electrical connection 4 to 20 mA HART

1 Housing
2 Jumper for 4 to 20 mA test signal. See  ä 17, "Measuring a 4 to 20 mA test signal" section.
3 Internal ground terminal
4 External ground terminal
5 4 to 20 mA test signal between positive and test terminal
6 Minimum supply voltage = 10.5 V DC, jumper is set as illustrated in the diagram.
7 Minimum supply voltage = 11.5 V DC, jumper is inserted in "Test" position.
8 Devices with integrated overvoltage protection are labeled OVP (overvoltage protection) here ( ä 28).
PROFIBUS PA
The digital communication signal is transmitted to the bus via a 2-wire connection. The bus also provides the
power supply. For further information on the network structure and grounding, and for further bus system
components such as bus cables, see the relevant documentation, e.g. Operating Instructions BA034S
"PROFIBUS DP/PA: Guidelines for planning and commissioning" and the PNO Guideline.
Cable specifications:
• Use a twisted, shielded two-wire cable, preferably cable type A
Note!
For further information on the cable specifications, see Operating Instructions BA034S
"PROFIBUS DP/PA: Guidelines for planning and commissioning", the PNO Guideline 2.092
PROFIBUS PA User and Installation Guideline" and IEC 61158-2 (MBP).
Endress+Hauser 15
Deltabar S
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
The digital communication signal is transmitted to the bus via a 2-wire connection. The bus also provides the
power supply. For further information on the network structure and grounding and for further bus system
components such as bus cables, see the relevant documentation, e.g. Operating Instructions BA013S
"FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview" and the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Guideline.
Cable specifications:
• Use a twisted, shielded two-wire cable, preferably cable type A
Note!
For further information on the cable specifications, see Operating Instructions BA013S "FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Overview", FOUNDATION Fieldbus Guideline and IEC 61158-2 (MBP).
Devices with Harting plug Han7D
+
7
+ – – 8 6
1
2 5
3 4
Han7D
+ –
Left: electrical connection for devices with Harting plug Han7D

Right: view of the plug connector at the device
Material: CuZn
Devices with M12 plug
+ –
– +
M12
+ –
Left: electrical connection for devices with M12 plug

Endress+Hauser offers the following accessories for devices with an M12 plug:
Plug-in jack M 12x1, straight
• Material: body PA; coupling nut CuZn, nickel-plated
• Degree of protection (fully locked): IP67
• Order number: 52006263
Plug-in jack M 12x1, elbowed
• Material: body PBT/PA; coupling nut GD-Zn, nickel-plated
Cable 4x0.34 mm² (20 AWG) with M12 socket, elbowed, screw plug, length 5 m (16 ft)
• Material: body PUR; coupling nut CuSn/Ni; cable PVC
16 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Devices with 7/8" plug
–
+ –
7/8” +
+–
P01-xxx7xxxx-04-xx-xx-xx-003
Left: electrical connection for devices with 7/8" plug

External thread: 7/8 - 16 UNC

• Material: housing / body CuZn, nickel-plated
• Degree of protection: IP68
Cable gland
Approval Type Clamping area
Standard, II1/2G Exia, IS Plastic M20x1.5 5 to 10 mm (0.2 to 0.39 in)

ATEX II1/2D, II1/3D,
II1/2GD Exia, II1GD Exia Metal M20x1.5 (Ex e) 7 to 10.5 mm (0.28 to 0.41 in)
II3G Ex nA
Terminals
For wire cross-sections of 0.5 to 2.5 mm² (20 to 14 AWG)
Measuring a 4 to 20 mA test signal

A 4 to 20 mA test signal may be measured via the positive and test terminal without interrupting the
measurement. The minimum supply voltage of the device can be reduced by simply changing the position of
the jumper. As a result, operation is also possible with lower voltage sources. Observe the position of the jumper
in accordance with the following table.
Jumper position for test signal Description
– Measuring 4 to 20 mA test signal via the plus and test terminal:

Test possible. (Thus, the output current can be measured without
interruption via the diode.)
– Delivery status
– Minimum supply voltage: 11.5 V DC
– Measuring 4 to 20 mA test signal via the plus and test terminal:

Test not possible.
– Minimum supply voltage: 10.5 V DC
Endress+Hauser 17
Deltabar S
Supply voltage Note!

• When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the corresponding
national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or Installation or Control Drawings.
• All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available upon request. The
Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved for use in explosion hazardous areas.
 ä 85, "Safety Instructions" and "Installation/Control Drawings" sections.
4 to 20 mA HART
• Version for non-hazardous areas, jumper for 4 to 20 mA test signal in "Test" position
(delivery status): 11.5 to 45 V DC
• Version for non-hazardous areas, jumper for 4 to 20 mA test signal in "Non-test" position:
10.5 to 45 V DC
PROFIBUS PA
• Version for non-hazardous areas: 9 to 32 VDC
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• Version for non-hazardous areas: 9 to 32 V DC
Current consumption • PROFIBUS PA: 13 mA ± 1 mA, switch-on current corresponds to IEC 61158-2, Clause 21
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus: 15 mA ± 1 mA, switch-on current corresponds to IEC 61158-2, Clause 21
Cable entry  ä 69 ff, feature 30 "Housing; Cable entry; Protection".
Cable specification • Endress+Hauser recommends using shielded, twisted-pair two-wire cables.

• Terminals for core cross-sections 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (20 to 14 AWG)
• Cable outer diameter: 5 to 9 mm (0.2 to 0.35 in)
Residual ripple Without influence on 4 to 20 mA signal up to 5 % residual ripple within the permitted voltage range
[according to HART hardware specification HCF_SPEC-54 (DIN IEC 60381-1)]
Influence of power supply 0.0006% of URL/1 V
18 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Performance characteristics – general

Reference operating • As per IEC 60770
conditions • Ambient temperature TA = constant, in the range of: +21 to +33 °C (+70 to 91 °F)
• Humidity = constant, in the range of: 5 to 80 % rH
• Ambient pressure pA = constant, in the range of: 860 to 1060 mbar (12.47 to 15.37 psi)
• Position of the measuring cell = constant, in range: horizontally 1°
• Input of LOW SENSOR TRIM and HIGH SENSOR TRIM for lower range value and upper range value
• Zero based span
• Process isolating diaphragm material:
– PMD75: AISI 316L/1.4435, Alloy C276, gold-rhodium-coated, Monel
– FMD77, FMD78: AISI 316L/1.4435
– PMD70, FMD76: Al2O3 (aluminum oxide ceramic)
• Filling oil: silicone oil
• Side flange material PMD75: AISI 316L/1.4435
• Supply voltage: 24 V DC ± 3 V DC
• Load with HART: 250 
Long-term stability 1 year 5 years 10 year
Measuring ranges % of URL
10 mbar (0.15 psi) ±0.150 -- --
100 mbar (1.5 psi) ±0.180 -- --

500 mbar (7.5 psi) ±0.025 ±0.050 ±0.075
3 bar (45 psi) ±0.038 ±0.075 ±0.150
16 bar (240 psi) ±0.025 ±0.110 ±0.210
Influence of the installation • PMD70, FMD76:  3 mbar (0.045 psi) 1, 3

position • PMD75: 4 mbar (0.06 psi) 1, 3
• FMD77: 32 mbar (0.48 psi) 2, 3
1) Device is rotated vertically to the axis of the process isolating diaphragm.

2) Device rotated vertically to the process isolating diaphragm of the flange.
3) The value is doubled for devices with inert oil.
Note!
Position-dependent zero shift can be corrected.  ä 23, "General installation instructions" section and
 ä 65 ff, "Installation instructions, diaphragm seal systems" section
Vibration effects Device Housing Test standard Vibration effects
PMD70/ Optional onsite display on GL reference accuracy to

FMD76 the side (T14) 10 to 18 Hz: ±4 mm (0.16 in);
18 to 500 Hz: 5 g
PMD75 Optional onsite display on reference accuracy to

the side (T14) 10 to 38 Hz: ±0.35 mm
(0.01 in);
IEC 61298-3 38 to 2000 Hz: 2 g
PMD75 Optional onsite display on reference accuracy to

the top (T15) 10 to 60 Hz: ±0.35 mm
(0.01 in); 60 to 2000 Hz: 5 g
Endress+Hauser 19
Deltabar S
Performance characteristics – metal process isolating

diaphragms
Reference accuracy – The reference accuracy comprises the non-linearity (terminal based), hysteresis and non-reproducibility as per
PMD75, FMD77, FMD78 IEC 60770. The data refer to the calibrated span.
The following applies for the root-extracting characteristic curve:
The accuracy data of the Deltabar S are taken into the accuracy calculation of the flow rate with a factor of 0.5.
PMD75
Measuring cell % of the set span
10 mbar (0.15 psi) • TD 1:1 = ±0.15

30 mbar (0.45 psi) • TD > 1:1 = ±0.15 x TD
• TD 1:1 to TD 4:1 = ±0.075

100 mbar (1.5 psi)
• TD > 4:1 = (0.012 x TD + 0.027)
• TD 1:1 to TD 15:1 = ±0.075

500 mbar (7.5 psi)
• TD > 15:1 = (0.0015 x TD + 0.053)
Platinum version:
• TD 1:1 = ±0.05
00 mbar (1.5 psi)
FMD77, FMD78
Measuring cell FMD77 FMD78
% of the set span (influence of the diaphragm seal included)

• TD 1:1 to TD 4:1 = ±0.15 • TD 1:1 to TD 4:1 = ±0.15
100 mbar (1.5 psi)
• TD > 4:1 = (0.03 x TD + 0.03) • TD > 4:1 = (0.03 x TD + 0.03)
500 mbar • TD 1:1 to TD 15:1 = ±0.075 • TD 1:1 to TD 4:1 = ±0.15

(7.5 psi) • TD > 15:1 = (0.0015 x TD + 0.053) • TD > 4:1 = (0.02 x TD + 0.07)
3 bar (45 psi)
16 bar (240 psi)
• TD 1:1 to TD 4:1 = ±0.15
40 bar (600 psi) 
• TD > 4:1 = (0.02 x TD + 0.07)
Total performance – PMD75 The "Total performance" specification comprises the non-linearity including hysteresis, non-reproducibility, the
thermal change of the zero point as well as the influence of the static pressure (pst = 70 bar (1050 psi)).
All specifications apply to the temperature range –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F).
Measuring cell AISI 316L/1.4435, Alloy, gold-rhodium or Tantalum process isolating diaphragm
Monel process isolating diaphragm
% of the set span
500 mbar
0.15 0.30
(7.5 psi) to TD 2:1
Total error The total error comprises the long-term stability and the total performance.
All specifications apply to the temperature range –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F) and a turn down of 1:1.
Measuring cell AISI 316L/1.4435, Alloy, gold-rhodium or Tantalum process isolating diaphragm
Monel process isolating diaphragm
% of URL/year
10 mbar (0.15 psi)

0.33 
30 mbar (0.45 psi)
100 mbar (1.5 psi) 0.33 0.48
500 mbar (7.5 psi) 0.20 0.35
20 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Warm-up period – • 4 to 20 mA HART: < 10 s

PMD75, FMD77, FMD78 • PROFIBUS PA: 6 s
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus: 50 s
Influence of the operating Measuring AISI 316L/1.4435, Alloy, gold-rhodium coated Tantalum process isolating diaphragm
pressure on zero point and cell or Monel process isolating diaphragm
span – PMD75, FMD77,
FMD78 Influence of the Influence of the Influence of the Influence of the
operating pressure on operating pressure on operating pressure on operating pressure on
the zero point the span the zero point the span
10 mbar 0.15 % of URL/7 bar 0.035 % of URL/7 bar

 
(0.15 psi) (105 psi) (105 psi)
30 mbar 0.35 % of URL/70 bar 0.14 % of URL/70 bar

 
(0.45 psi) (1050 psi) (1050 psi)
100 mbar 0.15 % of URL/70 bar 0.14 % of URL/70 bar 0.42 % of URL/70 bar 0.42 % of URL/70 bar
(1.5 psi) (1050 psi) (1050 psi) (1050 psi) (1050 psi)
500 mbar
(7.5 psi)
3 bar
(45 psi) 0.075 % of URL/70 bar 0.14 % of URL/70 bar 0.14 % of URL/70 bar 0.14 % of URL/70 bar
16 bar (1050 psi) (1050 psi) (1050 psi) (1050 psi)
(240 psi)
40 bar
(600 psi)
Note!
The influence of the operating pressure on the zero point can be corrected.
Thermal change of the zero Measuring cell –10 to +60 °C (14 to 140 °F)
output and the output span –
PMD75 AISI 316L/1.4435, Alloy, gold-rhodium Tantalum process isolating diaphragm
coated or Monel process isolating
diaphragm
% of the set span
10 mbar (0.15 psi),

(0.31 x TD + 0.06) 
30 mbar (0.45 psi)
100 mbar (1.5 psi) (0.18 x TD + 0.02) (0.24 x TD + 0.06)
500 mbar (7.5 psi),

(0.08 x TD + 0.05)
3 bar (45 psi)
16 bar (240 psi) (0.1 x TD + 0.1)
40 bar (600 psi) (0.08 x TD + 0.05)
Measuring cell –40 to -10 °C (-40 to 14 °F),

+60 to +85 °C (140 to 185 °F)
all process isolating diaphragm materials
% of the set span
10 mbar (0.15 psi),

(0.45 x TD + 0.1)
30 mbar (0.45 psi)
100 mbar (1.5 psi) (0.3 x TD + 0.15)

500 mbar (7.5 psi),
(0.12 x TD + 0.1)
3 bar (45 psi)
16 bar (240 psi) (0.15 x TD + 0.2)

40 bar (600 psi) (0.37 x TD + 0.1)
Endress+Hauser 21
Deltabar S
Performance characteristics – ceramic process isolating

diaphragms
Reference accuracy – The reference accuracy comprises the non-linearity (terminal based), hysteresis and non-reproducibility as per
PMD70, FMD76 IEC 60770. The data refer to the calibrated span.
The following applies for the root-extracting characteristic curve: The accuracy data of the Deltabar S are taken
into the accuracy calculation of the flow rate with a factor of 0.5.
• TD 1:1 = ±0.15
25 mbar (0.375 psi)
• TD > 1:1 = ±0.15 x TD
• TD 1:1 to TD 4:1 = ±0.075

100 mbar (1.5 psi)
• TD > 4:1 = (0.012 x TD + 0.027)
• TD 1:1 to TD 15:1 = ±0.075
500 mbar (7.5 psi), 3 bar (45 psi)
• TD > 15:1 = (0.0015 x TD + 0.05252)
Platinum version:
• TD 1:1 = ±0.05
100 mbar (1.5 psi), 500 mbar (7.5 psi), 3 bar (45 psi)
Total performance – The "Total performance" specification comprises the non-linearity including hysteresis, non-reproducibility, the
PMD70, FMD76 thermal change of the zero point as well as the influence of the static pressure (pst = 70 bar (1050 psi)).
500 mbar (7.5 psi) • 0.15
Total error The total error comprises the long-term stability and the total performance.
Measuring cell % of URL/year
25 mbar (0.375 psi), 100 mbar (1.5 psi) • 0.33

500 mbar (7.5 psi), 3 bar (45 psi) • 0.20
Warm-up period – • 4 to 20 mA HART: < 10 s

PMD70, FMD76 • PROFIBUS PA: 6 s
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus: 50 s
Influence of the operating Measuring cell Influence of the operating pressure on the Influence of the operating pressure on the
pressure on zero point and zero point span
span – PMD70, FMD76
25 mbar (0.375 psi) 0.7 % of URL/7 bar (105 psi) 0.14 % of URL/7 bar (105 psi)
3 bar (45 psi) 0.075 % of URL/70 bar (1050 psi) 0.14 % of URL/70 bar (1050 psi)
Note!
The influence of the operating pressure on the zero point can be corrected.
22 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Thermal change of the zero Measuring cell –10 to +60 °C (14 to 140 °F) –20 to –10 °C (-4 to 14 °F),
output and the output span – +60 to +85 °C (140 to 185 °F)
PMD70, FMD76
% of the set span
25 mbar (0.375 psi) (0.35 x TD + 0.05) (0.3 x TD + 0.15)
100 mbar
(0.05 x TD + 0.05) (0.08 x TD + 0.07)
(1.5 psi)
Operating conditions (Installation)

General installation • The position-dependent zero point shift can be corrected directly at the device via operating keys, and also
instructions in hazardous areas in the case of devices with external operation. Diaphragm seals also shift the zero point,
depending on the installation position ( ä 65 ff, "Installation instructions, diaphragm seal systems"
section).
• The housing of the Deltabar S can be rotated up to 380°. See  ä 26, "Turning the housing" section.
• Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls.
See  ä 24, "Wall and pipe-mounting" section.
• When measuring in media containing solids, such as dirty liquids, installing separators and drain valves is
useful for capturing and removing sediment.
• Using a three-valve or five-valve manifold allows for easy commissioning, installation and maintenance
without interrupting the process.
• General recommendations for the pressure piping can be found in DIN 19210 "Methods for measurement
of fluid flow; differential piping for flow measurement devices" or the corresponding national or international
standards.
• Install the pressure piping with a continuous gradient of at least 10%.
• When routing the pressure piping outdoors, ensure sufficient anti-freeze protection, e.g. by using pipe heat
tracing.
• For FMD77 and FMD78:  ä 65 ff, "Installation instructions, diaphragm seal system" section.
• Use flushing rings for flange and cell diaphragm seals if buildup or clogging can be expected at the diaphragm
seal connection. The flushing ring can be fitted between the process connection and diaphragm seal. Material
buildup in front of the process isolating diaphragm can be flushed away, and the pressure chamber vented,
via the two lateral flushing holes.
Measuring arrangement Flow measurement

• The PMD70 and PMD75 are best suited to flow measurement.
• Measuring arrangement for gases: Mount device above the measuring point.
• Measuring arrangement for liquids and vapors: Mount device below the measuring point.
• For flow measurement in vapors, mount the condensate traps at the same level as the tapping point and at
the same distance from Deltabar S.
Level measurement
• PMD70, PMD75, FMD76 and FMD77 are best suited to level measurement in open tanks. All Deltabar S
devices are suitable for level measurement in closed tanks.
Measuring arrangement for level measurement in open tanks

• PMD70, PMD75: Mount device below the lower measuring connection. The negative side is open to
atmospheric pressure.
• FMD76, FMD77: Mount device directly on the tank. The negative side is open to atmospheric pressure.
Measuring arrangement for level measurement in closed tanks and closed tanks with superimposed vapor
• PMD70, PMD75: Mount device below the lower measuring connection. Always connect the negative side
above the maximum level via pressure piping.
• FMD76, FMD77: Mount device directly on the tank. Always connect the negative side above the maximum
level via pressure piping.
• In the case of level measurement in closed tanks with superimposed vapor, a condensate trap ensures the
pressure remains constant on the minus side.
Endress+Hauser 23
Deltabar S
Pressure measurement
• The PMD70 and PMD75 and FMD78 are best suited to differential pressure measurement.
• Measuring arrangement for gases: Mount device above the measuring point.
• Measuring arrangement for liquids and vapors: Mount device below the measuring point.
• For differential pressure measurement in vapor, mount the condensate traps at the same level as the tapping
point and at the same distance from Deltabar S.
Wall and pipe-mounting Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls.
 ä 69 ff, feature 110, "Additional option 2".
Note!
If a valve block is used, its dimensions should also be taken into consideration.
37.5
➀
135
74
12 74
4 6
10
Mounting bracket for wall and pipe-mounting

Materials: Screws and washers A2-70, bracket and retainer 1.4301.
The material of the screws used to secure the device depend on the order code.
A bracket including mounting accessories for pipe mounting is included with the device.
1 Device mounting
24 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
"Separate housing" version With the "separate housing" version, you are able to mount the housing with the electronics insert at a distance
from the measuring point. This version facilitates trouble-free measurement:
• Under particularly difficult measuring conditions (at installation locations that are cramped or difficult to
access)
• If rapid cleaning of the measuring point is required
• If the measuring point is exposed to vibrations
You can choose between different cable versions:
• PE (2 m (6.6 ft), 5 m (16 ft) and 10 m (33 ft))
• FEP (5 m (16 ft)).
 ä 70 ff, feature 110, "Additional option 2", version "G".
For the dimensions, see  ä 51.
FEP cable:
IP 69K
IP 66/68 NEMA 4/6P 4 IP xx
(see chapter
PE cable: “Ordering information”)
IP 66/68 NEMA 4/6P
3
r ³ 120 mm
1
2
P01-xMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-en-010
In the case of the "separate housing" version, the sensor is delivered with the process connection and cable ready
mounted. The housing and a mounting bracket are enclosed as separate units. The cable is provided with a socket at both
ends. These sockets are simply connected to the housing and the sensor.
1 Process connection with sensor
2 Cable, both ends are fitted with a socket
3 Mounting bracket provided, suitable for pipe and wall mounting
4 Housing with electronic insert
Degree of protection for the process connection and sensor with the use of
• FEP cable:
– IP 69K
– IP 66 NEMA 4/6P
– IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h) NEMA 4/6P
• PE cable:
– IP 66 NEMA 4/6P
– IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h) NEMA 4/6P
Technical data of the PE and FEP cable:
• Minimum bending radius: 120 mm (4.72 in)
• Cable extraction force: max. 450 N (101 lbf)
• Resistance to UV light
Use in hazardous area:
• Intrinsically safe installations (Ex ia/IS)
• FM/CSA IS: for Div. 1 installation only
Endress+Hauser 25
Deltabar S
Reduction of the installation height

If the separate housing is used, the installation height of the process connection is reduced compared to the
dimensions of the standard version.
r ³ 120 mm r ³ 120 mm r ³ 120 mm
T14 T17
45
45
ø54.1
➀ ➀ ➀
81
+– +– +– +– +–
Reduction of the installation height of the process connection when using the separate housing.
1 Process connection adapter.
Turning the housing The housing can be rotated up to 380° by loosening the Allen screw.
Your benefits
• Simple mounting by optimally aligning the housing
• Good, accessible device operation
• Optimum readability of the onsite display (optional).
FIELD TERMINALS
max. 380°
P01-PMx7xxxx-17-xx-xx-xx-000
Aligning the housing by releasing the setscrew

T14 and T15 housing: 2 mm (0.08 in) Allen screw; T17 housing: 3 mm (0.12 in) Allen screw
26 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Oxygen applications Oxygen and other gases can react explosively to oils, grease and plastics, such that, among other things, the
following precautions must be taken:
– All components of the system, such as measuring devices, must be cleaned in accordance with the BAM
(DIN 19247) requirements.
– Dependent on the materials used, a certain maximum temperature and a maximum pressure for oxygen
applications must not be exceeded.
The devices suitable for gaseous oxygen applications are listed in the following table with the specification pmax.
Order code for devices 1 cleaned for pmax for oxygen applications Tmax for oxygen
oxygen applications applications
PMD70 – * * * ** * * * 2 * *, 30 bar (450 psi) 60 °C (140 °F)

Devices with 500 mbar (7.5 psi) or
3000 mbar (45 psi) measuring cell
PMD70 – * * * ** * * * 2 * *, PN of the measuring cell 60 °C (140 °F)

100 mbar (1.5 psi) measuring cell
PMD75 – * * * ** * * * K * * 160 bar (2400 psi) 85 °C (185 °F)
PMD75 – * * * ** * * * 2 * * 160 bar (2400 psi) 60 °C (140 °F)
PMD75 – * * * ** * * * 3 * * 160 bar (2400 psi) 60 °C (140 °F)

FMD76 – * * * ** * T * * *, 30 bar (450 psi) 60 °C (140 °F)
3000 mbar (45 psi) measuring cell
FMD76 – * * * ** * T * * *, PN of the measuring cell 60 °C (140 °F)
100 mbar (1.5 psi) measuring cell
FMD77 – * * * ** T * F * * PN of the flange 60 °C (140 °F)
FMD78 – * * * ** * ** 4 * * 90 bar (1350 psi) 85 °C (185 °F)

FMD78 – * * * ** * ** D * *
1) Only devices, not accessories or enclosed accessories.
Ultrapure gas applications Endress+Hauser also offers devices for special applications, such as ultrapure gas, cleaned from oil and grease.
No special restrictions regarding the process conditions apply to these devices.
 ä 69 ff, PMD70 and PMD75: feature 80 "Seal", FMD76 and FMD77: feature 70 "Process connection low-
pressure side, material, seal".
Applications with hydrogen With regard to materials in which hydrogen formation takes place, hydrogen atoms can diffuse through the
metal process isolating diaphragms. This can result in incorrect measurement results.
Endress+Hauser offers process isolating diaphragms with gold-rhodium coating for this application.
 ä 73 "Ordering information PMD75",  ä 79 "Ordering information FMD77" or  ä 82 "Ordering
information FMD78", feature 60 "Process isolating diaphragm material".
Endress+Hauser 27
Deltabar S
Operating conditions (Environment)
Ambient temperature range • PMD75, FMD77, FMD78: –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F), devices for lower temperatures on request
• PMD70, FMD76: –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
• Onsite display: –20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)
Extended temperature application range with restrictions in optical properties such as display speed and
contrast: –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F)
• Separate housing: -20 to +60 °C (-4 to +140 °F) (installation without insulation)
For devices for use in hazardous areas, see Safety instructions, Installation or Control Drawing ( ä 85,
"Safety Instructions" and "Installation/Control Drawings" sections).
The device can be used in this temperature range. The values of the specification, such as thermal change, may
be exceeded.
Storage temperature range • –40 to +90 °C (-40 to +194 °F)

• Onsite display: –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F)
• Separate housing: -40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F)
Degree of protection •  ä 69 ff, feature 30 "Housing; Cable entry; Degree of protection".

• Degree of protection IP 68 for T17 housing: 1.83 mH2O for 24 h
• Separate housing  ä 25
Climate class Class 4K4H (air temperature: –20 to 55 °C (-4 to 131 °F), relative humidity: 4 to 100 %)
fulfilled as per DIN EN 60721-3-4 (condensation possible)
Vibration resistance Device/accessory Housing Test standard Vibration resistance

PMD70/ Optional onsite display on GL Guaranteed for:
FMD76 the side (T14) 2 to 18 Hz: ±4 mm (0.16 in);
18 to 500 Hz: 5 g in all 3 planes
PMD75 Optional onsite display on IEC 61298-3 Guaranteed for:

the side (T14) 10 to 60 Hz: ±0.35 mm (0.0138 in);
PMD75 Optional onsite display on
the top (T15)
With mounting bracket IEC 61298-3 Guaranteed for:

10 to 60 Hz: ±0.15 mm (0.0059 in);
Electromagnetic compatibility • Electromagnetic compatibility to EN 61326 and NAMUR recommendation EMC (NE21). For details refer
to the Declaration of Conformity.
• With enhanced immunity against electromagnetic fields as per EN 61000-4-3:
30 V/m with closed cover (for devices with T14 or T15 housing)
• Maximum deviation: < 0.5 % of span 1
• All EMC measurements were performed with a turn down (TD) = 2:1.
1) Larger deviations possible with PMD70 with 25 mbar (0.375 psi) or 100 mbar (1.5 psi) measuring cell
Overvoltage protection • Overvoltage protection:

(optional) – Nominal functioning DC voltage: 600 V
– Nominal discharge current: 10 kA
• Surge current check î = 20 kA as per DIN EN 60079-14: 8/20 s satisfied
• Arrester AC current check I = 10 A satisfied
 ä 70 ff, feature 100 "Additional option 1" and feature 110 "Additional option 2", version "M Overvoltage
protection".
Note!
Devices with integrated overvoltage protection must be grounded.
28 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Operating conditions (Process)
Process temperature limits Process connection material

(temperature at transmitter)
Device 316L / Alloy C C22.8 PVDF
PMD70 -20 to +85 °C (-4 to 185 °F) -10 to +85 °C (+14 to 185 °F) -10 to +60 °C (+14 to 140 °F)
PMD75 -40 to +85 °C (-40 to 185 °F) -10 to +85 °C (+14 to 185 °F) -
FMD76 -20 to +85 °C (-4 to 185 °F) -10 to +85 °C (+14 to 185 °F) -10 to +60 °C (+14 to 140 °F)
FMD77 / FMD78 Dependent on the diaphragm seal and filling oil: up to + 400 °C (752 °F)
Note!
• For oxygen applications, observe  ä 27, "Oxygen applications" section.
• PMD70, FMD76, PMD75 and FMD78: Observe the process temperature range of the seal.
See also the following section: "Process temperature range, seals".
• FMD77 and FMD78: Observe the temperature application limits of the diaphragm seal oil. See  ä 64,
"Diaphragm seal filling oils" section.
• FMD77 and FMD78: Do not use diaphragm seals with 0.09 mm (0.0035 in) PTFE foil on AISI 316L
(1.4435/1.4405) for vacuum applications, upper temperature limit +204 °C (+399 °F).
Process temperature range, PMD70 (with ceramic process isolating diaphragms)

seals
Versions for feature 80 in the order Seal Process temperature range
code
A FKM Viton –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

B EPDM –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
D Kalrez, Compound 4079 +5 to +85 °C (+41 to +185 °F)
E Chemraz, Compound 505 –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

1 FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease –10 to +85 °C (+14 to +185 °F)
2 FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
FMD76 (with ceramic process isolating diaphragms)
Versions for feature 70 in the order Seal Process temperature range

code
B, D, F, U FKM Viton –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
K, L EPDM –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

FDA 21 CFR 177.2600
M, N Kalrez, Compound 4079 +5 to +85 °C (+41 to +185 °F)
P, Q Chemraz, Compound 505 –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

S FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease –10 to +85 °C (+14 to +185 °F)
T FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
G FKM Viton/PVDF inlay –10 to +60 °C (+14...+140 °F)
PMD75 (with metal process isolating diaphragms)
Versions for feature 80 in the Seal Process temperature range 1

order code
A FKM Viton –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
C PTFE –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F)

F NBR –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
H Copper –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F)
Endress+Hauser 29
Deltabar S
Versions for feature 80 in the Seal Process temperature range 1

order code
K Copper, cleaned for oxygen service –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
1 FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease –10 to +85 °C (+14 to +185 °F)
2 FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
3 PTFE, cleaned for oxygen applications –20 to +60 °C (-4 to +140 °F)
FMD77 (with diaphragm seal)
Versions for feature 70 in the Seal on the LP side (–) Process temperature range 1
order code
B, D, F, G FKM Viton –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)
H, J PTFE –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F)
K, L EPDM –40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185 °F)
M, N Kalrez, Compound 6375 +5 to +85 °C (+41 to +185 °F)
P, Q Chemraz, Compound 505 –20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185 °F)

S FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease –10 to +85 °C (+14 to +185 °F)
T FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
Pressure specifications • The maximum pressure for the measuring device depends on the lowest-rated element with regard to
pressure.
See the following sections:
–  ä 8, "Measuring range" section
– "Mechanical construction" section.
The MWP (maximum working pressure) is specified on the nameplate. This value refers to a reference
temperature of 20°C (68°F), or 100°F (38 °C) for ANSI flanges, and may be applied to the device for an
unlimited time. Observe pressure-temperature dependency.
• The pressure values permitted at higher temperatures can be found in the following standards:
– EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab. 18 1
– ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2-2.2 F316
– ASME B 16.5a – 1998 Tab. 2.3.8 N10276
– JIS B 2220
• For PMD70 and PMD75, the MWP applies for the temperature ranges specified in the "Ambient temperature
range" ( ä 28) and "Process temperature limits" ( ä 29) sections.
• The test pressure corresponds to the over pressure limit of the measuring device (OPL = 1.5 x MWP) and
may only be applied temporarily so that no permanent damage develops.
• The Pressure Equipment Directive (EC Directive 97/23/EC) uses the abbreviation "PS". The abbreviation
"PS" corresponds to the MWP (maximum working pressure) of the measuring device.
• In the case of sensor range and process connections where the over pressure limit (OPL) of the process
connection is smaller than the nominal value of the sensor, the device is set at the factory, at the very
maximum, to the OPL value of the process connection. If you want to use the entire sensor range, select a
process connection with a higher OPL value (1.5 x PN; PN = MWP).
• In oxygen applications, the values for "pmax and Tmax for oxygen applications" as per  ä 27, "Oxygen
applications" may not be exceeded.
1) With regard to their stability-temperature property, the materials 1.4435 and 1.4404 are grouped together under 13EO
in EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab. 18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.
30 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Mechanical construction
Dimensions of T14 housing,
optional display on the side 152
111 111
FIELD TERMINALS
H
P01-PMx7xxx-06-00-xx-xx-000
Front view, left-hand side view, top view

 See the process connection in question for installation height H. Housing weight see  ä 51.
Dimensions of T15 housing,

optional display on the top
155
115 127
H
H
P01-FMB70xxx-06-00-xx-xx-002

Dimensions of T17 housing

(hygienic), optional display on 132
the side 102 115
H
P01-PMx7xxxx-06-00-xx-xx-001

Endress+Hauser 31
Deltabar S
Process connections PMD70 Note!

with ceramic process isolating Some device versions have CRN approval. For a CRN-approved device, a CRN-approved process connection
diaphragms ( ä 70, feature 70 "Process connection") has to be ordered with a CSA approval ( ä 69, feature 10
"Approval"). These devices are fitted with a separate plate bearing the registration number 0F10524.5C.
+ – – +
7/16-20 UNF +
SW8 / AF8 SW14 / AF14
M10
41.3
108
H
35,4
1/4-18 NPT
RC1/4
54 96
84
P01-PMD70xxx-06-09-xx-xx-000
Process connection PMD70, oval flange

H Device height see  ä 33, section "Device height H"
Versi Connection Mounting Material Accessories Weight 1

on
B 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF Steel C 22.8 2 vent valves included 4.0 kg
2
AISI 316L (1.4404)
D 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF AISI 316L
F 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF Alloy C276 3 Vent valves Alloy C276 (2.4819), 4.2 kg
see  ä 69, feature 110
"Additional option 2".
U RC 1/4 7/16-20 UNF AISI 316L 2 2 vent valves included 4.0 kg

AISI 316L (1.4404)
1 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 PN 160: M10 Steel C 22.8
2 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 PN 160: M10 AISI 316L 2
3 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 PN 160: M10 Alloy C276 3 Vent valves Alloy C276 (2.4819), 4.2 kg
see Page 69, feature 110
"Additional option 2".
1) Process connection weight, for housing weight see  ä 51

2) AISI 316L (1.4435)
3) Alloy C276 (2.4819)
32 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connections PMD70

with ceramic process isolating
diaphragms (continued)
+ –
7/16-20 UNF + PVDF

SW8 / AF8 SW14 / AF14
H
108
41.3
35,4 1/4-18 NPT
54 96
84
P01-PMD70xxx-06-09-xx-xx-001
Process connection PMD70, version G, PVDF Inlay, PN = 10 bar, process temperature T = –10 to +60°C (14 to +140°F)
H Device height see  ä 33, "Device height H" section
Version Connection Mounting Material Weight 1
G 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF PVDF 3.8 kg
1) Process connection weight, for housing weight see  ä 51
Device height H
Description Device height H
T14 housing, optional display on the side 253 mm (9.96 in)
T15 housing without display, flat cover 259 mm (10.2 in)
T15 housing with display, high cover 271.5 mm (10.7 in)

Endress+Hauser 33
Deltabar S
Process connections PMD75 Note!

with metal process isolating Some device versions have CRN approval. For a CRN-approved device, a CRN-approved process connection
Oval flange, connection 1/4-18 NPT or RC 1/4
7/16-20 UNF
M 10
SW8 / AF8 SW14 / AF14
H
41.3
+ – – +
85
1/4-18 NPT
RC1/4 35,4
54 106
85
100
7/16-20 UNF
M10 (M12)
H
SW8 / AF8 SW14 / AF14

41.3
72
+– 1/4-18 NPT –+
RC1/4 35,4
54 100
87
98
P01-PMD75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-005
Process connection PMD75,

Top: 10 mbar and 30 mbar measuring cell; bottom: measuring cell 100 mbar
Ver- Connection Mounting Material Accessories Weight 1

sion
B 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF Steel C 22.8 2 vent valves included 4.2 kg
2
AISI 316L (1.4404)
D 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF AISI 316L
F 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF Alloy C276 3 Vent valves Alloy C276 (2.4819), 4.5 kg
"Additional option 2"
U RC 1/4 7/16-20 UNF AISI 316L 2 2 vent valves included 4.2 kg

AISI 316L (1.4404)
1 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 – PN 160: M10 Steel C 22.8
– PN 420: M12
2 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 – PN 160: M10 AISI 316L 2

– PN 420: M12
3 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 – PN 160: M10 Alloy C276 3 Vent valves Alloy C276 (2.4819), 4.5 kg
– PN 420: M12  ä 72, feature 110 "Additional
option 2"
1) Weight of process connections without vent valves with 10 mbar (0.15 psi) or 30 mbar (0.45 psi) measuring cell,
process connections without vent valves with measuring cells 100 mbar (1.5 psi) weigh approx. 800 g (28.22 oz)
less. Housing weight see  ä 51.
2) AISI 316L/1.4435 or 1.4404
3) Alloy C276/2.4819
34 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connections PMD75 Oval flange, connection 1/4-18 NPT or RC 1/4, with side vent
with metal process isolating
SW8 / AF8 SW14 / AF14

7/16-20 UNF 1/4-18 NPT
H
35,4
41.3
+ – – +
85
42
1/4-18 NPT
RC1/4 SW14 / AF14
54 106
85 22
100
P01-PMD75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-004
Process connection PMD75, 10 mbar (0.15 psi) and 30 mbar (0.45 psi) measuring cell
7/16-20 UNF SW8 / AF8 SW14 / AF14

1/4-18 NPT
H
35,4
41.3
28
72
+– 1/4-18 NPT –+
RC1/4 SW14 / AF14
54 100
87 22
98
P01-PMD75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-003
Process connection PMD75, nominal value 100 mbar (1.5 psi)

Ver- Connection Mounting Material Accessories Weight 1

sion
C 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF Steel C 22.8 4 locking screws and 4.2 kg
2 vent valves
E 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF AISI 316L 2 AISI 316L (1.4404)
H 1/4-18 NPT IEC 61518 7/16-20 UNF Alloy C276 3 Vent valves Alloy C276 (2.4819), 4.5 kg
"Additional option 2"
V RC 1/4 7/16-20 UNF AISI 316L 2 4 locking screws and 4.2 kg

2 vent valves
AISI 316L (1.4404)
1) Weight of process connections without vent valves with 10 mbar (0.15 psi) or 30 mbar (0.45 psi) measuring cell,
process connections without vent valves with measuring cells 100 mbar (1.5 psi) weigh approx. 800 g (28.22 oz)
less. Housing weight see  ä 51.
2) PN 160 bar (2400 psi) measuring cells: AISI 316L/1.4435, PN 420 bar (6300 psi) measuring cells: AISI 316L
(1.4435 or 1.4404)
3) Alloy C276/2.4819
Endress+Hauser 35
Deltabar S
Process connections PMD75 Oval flange, prepared for diaphragm seal mount
with metal process isolating
7/16-20 UNF
H
➁
➀
➂
41.3
72
+– M6 –+
54 54
87
98
P01-PMD75xxx-06-09-xx-xx-002
Left: Process connection PMD75, version W, prepared for diaphragm seal mount
Right: Position of the copper ring seal
H Device height see the following section "Device height H"
1 Diaphragm seal attachment
2 Copper ring seal
3 Process isolating diaphragm
Device height H
Description Device height H 1
T14 housing, optional display on the side 217 mm (230 mm)
T15 housing without display, flat cover 223 mm (236 mm)

T15 housing with display, high cover 235.5 mm (248.5 mm)
T17 housing, optional display on the side 233 mm (246 mm)
1) Values for devices with 10 mbar (0.15 psi) and 30 mbar (0.45) psi measuring cell in brackets
36 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connection FMD76 Note!

with ceramic process isolating • Some device versions have CRN approval. For a CRN-approved device, a CRN-approved process connection
• FMD76 devices with an EN/DIN flange DN 80 PN 40, an ANSI flange 3" 150 lbs or a JIS flange 80 K 10 A
can only be mounted with an open-ended wrench.
EN/DIN flanges, connection dimensions as per EN 1092-1/DIN 2527
41
41.3
7/16-20 UNF
H
h
g2
2 1/4-18 NPT
ø46
b
g
k
D
P01-FMD76xxx-06-09-xx-xx-000
Process connection FMD76, high-pressure side: EN/DIN flange,

Low-pressure side: connection 1/4-18 NPT
Application limits for version "G" in feature 70 "Process connection low-pressure side" with PVDF Inlay:
PN = 10 bar (150 psi), process temperature limits T = –10 to +60°C (+14 to +140 °F)
H Device height see  ä 39, "Device height H, devices with flange" section
h Height of the device without flange thickness b
Flange 1 Boltholes
Version Material Nominal Shape 2 Nominal Diameter Thickness Raised Quan- Diameter Hole Flange
diameter pressure face tity circle weight 3
D b g g2 k
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
B AISI 316L DN 80 B1 (D) PN 10-40 200 24 138 8 18 160 5.3
D ECTFE 4 DN 80 – PN 10-40 200 24 – 8 18 160 5.3
E Alloy C276 5 DN 80 B1 (D) PN 10-40 200 24 138 8 18 160 6
F AISI 316L DN 100 B1 (C) PN 10-16 220 22 – 8 18 180 6
G AISI 316L DN 100 B1 (D) PN 25-40 235 26 162 8 22 190 8
H ECTFE  DN 100 – PN 25-40 235 26 – 8 22 190 8
J Alloy C276  DN 100 B1 (D) PN 25-40 235 26 162 8 22 190 9
L ECTFE  DN 100 – PN 10-16 220 22 – 8 18 180 6
M Alloy C276  DN 100 B1 (C) PN 10-16 220 22 – 8 18 180 6.8
1) The roughness of the surface in contact with the medium, including the sealing surface of the flanges (all standards) made of Hastelloy C, Monel or tantalum,
is Ra 0.8 μm (31.5 in). Lower surface roughness on request.
2) Designation as per DIN 2527 in brackets
3) Housing weight see  ä 51
4) ECTFE coating on AISI 316L (1.4435). When operating in hazardous areas, avoid electrostatic charge of the plastic surfaces.
5) Alloy C276/2.4819
Endress+Hauser 37
Deltabar S
Process connection FMD76 ANSI flanges, connection dimensions as per ANSI B 16.5, raised face RF and
with ceramic process isolating JIS flanges, connection dimensions as per JIS B 2220 BL, raised face RF
41
1.61 in
41.3
1.63 in
7/16-20 UNF
H
h
g2
1/4-18 NPT
ø46
b
ø1.81 in
1.6 (0.06 in)
2 (0.078 in)
g
k
ANSI
JIS
D
P01-FMD76xxx-06-09-xx-xx-001
Process connection FMD76, high-pressure side: ANSI or JIS flange,

Low-pressure side: connection 1/4-18 NPT
H Device height see  ä 39, "Device height H, devices with flange" section
Flange 1 Boltholes
Ver- Material Nominal Class/ Diameter Thickness Raised face Quantity Diameter Hole circle Flange
sion diameter nominal weight 2
pressure
D b g g2 k
[in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [kg]
ANSI flanges
P AISI 316/316L 3 3 in 150 lb./sq.in 7.5 (190.5) 0.94 (23.9) 5 (127) 4 0.75 (19.1) 6 (152.4) 4.9
4
R ECTFE 4.9
S Alloy C276 5.5
T AISI 316/316L  4 in 150 lb./sq.in 9 (228.5) 0.94 (23.9) 6.19 (157.2) 8 0.75 (19.1) 7.5 (190.5) 7.1

U ECTFE 7.1
V Alloy C276 8
W AISI 316/316L  4 in 300 lb./sq.in 10 (254) 1.25 (31.8) 6.19 (157.2) 8 0.88 (22.4) 7.88 (200.2) 11.7
JIS flanges
1 AISI 316L 80 A 10 K 7.32 (185) 0.71 (18) 5 (127) 8 0.75 (19.1) 5.9 (150) 3.3
3 Alloy C276 3.7
4 AISI 316L 100 A 10 K 8.27 (210) 0.71 (18) 5.95 (151) 8 0.75 (19.1) 6.89 (175) 4.4
3) Combination of AISI 316 for required pressure resistance and AISI 316L for required chemical resistance (dual rated)
4) ECTFE coating on AISI 316/316L. When operating in hazardous areas, avoid electrostatic charge of the plastic surfaces.
38 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connection FMD76 Device height H, devices with flange

with ceramic process isolating
diaphragms (continued) Description Device height H (h + b)
T14 housing, optional display on the side 175 mm (6.89 in) + flange thickness b (see tables)
T15 housing without display, flat cover 181 mm (7.13 in) + flange thickness b (see tables)
T15 housing with display, high cover 193.5 mm (7.62 in) + flange thickness b (see tables)
Process connections FMD77

with diaphragm seal, 100
low-pressure side
7/16-20 UNF
41.3
+– –+
1/4-18 NPT
150
103.7
Low-pressure side: connection 1/4-18 NPT, mounting optionally 7/16-20 UNF,

Side flange material of the basic device: AISI 316L (1.4435 or 1.4404)
High-pressure side, see the following section "Process connections, high-pressure side FMD77"
Endress+Hauser 39
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD77 Note!

with diaphragm seal, • The weights of the diaphragm seals are given in the tables. See  ä 34 for the weight of the transmitter
high-pressure side and  ä 51 for the weight of the housing.
• The following drawings are drawings that illustrate how the system works in principle. In other words, the
dimensions of a diaphragm seal supplied can deviate from the dimensions given in this document.
• With the use of high-temperature oils the design can deviate strongly.
• Some device versions have CRN approval. For a CRN-approved device, a CRN-approved process connection
( ä 79, feature 70 "Process connection") has to be ordered with a CSA approval ( ä 78, feature 10
• Observe the information in the "Planning instructions, diaphragm seal systems" section  ä 62 ff.
• For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
EN/DIN flanges, connection dimensions as per EN 1092-1/DIN 2527
H
h
g2
b
dM
2
L
g
k d3
D g
P01-FMD77xxx-06-09-xx-xx-002
Process connection FMD77, high-pressure side EN/DIN flange with and without extended diaphragm seal, material
AISI 316L
Flange 1 Boltholes Diaphragm seal

2
Versio Nomina Nominal Shape Diamet Thickne Raised Extende Extende Quanti Diamet Hole Max. diameter Flange
n l pressure er ss face d d ty er circle of the process weight 3
diamete diaphra diaphra isolating
r gm seal gm seal diaphragm
length diamete
r
D b g L d3 g2 k dM
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
A DN 50 PN 10-40 B1 (D) 165 20 102 – – 4 18 125 59 3.0
B DN 80 PN 10-40 B1 (D) 200 24 138 – – 8 18 160 89 5.2
C DN 80 PN 10-40 B1 (D) 200 24 – 50 76 8 18 160 72 6.2
100 6.7
200 7.8
F DN 100 PN 10-16 B1 (C) 220 20 – – – 8 18 180 89 4.8
G DN 100 PN 25-40 B1 (D) 235 24 162 – – 8 22 190 89 6.7
40 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD77 ANSI flanges, connection dimensions as per B 16.5, raised face RF
with diaphragm seal,
high-pressure side
(continued)
H
h
g2
b
dM
1.6 mm
0.06 in
L
g
k d3
D g
P01-FMD77xxx-06-09-xx-xx-000
Process connection FMD77, high-pressure side ANSI flange with and without extended diaphragm seal, material
AISI 316/316L

Vers Nomin Class Diameter Thickness Raised face Extende Extended Quant Diameter Hole circle Max. Flange
ion al d diaphragm ity diameter of weight 2
diamet diaphrag seal the process
er m seal diameter isolating
length diaphragm
D b g L d3 g2 k dM
[lb./sq.in] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [kg]
N 2 150 6 (152.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.62 (91.9) – – 4 0.75 (19.1) 4.75 (120.7) 2.32 (59) 2.6
P 3 150 7.5 (190.5) 0.94 (23.9) 5 (127) – – 4 0.75 (19.1) 6 (152.4) 3.50 (89) 5.1
Q 3 150 7.5 (190.5) 0.94 (23.9) 5 (127) 2 (50.8) 2.99 (75.9) 4 0.75 (19.1) 6 (152.4) 2.83 (72) 6
4 (101.6 6.6
6 (152.4) 7.1
8 (203.8) 7.7
T 4 150 9 (228.6) 0.94 (23.9) 6.19 (157.2) – – 8 0.75 (19.1) 7.5 (190.5) 3.50 (89) 7.2
W 4 300 10 (254) 1.25 (31.8) 6.19 (157.2) – – 8 0.88 (22.4) 7.88 (200.2) 3.50 (89) 11.7
Endress+Hauser 41
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD77 JIS flanges, connection dimensions as per JIS B 2220 BL, raised face RF
with diaphragm seal,
high-pressure side
(continued)
H
h
0.0787"
g2
2 mm
b
dM
g
k
D
P01-FMD77xxx-06-09-xx-xx-001
Process connection FMD77, high-pressure side, JIS flange, material AISI 316L (1.4435)

Vers Nomin Nomi Diameter Thickne Raised Quant Diamete Hole Max. Flange
ion al nal ss face ity r circle diameter of weight 2
diamet press the process
er ure isolating
diaphragm
D b g g2 k dM
[mm (in)] [mm (in)] [mm (in)] [mm (in)] [mm (in)] [mm (in)] [kg]
X 50 A 10 K 155 (6.1) 16 (0.63) 96 (3.78) 4 19 (0.75) 120 (4.72) 59 (2.32) 2.3
1 80 A 10 K 185 (7.28) 18 (0.71) 126 (4.96) 8 19 (0.75) 150 (5.91) 89 (3.50) 3.5
4 100 A 10 K 210 (8.27) 18 (0.71) 151 (5.94) 8 19 (0.75) 175 (6.89) 89 (3.50) 4.7
1) The roughness of the surface in contact with the medium, including the sealing surface of the flanges (all standards)
made of Hastelloy C, Monel or tantalum, is Ra 0.8 μm (31.5 in). Lower surface roughness on request.
Device height H
Description Device height H (h + b)
T15 housing without display, flat cover 331 mm (13 in) + flange thickness b (see tables)
T15 housing with display, high cover 343.5 mm (13.5 in) + flange thickness b (see tables)
42 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
FMD78 basic device

7/16-20 UNF
H
➀
41.3
72
+– –+
54 100 54
87
98
FMD78 basic device

1 Diaphragm seal attachment
Device height H
Description Device height H

T15 housing without display, flat cover 223 mm (8.78 in)
T15 housing with display, high cover 235.5 mm (9.27 in)
Endress+Hauser 43
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 Note!

with diaphragm seal • The weights of the diaphragm seals are given in the tables. See  ä 34 for the weight of the transmitter
and  ä 51 for the weight of the housing.
• The following drawings are drawings that illustrate how the system works in principle. In other words, the
dimensions of a diaphragm seal supplied can deviate from the dimensions given in this document.
• With the use of high-temperature oils the design can deviate strongly.
• Some device versions have CRN approval. For a CRN-approved device, a CRN-approved process connection
( ä 69 ff, feature 70 "Process connection") has to be ordered with a CSA approval ( ä 69 ff, feature 10
• Observe the information in the "Planning instructions, diaphragm seal systems" section  ä 62 ff.
• For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
Diaphragm seal cell structure
b
dM
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-000
Process connection FMD78, material AISI 316L
Flange Diaphragm seal
Version Nominal Nominal Max. Thickness Max. diameter of Weight of two

diameter pressure 1 diameter the process diaphragm
isolating seals
diaphragm
D b dM
[mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]

UF DN 50 PN 16-400 102 20 59 2.6
UH DN 80 PN 16-400 138 20 89 4.6
UJ DN 100 PN 16-400 162 20 89 6.2
Flange Diaphragm seal
Version Nominal Nominal Max. Thickness Max. diameter of Weight of two

diameter pressure 1 diameter the process diaphragm
isolating seals
diaphragm
D b dM
[in] [lb/sq.in] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [kg]
VF 2 150-2500 4.01 (102) 0.79 (20) 2.32 (59) 2.6
VH 3 150-2500 5.35 (136) 0.79 (20) 3.50 (89) 4.6
VJ 4 150-2500 6.22 (158) 0.79 (20) 3.50 (89) 6.2
1) The specified nominal pressure applies to the diaphragm seal. The maximum pressure for the measuring device is
dependent on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components. See also  ä 30,
"Pressure specifications" section.
44 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 B and ANSI 1/2 MNPT, separator with PTFE seal
with diaphragm seal
(continued)
100 100
90
89
➀ ➀
SW22 SW22
22 AF 22 AF
6 1/2 NPT
G½
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-012
Process connection FMD78, left: with threaded connection ISO 228 G 1/2 B, right: with threaded connection
ANSI 1/2 MNPT
1 PTFE seal as standard max. 260 °C (500 °F) (higher temperatures on request)
Version Material Nominal pressure Weight of two diaphragm seals
[kg]
GA AISI 316L PN 40 2.9
RL AISI 316L PN 40 2.9
Tri-Clamp ISO 2852

h
dM
C7
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-005
Process connection FMD78, material AISI 316L, surface roughness of the surfaces in contact with the medium
Ra  0.8 m (31.5 in) as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.
Version Nominal Nominal Nominal Diameter Max. Height Weight of

diameter diameter diameter diameter of two
ISO 2852 DIN 32676 the process diaphragm
isolating seals
diaphragm
C7 dM h
[in] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
TB DN 25 DN 25 1 50.5 24 37 0.64
TC DN 38 DN 40 1 1/2 50.5 36 30 2.0
TD DN 51 DN 50 2 64 48 30 2.2
TF DN 76.1 – 3 91 73 30 2.4
Endress+Hauser 45
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 Tri-Clamp pipe diaphragm seal ISO 2852

with diaphragm seal
(continued)
D
d2
L
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-001
Ra  0.8 m (31.5 in) as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.
Version Nominal Nominal Diameter Diameter Diameter Height Face-to- Weight of

diameter diameter face length two
ISO 2852 diaphragm
seals
D d1 d2 h L
[in] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]

SB DN 25 1 22.5 43.5 50.5 67 126 3.4
1
SC DN 38 1 1/2 35.5 43.5 50.5 67 126 2
1
SD DN 51 2 48.6 56.5 64 79 100 3.4
1) Including 3.1 and pressure test as per Pressure Equipment Directive, category II
Varivent N for pipes DN 40 – DN 162

40
dM max. = 50
ø68
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-006
Process connection FMD78, surface roughness of the surfaces in contact with the medium Ra  0.8 m (31.5 in) as
standard. Lower surface roughness on request.
[kg]
TR AISI 316L PN 40 2.6
46 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 DRD DN50 (65 mm)

with diaphragm seal
(continued)
41
23.6
dM max. =50 4 x ø11.5
ø65–1.2
ø84
ø105
P01-FM78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-002
[kg]
TK AISI 316L PN 25 1.5
Hygienic connection, sanitary tank spud, extended diaphragm seal 2"
53.5
ø91.45
ø100
ø132.7
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-011
Version Material Weight of two diaphragm seals
[kg]
WH AISI 316L 5
Endress+Hauser 47
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 Taper adapter with coupling nut, DIN 11851 (dairy fitting)
with diaphragm seal
(continued)
40
f
m
k
dM
D
G
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-007
Ra  0.8 m (31.5 in) as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.
Taper adapter Slotted nut Diaphragm seal

Version Nomin Nomin Diamet Adapter Thread Height Height Max. Weight of
al al er height diameter of two
diamet pressur the process diaphragm
er e isolating seals
diaphragm
D f G k m dM
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
MR DN 50 PN 25 68.5 11 Rd 78 x 1/6" 22 19 52 2.2
MS DN 65 PN 25 86 12 Rd 95 x 1/6" 25 21 66 4.0
MT DN 80 PN 25 100 12 Rd 110 x 1/4" 30 26 81 5.1
Threaded adapter, DIN 11851 (dairy fitting)

h
dM
d1
G
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-008
Ra  0.8 m (31.5 in) as standard. Lower surface roughness on request.
Threaded adapter Diaphragm seal

Version Nominal Nominal Diameter Height Thread Max. diameter Weight of two
diameter pressure of the process diaphragm
isolating seals
diaphragm
d1 h G dM
[mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
M3 DN 50 PN 25 54 35 Rd 78 x 1/6" 52 1.8
M4 DN 65 PN 25 71 40 Rd 95 x 1/6" 66 3.4
M5 DN 80 PN 25 85 40 Rd 110 x 1/4" 81 4.0
48 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 EN/DIN flanges, connection dimensions as per EN 1092-1/DIN 2527
with diaphragm seal JIS flanges, connection dimensions as per JIS B 2220 BL
(continued)
g2
b
dM
2
g
k
D
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-009
Process connection FMD78, EN/DIN or JIS flange, material AISI 316L
EN/DIN flange 1 Boltholes Diaphragm seal
Version Nominal Nominal Shape 2 Diameter Thickn Raised Quantit Diameter Hole Max. diameter Weight of two
diameter pressure ess face y circle of the process diaphragm
isolating seals
diaphragm
D b g g2 k dM
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]

B3 DN 50 PN 10-40 B1 (D) 165 20 102 4 18 125 59 6.0
B5 DN 80 PN 10-40 B1 (D) 200 24 138 8 18 160 89 10.5
BT DN 100 PN 10-16 B1 (C) 220 20 – 8 18 180 89 9.5

B6 DN 100 PN 25-40 B1 (D) 235 24 162 8 22 190 89 13.3
JIS flange 1 Boltholes Diaphragm seal
Version Nominal Nominal Diameter Thickn Raised Quantit Diameter Hole circle Max. diameter Weight of two
diameter pressure ess face y of the process diaphragm
isolating seals
diaphragm
D b g g2 k dM
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
KF 50 A 10 K 155 16 96 4 19 120 59 4.6
KL 80 A 10 K 185 18 127 8 19 150 89 7.0

KH 100 A 10 K 210 18 151 8 19 175 89 9.4
Endress+Hauser 49
Deltabar S
Process connections FMD78 ANSI flanges, connection dimensions as per ANSI B 16.5, raised face RF
with diaphragm seal
(continued)
g2
b
dM
1.6 mm
0.06 in
L
g
k d3
D g
P01-FMD78xxx-06-09-xx-xx-010
Process connection FMD78, ANSI flange with and without extended diaphragm seal, material AISI 316/AISI 316L
Vers Nomin Class Diameter Thickness Raised face Extende Extende Qu- Diameter Hole circle Max. Weight of
ion al d d an- diameter of two
diamet diaphrag diaphra tity the diaphragm
er m seal gm seal process seals
length diamete isolating
r diaphragm
D b g L d3 g2 k dM
[lb/sq.in] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [in (mm)] [kg]
AF 2 150 6 (152.4) 0.75 (19.1) 3.62 (91.9) – – 4 0.75 (19.1) 4.75 (120.7) 2.32 (59) 5.2
AR 2 300 6.5 (165.1) 0.88 (22.5) 3.62 (91.9) – – 8 0.75 (19.1) 5 (127) 2.32 (59) 6.8
AG 3 150 7.5 (190.5) 0.94 (23.9) 5 (127) – – 4 0.75 (19.1) 6 (152.4) 3.50 (89) 10.2
AS 3 300 8.25 (209.5) 1.12 (28.4) 5 (127) – – 8 0.88 (22.4) 6.62 (168.1) 3.50 (89) 14
J4 3 150 7.5 (190.5) 0.94 (23.9) 5 (127) 2 (50.8) 2.99 4 0.75 (19.1) 6 (152.4) 2.83 (72) 12
(75.9)
4 (101.6) 13.2
6 (152.4) 14.3
8 (203.6) 15.4
AH 4 150 9 (228.6) 0.94 (23.9) 6.19 (157.2) – – 8 0.75 (19.1) 7.5 (190.5) 3.50 (89) 14.4
AT 4 300 10 (254) 1.25 (31.8) 6.19 (157.2) – – 8 0.88 (22.4) 7.88 (200.1) 3.50 (89) 23.4
J5 4 150 9 (228.6) 0.94 (23.9) 6.19 (157.2) 2 (50.8) 3.7 (94) 8 0.75 (19.1) 7.5 (190.5) 3.50 (89) 17.3
4 (101.6) 19.8
6 (152.4) 22.3
8 (203.6) 24.8
50 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Wall and pipe mounting with

84
mounting bracket or separate
housing ➀ ➀
131
52
122 140
158 175
67
86
76
➁ ➁
147
ø6
ø52 ø20
➀ Dimensions of T14 housing, optional display on the side. For the weight, see the following section.
➁ Dimensions of T17 housing, optional display on the side. For the weight, see the following section.
Weight Housing
T14 T15 T17 Separate housing
Aluminum AISI 316L Aluminum AISI 316L
With electronic insert and display 1.2 kg (2.65 lbs) 2.1 kg (4.63 lbs) 1.8 kg (3.97 lbs) 1.2 kg (2.65 lbs) Weight of housing + 0.5 kg (1.10 lbs).
With electronic insert without display 1.1 kg (2.43 lbs) 2.0 kg (4.41 lbs) 1.7 kg (3.75 lbs) 1.1 kg (2.43 lbs) Weight of sensor + 0.5 kg (1.10 lbs).
Process connections
• Process connections PMD70 with ceramic process isolating diaphragms:  ä 32 ff
• Process connections PMD75 with metal process isolating diaphragms:  ä 34 ff
• Process connection FMD76 with ceramic process isolating diaphragms:  ä 37 ff
• Process connections FMD77 with diaphragm seal, low-pressure side:  ä 39
• Process connections FMD77 with diaphragm seal, high-pressure side:  ä 40 ff
• Process connections FMD78 with diaphragm seal:  ä 44 ff
Endress+Hauser 51
Deltabar S
Material (not wetted) Housing
T14
15 16 16 17 18
3
2
14 7 3 1
8 2
5 4
13
12 6
11 10 9
P01-xMxx3xxx-14-xx-xx-xx-000
T15
14 3 18
8
15 16 16 17 2
7
3
12 1
5
6 4
13 11 10 9
Item Component part Material

number
T14 and T15 housing, RAL 5012 (blue) Die-cast aluminum with protective powder-coating on
1 polyester base
T14 housing Precision cast AISI 316L (1.4435)
Cover, RAL 7035 (gray) Die-cast aluminum with protective powder-coating on
2 polyester base
Cover Precision cast AISI 316L (1.4435)
3 Cover seal EPDM
4 Nameplates AISI 304 (1.4301)
5 Pressure compensation filter PA6 GF10
6 Pressure compensation filter, O-ring Silicone (VMQ)
7 Sight glass Mineral glass
8 Sight glass seal Silicone (VMQ)
9 Screw A4
10 Sealing ring EPDM
11 Snap ring PA66-GF25
12 Snap ring for nameplates AISI 304 (1.4301)/ AISI 316 (1.4401
13 External ground terminal AISI 304 (1.4301)
14 Cover clamp Clamp AISI 316L (1.4435, screw A4
15 Cable gland Polyamide (PA)
16 Seal of cable gland and blind plug Silicone (VMQ)
Blind plug PBT-GF30 FR, for dust ignition-proof: AISI 316L
17
(1.4435)
External operation (keys and key cover), RAL Polycarbonate PC-FR, screw A4
18
7035 (gray)
52 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
15 16 16 17 T17
2
3
7
8 3 1
2
14 9
5 4
13 6
12 11 10
Item number Component part Material

1 T17 housing
Stainless steel AISI 316L (1.4404)
2 Cover
3 Cover seal EPDM
4 Nameplates Lasered
5 Pressure compensation filter PA6 GF10
6 Pressure compensation filter, O-ring Silicone (VMQ)
7 Sight glass for non-hazardous area, ATEX Ex ia,
NEPSI Zone 0/1 Ex ia, IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia, Polycarbonate (PC)
FM NI, FM IS, CSA IS
8 Sight glass for ATEX 1/2 D, ATEX 1/3 D, ATEX 1
GD, ATEX 1/2 GD, ATEX 3 G, FM DIP, CSA dust Mineral glass
ignition-proof
9 Sight glass seal EPDM
10 Screw A2-70
11 Sealing ring EPDM
12 Snap ring PA6
13 Screw A4-50
14 External ground terminal AISI 304 (1.4301)
15 Cable gland Polyamide PA, for dust ignition-proof: CuZn nickel-
plated
16 Seal of cable gland and blind plug Silicone (VMQ)
17 Blind plug PBT-GF30 FR, for dust ignition-proof: AISI 316L
(1.4435)
Endress+Hauser 53
Deltabar S
Connecting parts
4 4
1
5
6
2 3
7
8
1 9
6
5
Item number Component part Material

1 Connection between the AISI 316L (1.4404)
housing and process connection
2 Mounting bracket Bracket AISI 304 (1.4301), AISI 304L (1.4306)
3 Screw and nuts A2-70
4 Half-shells: AISI 304L (1.4306)
5 Seal for cable from EPDM
separate housing
6 Gland for cable from separate AISI 316L (1.4404)
housing
7 PE cable for separate housing Abrasion-proof cable with strain-relief Dynema members; shielded using
aluminum-coated film; insulated with polyethylene (PE-LD), black;
copper wires, twisted, UV-resistant
8 FEP cable for separate housing Abrasion-proof cable; shielded using galvanized steel wire netting;
insulated with fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), black;
copper wires, twisted, UV-resistant
9 Process connection adapter for AISI 316L (1.4404)
separate housing
54 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
3
2
3
4
4
7
PMD70 PMD75
3
6 5 2
3
7
1
2
FMD76 FMD77
6 5 2
3
4
7 9
FMD78
Item Component part Material

number
1 U-bracket 1.4301
2 Connection between the housing AISI 316L (1.4404)
and process connection
3 Screw and nuts PMD70:
Hex.-headed bolt DIN 931-M10x50-A2-70/hex.-headed nut
DIN 934-M10-A4-70
PMD75 PN 160: Hex.-headed bolt DIN 931-M12x90-A2-70/hex.-headed
nut DIN 934-M12-A2-70
PMD75 PN 420: Hex.-headed bolt ISO 4014-M12x90-A4/hex.-headed
nut ISO 4032-M12-A4-bs
FMD76: Screw, cyl. DIN 912-M10x 30-A4-70
FMD77, FMD78:
Hex.-headed bolt DIN 931-M12x 90-A2-70/hex.-headed nut
DIN 934-M12 -A2-70
4 Measuring cell body 304 (1.4301)
5 Bearing DIN 5401 (1.3505)
6 Setscrew DIN 915 M 6x8 A2-70
7 Blind plug PA 6.6
8 Capillary AISI 316 Ti (1.4571)
9 Protective hose for capillary AISI 304 (1.4301)
Endress+Hauser 55
Deltabar S
Material (wetted) Note!

Process-wetted device components are listed in the "Mechanical construction" ( ä 31) and "Ordering
information" ( ä 69) sections.
TSE Certificate of Suitability

The following applies to all process wetted device components:
• They do not contain any materials derived from animals.
• No additives or operating materials derived from animals are used in production or processing.
Process connections
• "Clamp connections" and "Hygienic connections" (see also "Ordering information" section):
AISI 316L (DIN/EN material number 1.4435)
• Endress+Hauser supplies DIN/ EN process connections with threaded connections made of stainless steel
as per AISI 316L (DIN/EN material number 1.4404 (AISI 316) or 14435). With regard to their stability-
temperature property, the materials 1.4404 and 1.4435 are grouped together under 13E0 in EN 1092-1:
2001 Tab.18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.
• Endress+Hauser supplies DIN/EN stainless steel flanges as per AISI 316L (DIN/ EN material number
1.4404 or 14435). With regard to their stability-temperature property, the materials 1.4404 and 1.4435 are
grouped together under 13E0 in EN 1092-1: 2001 Tab.18. The chemical composition of the two materials
can be identical.
Process isolating diaphragm
PMD70 PMD75 FMD76 FMD77 FMD78
Al2O3 (aluminum oxide AISI 316L Al2O3 (aluminum AISI 316L AISI 316L
ceramic) oxide ceramic)
Alloy C Alloy C Alloy C
Monel Monel Monel
Tantalum Tantalum Tantalum
Alloy C with AISI 316L with gold- AISI 316L with gold-
gold-rhodium rhodium coating rhodium coating
coating
AISI 316L with 0.09 AISI 316L with
mm PTFE foil (not for 0.09 mm PTFE foil
vacuum applications) (not for vacuum
applications)
Seals
See Ordering information  ä 69 ff
Filling oil
PMD70 PMD75 FMD76 FMD77 FMD78

• 25 mbar (0.375 psi) and 100 mbar • Silicone oil. • 25 mbar (0.375 psi) and 100 mbar • Silicone oil Silicone oil.
(1.5 psi) measuring cell: silicone oil • For oxygen gas (1.5 psi) measuring cell: silicone oil • Vegetable oil For oxygen gas
• 500 mbar (7.5 psi) and 3000 mbar applications: • 500 mbar (7.5 psi) and 3000 mbar • Low-temperature applications:
(45 psi) measuring cell: mineral oil inert oil (45 psi) measuring cell: mineral oil oil inert oil
• For oxygen gas applications: inert oil (halocarbon 6.3) • For oxygen gas applications: inert oil • High-temperature (halocarbon 6.3)
(Voltalef 1A) (Voltalef 1A) oil
• Inert oil
56 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Human interface
Operating elements Onsite display (optional)
A 4-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used for display and operation. The onsite display shows measured
values, dialog text as well as fault and notice messages in plain text, thereby supporting the user in every stage
of operation. The display of the device can be turned in 90° steps.
Depending on the installation position of the device, this makes it easy to operate the device and read the
measured value.
Functions:
• 8-digit measured value display including sign and decimal point, bar graph for 4 to 20 mA HART as current
display; or for PROFIBUS PA as graphic display of the standardized value of the AI Block; for FOUNDATION
Fieldbus as graphic display of the transducer output.
• Simple and complete menu guidance thanks to separation of the parameters into several levels and groups.
• Each parameter is given a 3-digit ID number for easy navigation.
• Option for configuring the display according to individual requirements and preferences, such as language,
alternating display, display of other measured values such as sensor temperature, contrast setting.
• Comprehensive diagnostic functions (fault and warning message, peak-hold indicators, etc.).
• Rapid and safe commissioning with the Quick Setup menus.
Measured value display Parameter

Identification
Function name Value number
Header line
Main line
Unit
Information
line
– + E Symbol
Bargraph
Editing modes
Operating keys
Selection
options
Value that
can be edited
Current measured value

P01-xxxxxxxx-07-xx-xx-en-011
Endress+Hauser 57
Deltabar S
Operating elements Operating keys on the exterior of the device

With the T14 housing (aluminum or stainless steel), the operating keys are located either outside of the
housing, under the protection cap or inside on the electronic insert. With the T17 housing (stainless steel), the
operating keys are located inside the housing on the electronic insert.
In addition, devices with an onsite display and a 4 to 20 mA HART or PROFIBUS PA electronic insert have
operating keys on the onsite display.
4...20 mA HART
PROFIBUS PA/
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
0%
Zero
P01-PMx7xxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-038
The operating keys located externally on the device work on the Hall sensor principle. As a result, no additional
openings are required in the device. This guarantees:
• Complete protection against environmental influences such as moisture and contamination.
• Simple operation without any tools.
• No wear.
Operating keys and elements located internally on the electronic insert
➃➄ ➅➆ ➄➅
t ➅ t
Sim.
on
➀ on
➀ ➁ ➂ on
➀ ➁
➁ ➃ ➂
off off 0% off 1 2
➃
0%
Sensor
Zero
Display ➄ Sensor
Zero
Display
Simulation
➂ on on ON CK S D A 0 8
on
HW
1 2 1 2 off off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PC
1 2 off
PC
PC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Address
Histo ROM
Histo ROM
SW
HW
P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-104 P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-105 P01-xxxxxxxx-19-xx-xx-xx-106
Electronic insert HART Electronic insert PROFIBUS PA Electronic insert FOUNDATION Fieldbus
1 Operating keys 1 Green LED to indicate value being accepted 1 Green LED to indicate value being accepted
2 Slot for optional display 2 Key for position adjustment and device reset 2 Key for position adjustment and device reset
3 Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT 3 DIP-switch for bus address 3 Slot for optional display
4 DIP-switch for locking/unlocking 4 Slot for optional display 4 Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT
parameters relevant to the measured values 5 Slot for optional HistoROM®/M-DAT 5 DIP-switch for locking/unlocking
5 DIP-switch for damping on/off 6 DIP-switch for locking/unlocking parameters relevant to the measured values
6 Green LED to indicate value being accepted parameters relevant to the measured values 6 DIP-switch for simulation mode on/off
7 DIP-switch for damping on/off
58 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Local operation Function External operation Internal operation Display (optional)

(operating keys, (electronic insert)
optional, not T17
housing)
Position adjustment X X X
(zero point correction)
Setting lower-range value
and upper-range value - X X X
reference pressure present at (HART only) (HART only)
the device
Device reset X X X
Locking and unlocking --- X
parameters relevant to the X
measured value
Value acceptance indicated X X X
by green LED
Switching damping on and --- X X
off (HART and PA only)
Setting bus address (PA) --- X X
Switching simulation mode
on and off (FOUNDATION --- X X
Fieldbus)
Remote operation Depending on the position of the write protection switch on the device, all software parameters are accessible.
HART
Remote operation via:
• Handheld terminal Field Communicator 375 (see "Hardware and software for onsite and remote operation"
section  ä 60)
• FieldCare (see "Hardware and software for onsite and remote operation" section  ä 60 ff) with ommubox
FXA195 (see "Hardware and software for onsite and remote operation" section  ä 60)
• Field Xpert:
Field Xpert is an industrial PDA with integrated 3.5" touchscreen from Endress+Hauser based on Windows
Mobile. It communicates via wireless with the optional VIATOR Bluetooth modem connected to a HART
device point-to-point or wireless via WiFi and Endress+Hauser’s Fieldgate FXA520. Field Xpert also works
as a stand-alone device for asset management applications. For details, refer to BA060S/04/EN.
PROFIBUS PA
• FieldCare (see "Hardware and software for onsite and remote operation" section  ä 60 ff)
– Profiboard: For connecting a PC to PROFIBUS
– Proficard: For connecting a laptop to PROFIBUS
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• Handheld terminal Field Communicator 375 (see "Hardware and software for onsite and remote operation"
section  ä 60 ff)
• Use an FF-configuration program for example NI-FBUS Configurator, to
– connect devices with "FOUNDATION Fieldbus signal" into an FF-network
– set FF-specific parameters
Operation with NI-FBUS Configurator:
The NI-FBUS Configurator is an easy-to-use graphical environment for creating linkages, loops and a
schedule based on the fieldbus concept.
You can use the NI-FBUS Configurator to configure a fieldbus network as follows:
– Set block and device tags
– Set device addresses
– Create and edit function block control strategies (function block applications)
– Configure vendor-defined function and transducer blocks
– Create and edit schedules
– Read and write to function block control strategies (function block applications)
– Invoke Device Description (DD) methods
Endress+Hauser 59
Deltabar S
– Display DD menus
– Download a configuration
– Verify a configuration and compare it to a saved configuration
– Monitor a downloaded configuration
– Replace a virtual device by a real device
– Save and print a configuration
Note!
For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
Hardware and software for Commubox FXA195

onsite and remote operation
For intrinsically safe HART communication with FieldCare via the USB interface. For details refer to
TI404F/00/EN.
Commubox FXA291
The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field devices with a CDI interface (=Endress+Hauser
Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to
TI405C/07/EN.
Note!
For the following Endress+Hauser devices you need the "ToF adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory:
ToF adapter FXA291

The ToF adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 with devices of the ToF platform, pressure
equipment and Gammapilot via the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to
KA271F.
Field Communicator 375

With a handheld terminal, all the parameters can be configured anywhere along the bus line via menu
operation.
HistoROM®/M-DAT (optional)
HistoROM®/M-DAT is a memory module which can be attached to every electronic insert. The HistoROM®/
M-DAT can be retrofitted at any stage (order number: 52027785).
Your benefits
• Quick and safe commissioning of the same measuring points by copying the configuration data of one
transmitter to another transmitter.
• Reliable process monitoring thanks to cyclical recording of pressure and sensor temperature measured
values.
• Simple diagnosis by recording diverse events such as alarms, configuration changes, counters for measuring
range undershoot and overshoot for pressure and temperature as well as user limit overshoot and undershoot
for pressure and temperature etc.
• Analysis and graphic evaluation of the events and process parameters via software (contained in scope of
supply).
HistoROM®/M-DAT can be ordered via feature 100 "Additional option 1" or feature 110 "Additional option
2" or as a spare part.  ä 69 ff. A CD with an Endress+Hauser operating program is also included in the scope
of delivery.
You can copy data from one transmitter to another transmitter when operating a FOUNDATION Fieldbus
device via an FF configuration program. You need the Endress+Hauser FieldCare operating program and the
Commubox FXA291 service interface and the ToF adapter FXA291 to be able to access the data and events
saved in the HistoROM®/M-DAT.
FieldCare
FieldCare is an Endress+Hauser asset management tool based on FDT technology. With FieldCare, you can
configure all Endress+Hauser devices as well as devices from other manufacturers that support the FDT
standard.
60 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
FieldCare supports the following functions:

• Configuration of transmitters in offline and online mode
• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)
• HistoROM®/M-DAT analysis
• Documentation of the measuring point
Connection options:
• HART via Commubox FXA195 and the USB port on a computer
• PROFIBUS PA via segment coupler and PROFIBUS interface card
• Service interface with Commubox FXA291 and ToF adapter FXA291 (USB).
For further information see È www.endress.com
Endress+Hauser 61
Deltabar S
Planning instructions, diaphragm seal systems

Note!
The performance and the permitted range of application of a diaphragm seal system depend on the process
isolating diaphragm used, the filling oil, the coupling, the unit design and on the process and ambient
conditions present in the individual application.
To help you select the right diaphragm seal system for your applications, Endress+Hauser provides its
customers with the free "Applicator Sizing Diaphragm Seal" tool, which is available on CD or online at
"www.endress.com/applicator".
Applicator Sizing Diaphragm Seal FMD78-en
For more detailed information or the layout of the optimum diaphragm seal solution for your application, please
contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
Applications Diaphragm seal systems should be used if the process and the device should be separated. Diaphragm seal
systems offer clear advantages in the following instances:
• In the case of extreme process temperatures
• For aggressive media
• In the case of process media that crystallize
• In the case of corrosive or highly various process media or process media with solids content
• In the case of heterogeneous and fibrous process media
• If extreme measuring point cleaning is necessary, or for very humid mounting locations
• If the measuring point is exposed to severe vibrations
• For mounting locations that are difficult to access
Design and operation mode Diaphragm seals are separating equipment between the measuring system and the process medium.
A diaphragm seal system consists of:
• A diaphragm seal in a one-sided system, e.g. FMD77 or two diaphragm seals in a two-sided system,
e.g. FMD78
• One capillary tube or two capillary tubes
• Fill fluid
• A differential pressure transmitter
The process pressure acts via the process isolating diaphragm of the diaphragm seal on the liquid-filled system,
which transfers the process pressure via the capillary tube onto the sensor of the differential pressure
transmitter.
62 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Endress+Hauser delivers all diaphragm seal systems as welded versions. The system is hermetically sealed,
which ensures the highest reliability.
The diaphragm seal determines the application range of the system by:
• The process isolating diaphragm diameter
• The process isolating diaphragm stiffness and material
• The design (oil volume)
Diameter of the process isolating diaphragm

The greater the diameter of the process isolating diaphragm (less stiff), the smaller the temperature effect on
the measurement result.
Process isolating diaphragm stiffness

The stiffness depends on the diameter of the process isolating diaphragm, the material, any existing coating and
the thickness and shape of the process isolating diaphragm. The process isolating diaphragm thickness and the
shape are determined by the design. The stiffness of a process isolating diaphragm of a diaphragm seal
influences the temperature operating range and the measuring error caused by temperature effects.
Capillary
Diaphragm seals are used with the following capillary internal diameters as standard:
• DN 50: 1 mm (0.04 in)
• > DN 50: 2 mm (0.08 in)
The capillary tube influences the thermal change, the ambient temperature operating range and the response
time of a diaphragm seal system as a result of its length and internal diameter.
Filling oil
When selecting the filling oil, the process and ambient temperature as well as the operating pressure are of
crucial importance. Observe the temperatures and pressures during commissioning and cleaning. A further
selection criterion is the compatibility of the filling oil with the requirements of the process medium. For this
reason, only filling oils that are harmless to health are used in the food industry, such as vegetable oil or silicone
oil.
See also the following section "Diaphragm seal filling oils".
The filling oil used influences the thermal change, the temperature operating range of a diaphragm seal system
and the response time. A temperature change results in a volume change of the filling oil. The volume change
is dependent on the expansion coefficient and the volume of the filling oil at calibration temperature (constant
in the range: +21 to +33°C (+70 to 91°F)).
For example, the filling oil expands in the event of a temperature increase. The additional volume presses
against the process isolating diaphragm of a diaphragm seal. The stiffer a diaphragm is, the greater its return
force, which counteracts a volume change and acts on the measuring cell together with the operating pressure,
thus shifting the zero point.
Differential pressure transmitter

The differential pressure transmitter influences the temperature operating range, the TK zero point and the
response time as a result of the volume of its side flange and as a result of its volume change. The volume
change is the volume that has to be shifted to pass through the complete measuring range.
Differential pressure transmitters from Endress+Hauser are optimized with regard to the minimum volume
change and side flange.
Endress+Hauser 63
Deltabar S
Diaphragm seal filling oils
Version 1 Filling oil Permissible Permissible Density Viscosity Coefficient Notes

temperature range at temperature range at of thermal
0.05 bar(0.725 psi)  pabs  1 bar (14.5 psi) expansion
pabs  1 bar (14.5 psi)
[g/cm3] / [mm²/s] / [cSt] at [1/K]
[SGU] 25 °C (77 °F)]
FMD77: A Silicone oil –40 to +180°C –40 to +250°C 0.96 100 0.00096 Suitable for foods
FMD78: A, 1 (-40 to +356 °F) (-40 to +482 °F) FDA 21 CFR 175.105
FMD77: V High- –10 to +200°C –10 to +400°C 1.07 37 0.0007 High temperatures
FMD78: C, 3 temperature (+14 to +392 °F) (+14 to 752 °F)
oil
FMD77: F Inert oil –40 to +80°C –40 to +175°C 1.87 27 0.000876 Oil for ultrapure gas
FMD78: D, 4 (-40 to +176 °F)) (-40 to +347 °F) and oxygen
applications
FMD77: D Vegetable oil –10 to +120°C (+14 to +392 °F) 0.94 9.5 0.00101 Suitable for foods
FMD78: B, 2 (+14 to +248 °F) FDA 21 CFR 172.856
FMD77: L Low- –70 to +80°C2 –70 to +180°C2 0.92 4.4 0.00108 Low temperatures
FMD78: E, 5 temperature (-94 to +176 °F) (-94 to +356 °F)
oil
1) Version for feature 90 in the order code

2) Observe temperature limits of the device ( ä 29) and the system ( ä 62).
Operating temperature range The operating temperature range of a diaphragm seal system depends on the fill fluid, capillary length and
internal diameter, process temperature and oil volume of the diaphragm seal.
The range of application can be extended by using a fill fluid with a smaller expansion coefficient and a shorter
capillary.
Response time The viscosity of the filling oil, the capillary length and the capillary internal diameter influence the frictional
resistance. The greater the frictional resistance, the longer the response time.
Furthermore, the volume change of the measuring cell influences the response time. The lower the volume
change of the measuring cell, the less filling oil has to be shifted in the diaphragm seal system.
The following diagram shows typical response times (T90) for the various filling oils dependent on the
measuring cell and the capillary internal diameter. The values given are in seconds per meter of capillary length
and must be multiplied by the actual length of the capillary. The response time of the transmitter must also be
taken into consideration.
Ambient temperature range = 20°C

8
Response time (T90) [sec/m]
6
Silicone oil
4 High temperature oil
Vegetable oil
Inert oil
2
0
DN 50 DN 80 DN 50 DN 80 Nominal diameter
(1 mm) (2 mm) (1 mm) (2 mm) Capillary internal diameter
500 mbar 3 bar Measuring cell
P01-FMD78xxx-05-xx-xx-en-000
64 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
100 %
➀
90 %
T90 t
Presentation of the response time (T90%)

1 Pressure increase
2 Output signal
Minimize response time by Comments
Larger capillary internal diameter The temperature effect increases with increasing diameter.
Shorter capillaries –
Filling oil with lower viscosity – Observe compatibility of the filling oil with the process medium.
– Observe the filling oil operating limits.
Installation instructions Diaphragm seal systems

• Endress+Hauser offer flushing rings as accessories to clean process isolating diaphragms without taking the
transmitters out of the process.
For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• The diaphragm seal together with the transmitter form a closed, calibrated system, which is filled through
ports in the diaphragm seal and in the measuring system of the transmitter. These ports are sealed and must
not be opened.
• In the case of devices with diaphragm seals and capillaries, the zero point shift caused by the hydrostatic
pressure of the filling liquid column in the capillaries must be taken into account when selecting the
measuring cell. If a measuring cell with a small measuring range is selected, the sensor nominal range can
be overdriven as a result of position adjustment.  See the following diagram and the following example.
• For devices with a capillary a suitable fastening device (mounting bracket) is recommended.
• When using a mounting bracket, sufficient strain relief must be allowed for in order to prevent the capillary
bending down (capillary bending radius 100 mm (3.94 in)).
• The temperature and length of both capillaries should be the same when using two-sided diaphragm seal
systems.
Selecting the measuring cell (observe the hydrostatic pressure of the filling liquid column in the capillaries!)
pi
–
Capillaries with silicone oil

max. ρFl = 0.96 kg/dm3
ΔH = 1 m Hv = 1.8 m
min. +
Hu = 0.2 m
H1 = 0.3 m
+ –
Tank with water

ρM = 1.0 kg/dm3
P01-FMD78xxx-11-xx-xx-en-004
Endress+Hauser 65
Deltabar S
Pressure on the negative side of the differential pressure transmitter (p–) when the tank is empty (min. level)
p–= pHv+ pH1 = Hv • ρ Fl • g + H1 • ρFl • g + p i
kg kg
= 1.8 m • 0.96 • 9.81 m m
s + 0.3 m • 0.96 dm3 • 9.81 s + pi
dm3
= 197.77 mbar + p i
Pressure on the positive side of the differential pressure transmitter (p+) when the tank is empty (min. level)
p+= pHu+ pH1 = Hu • ρM • g + H1 • ρFl • g + pi
kg kg
= 0.2 m • 1 • 9.81 m m
s + 0.3 m • 0.96 dm3 • 9.81 s + pi
dm3
= 47.87 mbar + pi
Differential pressure at the transmitter (pTransmitter) when the tank is empty
Result:
If the tank were full, a differential pressure of –51.80 mbar (-0.762 psi) would be present at the differential pressure
transmitter. When the tank is empty, a differential pressure of –149.90 mbar (2.2485 psi) is present. Therefore, a 500 mbar
(7.5 psi) measuring cell is required for this application.
Capillary
In order to obtain more precise measurement results and to avoid a defect in the device, mount the capillaries
as follows:
• vibration-free (in order to avoid additional pressure fluctuations)
• not in the vicinity of heating or cooling lines
• insulate if the ambient temperature is below or above the reference temperature
• with a bending radius of 100 mm (3.94 in).
66 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Vacuum applications
For applications under vacuum, Endress+Hauser recommends mounting the pressure transmitter below the
lower diaphragm seal. This prevents a vacuum load of the diaphragm seal caused by the presence of filling oil
in the capillaries.
When the pressure transmitter is mounted above the lower diaphragm seal, the maximum height difference
H1 in accordance with the following illustration must not be exceeded. The maximum height difference is
dependent on the density of the filling oil and the smallest ever pressure that is permitted to occur at the
diaphragm seal on the positive side (empty tank), see the following illustration, on the right.
12.0
Low temperature oil
10.0
Height difference H1 [m]

Vegetable oil
8.0
– Silicone oil
6.0
High temperature
– + oil
4.0
+ –
H1 Inert oil
2.0
+
0.0
50 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Pressure, diaphragm seal positive side [mbarabs]
P01-FMD7xxxx-11-xx-xx-xx-001 P01-FMD7xxxx-05-xx-xx-en-002
Installation above the lower diaphragm seal Diagram of maximum installation height above the lower diaphragm
seal for vacuum applications dependent on the pressure at the
diaphragm seal on the positive side
Heat insulation – FMD77

The FMD77 must only be insulated up to a certain height. The maximum permitted insulation height is
indicated on the devices and applies to an insulation material with a heat conductivity  0.04 W/(m x K) and
to the maximum permitted ambient and process temperature ( see table below). The data were determined
under the most critical application "quiescent air".
TA λ ≤ 0.04 W
m•K
TP
Maximum permitted insulation height
Endress+Hauser 67
Deltabar S
Certificates and approvals

CE mark The device meets the legal requirements of the relevant EC directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms that the device has been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.
Ex approvals • ATEX
• FM
• CSA
• NEPSI
• IECEx
• GOST on request
• Also combinations of different approvals
All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available upon request. The
Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved for use in explosion hazardous areas.
 ä 85, "Safety Instructions" and "Installation/Control Drawings" sections.
Suitability for hygienic The Deltabar S is suitable for use in hygienic processes.
processes Overview of suitable process connections from  ä 81 ff.
Many versions meet the requirements of 3A-Sanitary Standard No. 74 and
are certified by the EHEDG.
Suitable fittings and seals must be used to ensure hygiene-compliant
design according to the specifications of 3A and EHEDG.
Note!
The gap-free connections can be cleaned without residue using
the usual cleaning methods. TYPE EL 74 -
October 2007
Marine certificate • GL: FMD76, FMD78, PMD70, PMD75

• ABS: FMD76, FMD78, PMD70, PMD75
Functional Safety SIL / The Deltabar S with 4 to 20 mA output signal has been developed to IEC 61508 standard. The device can be
IEC 61508 Declaration of used for flow, level and differential pressure monitoring up to SIL 3.
Conformity (optional) È For a detailed description of the safety functions with Deltabar S, settings and characteristic quantities for
functional safety, please refer to the "Functional Safety Manual - Deltabar S" SD189.
È For devices with SIL / IEC 61508 Declaration of Conformity see  ä 69 ff, feature 100 "Additional
option 1" and feature 110 "Additional option 2" version E "SIL / IEC 61508, Declaration of Conformity".
Overfill protection WHG. See "Ordering information"  ä 69 (see also ZE259P/00/DE).
CRN approvals Some device versions have CRN approval. For a CRN-approved device, a CRN-approved process connection
( ä 69 ff, feature 70 "Process connection") has to be ordered with a CSA approval ( ä 69 ff, feature 10
Pressure Equipment Directive The devices PMD70, PMD75, FMD76, FMD77 and FMD78 correspond to Article 3 (3) of the EC directive
(PED) 97/23/EC (Pressure Equipment Directive) and have been designed and manufactured according to good
engineering practice.
The following also applies:
– FMD78 with pipe diaphragm seal 1.5"/PN40:
Suitable for stable gases in group 1, category II
– PMD75, PN 420
Suitable for stable gases in group 1, category I
Standards and guidelines DIN EN 60770 (IEC 60770):

Transmitters for use in industrial-process control systems
Part 1: Methods for performance evaluation
DIN 16086:
Electrical pressure measuring instruments, pressure sensors, pressure transmitters, pressure measuring
instruments, concepts, specifications on data sheets
EN 61326-X:
EMC product family standard for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use.
68 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Ordering information
PMD70 This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive.
10 Approval:
A For non-hazardous areas
1 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6
6 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6, overfill protection WHG
2 ATEX II 1/2 D
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
8 ATEX II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6
m 3 ATEX II 1/2 GD Ex ia IIC T6
7 ATEX II 3 G Ex nA II T6
S FM IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; NI Class I Division 2, Groups A – D; AEx ia
Q FM DIP, Class II, III Division 1, Groups E – G
– + E
R FM NI, Class I, Division 2, Groups A – D
U CSA IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Groups A – G; Class I Division 2, Groups A – D, Ex ia
W CSA Class II, III Division 1, Groups E – G (Dust-Ex)
E Combined certificates
ATEX II Ex ia + FM IS + CSA IS
ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 +
FM/CSA IS Class I, II, III Division 1 Group A - G
H NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
I IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia IIC T6
20 Output; Operation:
n A 4 to 20 mA HART, SIL operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n)
B 4 to 20 mA HART, SIL operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o)
➂ C 4 to 20 mA HART, SIL operation inside (see Fig. o)
M PROFIBUS PA, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n)
1 2
N PROFIBUS PA, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o)
PC
O PROFIBUS PA, operation inside (see Fig. o)

P FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation outside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, n)
Q FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside, LCD (see Fig. ➀, o)
R FOUNDATION Fieldbus, operation inside (see Fig. o)
30 Housing; Cable entry; Protection:

T14 A Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
B Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2
C Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT
T15
D Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M12x1 PA plug
E Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug
F Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Han7D plug, 90°
J Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
K Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2
L Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT
T17 M Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M12x1 PA plug
N Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug
P Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Han7D plug, 90°
1 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
2 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread G 1/2
3 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Thread 1/2 NPT
4 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug
5 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug
6 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Han7D plug, 90°
R T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M20 gland, T17 = side cover
S T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; G1/2 thread, T17 = side cover
T T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; NPT1/2 thread, T17 = side cover
U T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; M12 plug, T17 = side cover
V T17 316L Hygiene IP66/68 NEMA6P; 7/8" plug, T17 = side cover
Z Housing: see additional specifications
40 Nominal range; PN:

Nominal value PN
7B 25 mbar/2500 Pa/0.375 psi 10 bar/1 MPa/150 psi
7D 100 mbar/10 kPa/1.5 psi 16 bar/1.6 MPa/240 psi
7F 500 mbar/50 kPa/7.5 psi 100 bar/10 MPa/1500 psi
7H 3 bar/300 kPa/45 psi 100 bar/10 MPa/1500 psi
78 Prepared for Deltatop
Endress+Hauser 69
Deltabar S
PMD70 (continued) 50 Calibration; Unit:

1 Nominal range; mbar/bar
2 Nominal range; kPa/MPa
3 Nominal range; mmH2O/mH2O
4 Nominal range; inH2O/ftH2O
6 Nominal range; psi
8 Configured for Deltatop; see additional specification
B Customer-specific; see additional specification
C Factory calibration certificate, 5-point; see additional specification
D DKD certificate; see additional specification
K Platinum; see additional specification
L Platinum and factory calibration certificate, 5-point; see additional specification
M Platinum and DKD certificate; see additional specification
70 Process connection; Material:

B 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8 (CRN)
D 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (CRN)
F 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Alloy C (CRN)
G 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, PVDF
U RC 1/4 mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (CRN)
1 1/4 – 18 NPT, mounting: PN 160: M10, C22.8 (CRN)
2 1/4 – 18 NPT, mounting: PN 160: M10, AISI 316L (CRN)
3 1/4 – 18 NPT, mounting: PN 160: M10, Alloy C (CRN)
80 Seal:
A FKM Viton
B EPDM
D Kalrez
E Chemraz
1 FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease
2 FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service
Note application limits pressure/temp.
100 Additional option 1:

A Not selected
E SIL/IEC 61508 Declaration of Conformity
B Material test certificate for wetted components, inspection certificate as per
EN 10204 3.1 acc. to specification 52005759
M Overvoltage protection
J Software setting, see additional spec.
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
Min alarm current + HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
S GL/ABS marine certificate
U Mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
V Mounting on shut-off valve from above
W Mounting on shut-off valve from below
2 Test report acc. to EN10204 2.2
3 Routine test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1
4 Overpressure test with certificate,
inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1
70 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
PMD70 (continued) 110 Additional option 2:

A Not selected
G Separate housing, cable length see additional spec. + mounting bracket,
wall/pipe, 316L
(FM/CSA IS: for Div. 1 installation only)
K Vent valves (2 pieces), Alloy C
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
R Screws 7/16 UNF, length 1 1/2" (4 pieces) for oval flange adapter PZO
U Mounting bracket for wall/pipe, AISI 304
4 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 3.1
5 Helium leak test EN 1518 with test certificate inspection certificate as per
EN 10204 3.1
995 Identification:
Z1 Measuring point (TAG)
Z2 Bus address
PMD70 complete order code
Endress+Hauser 71
Deltabar S
PMD75 This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive.
10 Approval:
2 ATEX II 1/2 D
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
3 ATEX II 1/2 GD Ex ia IIC T6
5 ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6
T FM XP, Class I Division 1, Groups A – D; AEx d
m V CSA XP, Class I Division 1, Groups B – D; Ex d
G NEPSI Exd IIC T6
– + E
L TIIS Ex do IIC T6
B Combined certificates: ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + II G Ex d IIC T6
C Combined certificates: FM IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D
D Combined certificates: CSA IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D
E Combined certificates: FM/CSA IS and XP Class I Division 1, Groups A – D
F Combined certificates: ATEX II Ex ia / Ex d + FM/CSA IS + XP; ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+; ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+;
FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
1 2
PC


T15 E Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, 7/8" FF plug
M Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M 12x1 PA plug
T17
+ –
72 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
PMD75 (continued) 40 Nominal range; PN:

Nominal value PN
7B 10 mbar/1 kPa/0.15 psi 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi
7C 30 mbar/3 kPa/0.45 psi 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi
7D 100 mbar/10 kPa/1.5 psi 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi
7L 16 bar/1.6 MPa/240 psi 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi
7M 40 bar/4 MPa/600 psi 160 bar/16 MPa/2400 psi
78 Prepared for Deltator; PN = 160 bar
88 Prepared for Deltatop; PN = 420 bar
50 Calibration; Unit:
8 Configured for Deltatop; see additional specification
M DKD calibration: see additional specifications. Platinum and DKD certificate
60 Process isolating diaphragm material:

1 AISI 316L
2 Alloy C
3 Monel
5 Tantalum
6 Alloy C with gold-rhodium coating

B 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8 (CRN),
including 2 vent valves (AISI 316L)
C 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, C22.8, side vent,
including 4 fastening bolt connections and 2 vent valves (AISI 316L)
D 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (CRN),
E 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, side vent,
F 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Alloy C (CRN),
without screws/vents
H 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Alloy C,
side vent, without screws/vents
U RC 1/4 mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L (CRN),
V RC 1/4 mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, AISI 316L, side vent,
W Prepared for diaphragm seal mount
1 1/4 – 18 NPT, mounting: PN 160: M10, PN 420: M12, C22.8 (CRN),
2 1/4 – 18 NPT, mounting: PN 160: M10, PN 420: M12, AISI 316L (CRN),
3 1/4 – 18 NPT, mounting: PN 160: M10, PN 420: M12, Alloy C (CRN)
80 Seal:
A FKM Viton
C PTFE
F NBR
K Copper seal ring, cleaned for oxygen service
1 FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease
2 FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service
Note application limits pressure/temp.
3 PTFE, cleaned for oxygen service
H Copper seal ring
Endress+Hauser 73
Deltabar S
PMD75 (continued) 100 Additional option 1:

A Not selected
C NACE MR0175 (wetted parts)
D Material test certificate for wetted components as per EN 10204 3.1 and
NACE MR0175 material, inspection certificate as per EN 10204 acc. to
specification 520108806
➃ M Overvoltage protection
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
➄ U Mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
V Mounting on shut-off valve from above (see Fig. ➃)
W Mounting on shut-off valve from below (see Fig. ➄)

A Not selected
wall/pipe, 316L
L Vent valves (4 pieces), Alloy C
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
4 Overpressure test with certificate, inspection certificate as per
EN 10204 3.1
EN 10204 3.1
995 Identification:
Z2 Bus address
PMD75 complete order code
74 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
FMD76 This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive.
10 Approval:
m 2 ATEX II 1/2 D Ex ia IIC T6
– + E
E Combined certificates
ATEX II Ex ia + FM IS + CSA IS
ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 +
FM/CSA IS Class I, II, III Division 1 Group A - G
1 2
PC


A Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
T15 D Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, M12x1 PA plug
T14 F Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Han7D plug, 90°
T17 1 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
40 Nominal range; PN:

Nominal value PN
7D 100 mbar/10 kPa/1.5 psi 16 bar/1.6 MPa/240 psi
Endress+Hauser 75
Deltabar S
FMD76 (continued) 50 Calibration; Unit:

M DKD calibration: see additional specifications. Platinum and DKD certificate
70 Process connection low-pressure side; Material; Seal:

Mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF
B 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, C22.8, FKM Viton (CRN)
D 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, FKM Viton (CRN)
F 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, FKM Viton (CRN)
G 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, PVDF, FKM Viton,
Safety instructions, observe electrostatic charge.
K 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, EPDM (CRN)
L 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, EPDM (CRN)
M 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, Kalrez (CRN)
N 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, Kalrez (CRN)
P 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, Chemraz (CRN)
Q 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, Chemraz (CRN)
S 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, FKM Viton, cleaned from oil and grease (CRN)
T 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, FKM Viton, cleaned for oxygen service (CRN)
U RC 1/4, AISI 316L, FKM Viton (CRN)
80 Process connection high-pressure side, material:

EN/DIN flanges
B DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L
D DN 80 PN 10-40, AISI 316L with ECTFE coating
Safety instructions, observe electrostatic charge!
E DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, Alloy C276
F DN 100 PN 10-16 B1, AISI 316L
G DN 100 PN 25-40 B1, AISI 316L
H DN 100 PN 25-40, AISI 316L with ECTFE coating
J DN 100 PN 25-40 B1, Alloy C276
L DN 100 PN 10-16, AISI 316L with ECTFE coating
M DN 100 PN 10-16 B1, Alloy C276
ANSI flanges
P 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
R 3" 150 lbs, AISI 316/316L with ECTFE coating
S 3" 150 lbs RF, Alloy C276 (CRN)
T 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
U 4" 150 lbs, AISI 316/316L with ECTFE coating
V 4" 150 lbs RF, Alloy C276 (CRN)
W 4" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
JIS flanges
1 10K 80A RF, AISI 316L
3 10K 80A RF, Alloy C276
4 10K 100A RF, AISI 316L
76 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
FMD76 (continued) 100 Additional option 1:

A Not selected
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT

A Not selected
wall/pipe, 316L
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
EN 10204 3.1
995 Identification:
Z2 Bus address
FMD76 complete order code
Endress+Hauser 77
Deltabar S
10 Approval:
m 2 ATEX II 1/2 D
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
– + E
V CSA XP, Class I Division 1, Groups B – D; Ex d
G NEPSI Ex d IIC T6
L TIIS Ex do IIC T6
B Combined certificates: ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + II G Ex d IIC T6
1 2
PC


T15
+ –
T17 P Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 65/NEMA 4X, Han7D plug, 90°
78 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
FMD77 (continued) 40 Nominal range; PN:

Nominal value PN
60 Process isolating diaphragm material (high-pressure side):

1 AISI 316L
2 Alloy C
3 Monel
5 Tantalum
6 AISI 316L with gold-rhodium coating
7 AISI 316L with 0.09 mm PTFE foil (not for vacuum applications)
70 Process connection low-pressure side; Material; Seal:

Mounting: 7/16 – 20 UNF, Process isolating diaphragm low-pressure side AISI 316L
B 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, C22.8, FKM Viton (CRN)
D 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, FKM Viton (CRN)
F 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C276, FKM Viton (CRN)
H 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, PTFE+C4-ring (CRN)
J 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, PTFE+C4-ring (CRN)
K 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, EPDM (CRN)
L 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, EPDM (CRN)
M 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, Kalrez (CRN)
N 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, Kalrez (CRN)
P 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, Chemraz (CRN)
Q 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, Alloy C, Chemraz (CRN)
S 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, cleaned from oil and grease (CRN)
T 1/4 – 18 NPT IEC 61518, AISI 316L, cleaned for oxygen service (CRN)
U RC 1/4, AISI 316L, FKM Viton (CRN)
80 Process connection high-pressure side, material:

EN/DIN flanges
A DN 50 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L
B DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L
C DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, extended diaphragm seal: 50 mm/100 mm/200 mm
F DN 100 PN 10-16 B1, AISI 316L
G DN 100 PN 25-40 B1, AISI 316L
ANSI flanges
N 2" 150 lbs, RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
P 3" 150 lbs, RF, AISI316/ 316L (CRN)
Q 3" 150 lbs, RF, AISI 316/316L, extended diaphragm seal: 2"/4"/6"/8"
T 4" 150 lbs, RF, AISI 316L (CRN)
5 3" 150 lbs, RF, compact, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5
7 3" 150 lbs, RF, compact, 316/316L, extended diaphragm seal: 2"/4"/6"/8",
flange ANSI B16.5 see additional specification
W 4" 300 lbs, RF, AISI 316L (CRN)
JIS flanges
X 10K 50A RF, AISI 316L
1 10K 80A RF, AISI 316L
4 10K 100 A RF, AISI 316L
Endress+Hauser 79
Deltabar S
FMD77 (continued) 90 Fill fluid:

A Silicone oil
D Vegetable oil
L Low-temperature oil
V High-temperature oil
F Inert oil

A Not selected
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
2 Test report acc. to EN 10204 2.2

A Not selected
G Separate housing, cable length see additional spec. + mounting
bracket,
wall/pipe, 316L
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
3 Routine test with certificate,
995 Identification:
Z2 Bus address
80 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
10 Approval:
2 ATEX II 1/2 D
4 ATEX II 1/3 D
m V CSA XP, Class I Division 1, Groups B – D; Ex d
G NEPSI Ex d IIC T6
–
+ E
L TIIS Ex do IIC T6
B Combined certificates: Combined certificates: ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + II G Ex d IIC T6
1 2
PC


T14
A Aluminum T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
+ –
T15 J Aluminum T15 housing, optional display on the top, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
T17 1 AISI 316L T14 housing, optional display on the side, IP 66/67/NEMA 4X/ 6P, Gland M 20x1.5
Endress+Hauser 81
Deltabar S
FMD78 (continued) 40 Nominal range; PN:

Nominal value PN
60 Process isolating diaphragm material:

1 AISI 316L
2 Alloy C
3 Monel
5 Tantalum
6 AISI 316L with gold-rhodium coating
7 AISI 316L with 0.09 mm PTFE foil (not for vacuum applications)

Diaphragm seal cell structure
UF Cell DN 50 PN 16-400, AISI 316L
UH Cell DN 80 PN 16-400, AISI 316L
UJ Cell DN 100 PN 16-400, AISI 316L
VF Cell 2" 150-2500 lbs, AISI 316L (CRN)
VH Cell 3" 150-2500 lbs, AISI 316L (CRN)
VJ Cell 4" 150-2500 lbs, AISI 316L (CRN)
Threaded connections
GA Thread ISO 228 G 1/2 B, PN 40, AISI 316L, separator, PTFE seal
RL Thread ANSI 1/2 MNPT, PN 40, AISI 316L, separator, PTFE seal
Clamp connections
TB Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 25 (1"), DIN 32676 DN 25, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
TC Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 38 (1 – 1 1/2"), DIN 32676 DN 40, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
TD Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 51 (2"), DIN 32676 DN 50, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
TF Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 76.1 (3"), EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
Pipe diaphragm seal Clamp connections
SB Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 25 (1"), 3A, AISI 316L
SC Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 38 (1 1/2"), 3A, AISI 316L, 3.1 +
pressure test acc. to PED Cat. II
SD Tri-Clamp, ISO 2852 DN 51 (2"), 3A, AISI 316L, 3.1 + pressure test acc. to PED Cat. II
Hygienic connections
TR Varivent model N for pipes DN 40 – DN 162, PN 40, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
TK DRD DN50 (65 mm), PN 25, AISI 316L
WH Sanitary tank spud, 3A, AISI 316L, extended diaphragm seal 2"
MR DIN 11851 DN 50 PN 25 slotted nut, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
MS DIN 11851 DN 65 PN 25 slotted nut, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
MT DIN 11851 DN 80 PN 25 slotted nut, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
M3 DIN 11851 DN 50 PN 25 threaded adapter, EHEDG, 3A, AISI 316L
EN/DIN flanges
B3 DN 50 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L
B5 DN 80 PN 10-40 B1, AISI 316L
BT DN 100 PN 10-16 B1, AISI 316L
B6 DN 100 PN 25-40 B1, AISI 316L
82 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
FMD78 (continued) 80 Process connection; Material (continued):

ANSI flanges
AF 2" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
AR 2" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
AG 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
AS 3" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
J4 3" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L, extended diaphragm seal: 2"/4"/6"/8" (CRN),
see additional specification
AH 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
AT 4" 300 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L (CRN)
J5 4" 150 lbs RF, AISI 316/316L, extended diaphragm seal: 2"/4"/6"/8" (CRN),
see additional specification
JIS flanges
KF 10K 50A RF, AISI 316L
KL 10K 80A RF, AISI 316L
KH 10K 100A RF, AISI 316L
90 Capillary length; Fill fluid:

1 ... m capillary; silicone oil
2 ... m capillary; vegetable oil
3 ... m capillary; high-temperature oil
4 ... m capillary; inert oil for oxygen service
5 ... m capillary; low-temperature oil
A ... ft capillary; silicone oil
B ... ft capillary; vegetable oil
C ... ft capillary; high-temperature oil
D ... ft capillary; inert oil for oxygen service
E ... ft capillary; low-temperature oil

A Not selected
EN 10204 acc. to specification 52005759
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
U Mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
Endress+Hauser 83
Deltabar S
FMD78 (continued) 110 Additional option 2:

A Not selected
wall/pipe, 316L
Min alarm current
HART burst mode PV
N HistoROM/M-DAT
R 4x screw UNF7/16, length 1-1/2"
995 Identification:
Z2 Bus address
84 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Additional documentation
Field of Activities • Pressure measurement, powerful instruments for process pressure, differential pressure, level and flow:
FA004P/00/EN
Technical Information • Deltapilot S: TI416P/00/EN

• Cerabar S: TI383P/00/EN
• Deltatop:
– Orifice plate (TI422P/00/EN)
– Pitot tube (TI425P/00/EN)
• EMC test procedures: TI241F/00/EN
Operating Instructions 4 to 20 mA HART:

• Deltabar S: BA270P/00/EN
• Description of device functions Cerabar S/Deltabar S/Deltapilot S: BA274P/00/EN
PROFIBUS PA:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus:
Brief Operating Instructions • 4 to 20 mA HART, Deltabar S: KA1018P/00/EN

• PROFIBUS PA, Deltabar S: KA1021P/00/EN
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus, Deltabar S: KA1024P/00/EN
Functional safety manual (SIL) • Deltabar S (4 to 20 mA): SD189P/00/EN
Safety Instructions Certificate/type of Device Electronic insert Documenta- Version in

protection tion the order
code
ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XA235P 1 (6)

(WHG) FMD76, FMD77, PROFIBUS PA,
FMD78 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
ATEX II 1/2 D PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA237P 2

FMD77, FMD78 – PROFIBUS PA, – XA280P
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
ATEX II 1/2 D Ex ia IIC T6 FMD76 – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA238P 2

– PROFIBUS PA, – XA281P
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
ATEX II 1/3 D PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA239P 4

FMD77, FMD78 – PROFIBUS PA, – XA282P
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XA240P 5

FMD78 PROFIBUS PA,
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
ATEX II 3 G Ex nA II T6 PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XA241P 7

FMD76, FMD77, PROFIBUS PA,
ATEX II 1/2 GD PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XA243P 3

Ex ia IIC T6 FMD76, FMD77, PROFIBUS PA,
ATEX II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6 PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XA275P 8

ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XA242P B

ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 FMD78 PROFIBUS PA,
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Endress+Hauser 85
Deltabar S
Certificate/type of Device Electronic insert Documenta- Version in

code
ATEX II Ex ia + FM IS + CSA IS PMD70, FMD76 – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA235P, E

ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + ZD141P,
FM/CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 ZD142P
Gr.A-G FM: Zone 0,1,2/CSA: – PROFIBUS PA, – XA235P,
Zone 0,1,2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus ZD188P,
ZD189P
ATEX II Ex ia / Ex d + FM/ PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA242P, F

CSA IS + XP FMD78 ZD153P,
ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+ ZD186P
ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+ – PROFIBUS PA, – XA242P,
FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I Div.1 FOUNDATION Fieldbus ZD190P,
Gr.A-D ZD191P

code
IECEx Zone 0/1 Ex ia IIC T6 PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XB004P I


code
NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XC004P H
NEPSI Ex d IIC T6 PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – XC006P G

FMD78 PROFIBUS PA,
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Installation/Control Drawings Certificate/type of Device Electronic insert Documen- Version in the

protection tation order code
FM IS Class I, II, III, PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART – ZD141P S

Division 1, Groups A – G; FMD76, FMD77, – PROFIBUS PA, – ZD188P
NI, Class I Division 2, FMD78 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Groups A – D; AEx ia
CSA IS Class I, II, III, PMD70, PMD75, – 4 to 20 mA HART – ZD142P U
Division 1, Groups A – G; FMD76, FMD77, – PROFIBUS PA, – ZD189P
Class I Division 2, FMD78 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Groups A – G
FM IS + XP Class I, PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART – ZD186P C

Division 1, Groups A – D FMD78 – PROFIBUS PA, – ZD190P
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
CSA IS + XP Class I, PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART – ZD153P D

Division 1, Groups A – D FMD78 – PROFIBUS PA, – ZD191P
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
ATEX II Ex ia + FM IS + CSA IS PMD70, FMD76 – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA235P, E

ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + ZD141P,
FM/CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 ZD142P
Gr.A-G FM: Zone 0,1,2/CSA: – PROFIBUS PA, – XA235P,
Zone 0,1,2 FOUNDATION Fieldbus ZD188P,
ZD189P
86 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar S
Certificate/type of Device Electronic insert Documen- Version in the

protection tation order code
ATEX II Ex ia / Ex d + FM/ PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART – XA242P, F

CSA IS + XP FMD78 ZD153P,
ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+ ZD186P
ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+ – PROFIBUS PA, – XA242P,
FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I Div.1 FOUNDATION Fieldbus ZD190P,
Gr.A-D ZD191P
CSA XP Cl.I Div.1 Gr.B-D, PMD75, FMD77, – 4 to 20 mA HART, – ZD229P V

Ex d, Zone 1,2 FMD78 PROFIBUS PA,
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Overfill protection • WHG: ZE259P/00/DE
Endress+Hauser 87
Deltabar S
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel. +41 61 715 81 00

Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI382P/00/EN/05.10
No 71111786
CSS/FM+SGML 6.0 71111786

Traductor de Presiune - PMD75

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Traductor de Presiune - PMD75

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

abcd

ROVINARI – Turn-Key WFGD Units 3-6

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Aparat Documentatie Continut Prezentare

Instructiuni de operare BA274P – Exemple de configurare pentru → Vezi: www.endress.com →

Rezumat instructiuni operare KA218P – Cablare Documentatia este furnizata cu

Manual functionare in siguranta – Functionare in siguranta cu Documentatia este furnizata cu

6 Punerea in functiune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

1 Precizari privind siguranta

1.2 Instalare, punere in functiune si operare

1.3 Siguranta in functionare

1.3.1 Zone cu pericol de explozie

1.4 Precizari privind conventii si simboluri de siguranta

Aparat certificat pentru utilizare in zone cu pericol de explozie

Zona cu pericol de explozie

Zona sigura (fara pericol de explozie)

Terminal de impamantare de protectie

2.1 Destinatie aparat

Fig. 1: Eticheta pentru Deltabar S

Aparatele utilizate in mediu Ex sunt prevazute cu o eticheta suplimentara.

Fig. 2: Eticheta suplimentara pentru aparatele utilizate in mediu Ex

2.2 Scopul livrarii

2.3 Marca CE, declaratia de conformitate

2.4 Marci inregistrate

KALREZ, VITON, TEFLON

3.1 Receptia si depozitarea

3.2 Conditii de instalare

3.3 Instructiuni de instalare

3.3.1 Instalarea pentru masurarea debitului

Masurarea debitului de gaze cu PMD70/PMD75

Fig. 3: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului de gaze cu PMD75

Masurarea debitului de abur cu PMD70/PMD75

Fig. 4: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului de abur cu PMD75

• Se monteaza Deltabar S sub punctul de masurare.

Masurarea debitului unui lichid cu PMD70/PMD75

Fig. 5: Schema de montaj pentru masurarea debitului unui lichid cu PMD75

3.3.2 Instalarea pentru masurarea nivelului

Masurarea nivelului intr-un container deschis cu PMD70/PMD75

Masurarea nivelului intr-un container deschis cu FMD76/FMD77

Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu PMD70/PMD75

Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu FMD76/FMD77

Masurarea nivelului intr-un container inchis cu FMD78

3.3.3 Instalarea pentru masurarea presiunii diferentiale

Masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru gaze si abur cu PMD70/PMD75

• Se monteaza Deltabar S deasupra prizei de masura astfel incat condensatul sa se scurga in

Masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru lichide cu PMD70/PMD75

• Cand se masoara in medii cu particule solide, cum ar fi lichide cu impuritati, se instaleaza

Masurarea presiunii diferentiale pentru gaze, abur si lichide cu FMD78

• Se monteaza diafragma etansa cu capilarele pe partea de sus sau laterala a conductei.

3.3.4 Instructiuni de instalare pentru aparatele cu diaframe etanse

3.3.5 Garnitura pentru montarea flansei

Fig. 19: Montarea versiunilor cu flansa sau diafragma etansa

3.3.6 Montare pe perete sau teava (optional)

Trebuie respectate urmatoarele reguli la montaj:

3.3.7 Rotirea carcasei

Fig. 21: Aliniera carcasei

3.4 Verificari dupa instalare

4.1 Conectarea electrica a aparatului

• Tensiunea de alimentare trebuie sa corespunda cu tensiunea de alimentare de pe eticheta

Á 4... 20mA Test

Fig. 22: Conectarea electrica 4...20 mA HART

4.1.1 Conectarea aparatelor cu conectorul de Hart Han7D

4.1.2 Conectarea aparatelor cu conectorul M12